stenos cop 2

HOME

Medical Systems Medical Systems eStenoscopStenoscop/MDA 826921P615/MDA 826921P615

2

TechnicalPublications826 921 P615Revision 2

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.smService Manual

do not duplicate

Copyright� 1998 GE Medical Systems

February 1998

3

ATTENTION

LES APPAREILS À RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX À LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEURSI LES MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES

Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus sévères, la source de rayonnement X représente un dangerlorsque le manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement X entraîne des dommages à l’organisme.

Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les personnes non autorisées ou non qualifiées utilisent cetappareil créant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles–mêmes.

Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se renseigner sur les mesures deprotection établies par la Commission Internationale de la Protection Radiologique, Annales 26 : Recommandations de la CommissionInternationale sur la Protection Radiologique et les normes nationales en vigueur.

WARNING

X–RAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATORUNLESS MEASURES OF PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED

Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x–ray beam becomes a source ofdanger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x–radiation causes damage to human tissue.

Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this equipment or exposingthemselves or others to its radiation.

Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the Recommendations of the Interna-tional Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals Number 26 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.

ATENCION

LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADORCUANDO LAS NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS

Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiación X constituye un peligro al ser manipuladopor personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una exposición excesiva a la radiación X puede causar daños al organismo.

Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o no autorizadasutilicen este aparato, lo que sería un peligro para los demás y para sí mismas.

Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán informarse sobre lasnormas de protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales No 26: Recomendaciónes de la Comi-sión Internacional sobre la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.

ACHTUNG

RÖNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FÜR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL,WENN DIE GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN

Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den Händen unbe-fugter oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle. Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Orga-nismus schädlich.

Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte Personen solcheGeräte bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.

Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats sollte sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden Kriterien für den ge-fahrlosen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 26 der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertrautmachen: Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.

GE Medical Systems STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A.

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

i

SUMMARY

2 – PREINSTALLATION 2. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–1 BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS. 2. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER SPECIFICATIONS. 2. 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–3 IMAGER 16/22 CCD SPECIFICATIONS. 2. 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–4 MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS. 2. 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 – INSTALLATION 3. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1 RECEPTION OF THE MOBILE SURGICAL UNIT 3. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–2 MAIN SUPPLY 3. 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–3 INTERCONNECTION 3. 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 3. 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–5 CDRH CERTIFICATION 3. 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–6 DR4 / MD10 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. 3 . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–7 MDA COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. 3 . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–8 COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING. 3 . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–9 CCM 620 – Photography parameters setting 3 . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 – FUNCTIONAL CHECK 4. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1 MECHANICAL TESTS 4. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2 CDRH COMPLIANCE TEST 4. 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

ii

SUMMARY (CONT.)

6 – SERVICE PROCEDURES 6. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 6. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 6. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–3 JOB CARDS SYNOPTIC TABLE 6. 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS 6. 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5 ADJUSTMENT SHEETS 6. 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS 6. 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS 6. 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–6 LIST OF USED MEASURING EQUIPMENT. 6. 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 – SCHEMATICS 7. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–1 IDENTIFICATION 7. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–2 SCHOTTKY DIODES 7. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3 LIST OF SYMBOLS 7. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–4 LIST OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE SCHEMATICS 7. 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–5 USE OF THE SCHEMATICS 7. 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 – SPARE PARTS 9. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–1 STENOSCOP 9 . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–2 LASER 9 . 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–3 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER 9 . 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–4 IMAGER 9 . 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–6 MONITOR 9 . 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–7 KITS (MONITOR CART) 9 . 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCHEMATICS A3 (see TOC page A – i) A – i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

iii

REVISION HISTORY

REV DATE TYPE OF MODIFICATION

A August, 1996 Preliminary release from engineering validation.0 November, 1996 Product document release.1 January, 1997 Update and corrections.2 February, 1998 M5 version; update and corrections.

+ RG 251 : II input dose clarification.+ RG 256 : gain adjustment procedure revised because of the release of a newSony CCD module.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISIONNUMBER NUMBER



Title page 2Safety Instructions 2

Summaryi to ii 2

Rev. historyiii to iv 2

Chapter 2Table of contents

2–i to 2–ii 22–1 to 2–12 2


3–i to 3–ii 2Prod. 3–iii to 3–iv 2

3–1 to 3–14 2


4–i to 4–ii 24–1 to 4–14 2


6–i to 6–viii 26–1 to 6–218 2


7–i to 7–ii 27–1 to 7–10 2


9–i to 9–ii 29–1 to 9–98 2

Schematics –Din A3Table of contents

A–i to A–ii 2A–1 to A–78 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

iv

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . i

CHAPTER 2 – PREINSTALLATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2–1 STENOSCOP : BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS. 2 . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER SPECIFICATIONS. 2 . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2–1 Model 841–SO Chamber : 2 . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2–2 Electronic Enclosure : 2 . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2–3 Display Unit : not used with MDA Memory 2 . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2–4 Power Supply : 2 . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–2–5 Cable : 2 . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–3 IMAGER 16/22 CCD SPECIFICATIONS. 2 . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–3–1 Overview 2 . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–3–2 Composition 2 . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–3–3 Safety Instructions 2 . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–3–4 Specifications 2 . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–3–5 Special Functions 2 . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–3–6 MAINTENANCE 2 . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–4 MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS. 2 . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–4–1 Physical Characteristics 2 . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–4–2 Power Input 2 . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–4–3 Video Input 2 . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–4–4 Rotating Connector 2 . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–4–5 Environmental Conditions 2 . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–4–6 Regulations 2 . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . ii

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 1

2 PREINSTALLATION

2 .

2–1 STENOSCOP : BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS.

According to the order specifications, the STENOSCOP Series 6000 / 9000 C.C.D. is available in 4 models.

MODEL TCB92 601 P 478 STENO 2 6000 CCD 50 Hz TCB92 601 P 479 STENO 2 6000 CCD 60 Hz TCB92 601 P 480 STENO 2 9000 CCD 50 HzTCB92 601 P 481 STENO 2 9000 CCD 60 Hz

The components of these models are listed in 2 charts and indexed according to the following criteria : OO , OF , SOF , ACC , C , USA

OO : OBLIGATORY option necessary for the operation of the unit To be ordered separately.

OF : FACULTATIVE Option To be ordered separately.

SOF : OBLIGATORY option necessary for the operation of the unit but DEPENDING of THE FACULTATIVE Option

Components supplied according to the FACULTATIVE Option

ACC : Spécific componentsTo be ordered separately.

C : ConsommableTo be ordered separately.

USA : Supplied direct by GE – USA following the GE – CGR spécifications.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 2

STENOSCOP 2 CONFIGURATION – Only for information

MODEL TCB92 601 P 481 STENO 2 9000 CCD 60 HzTCB92 601 P 480 STENO 2 9000 CCD 50 HzTCB92 601 P 479 STENO 2 6000 CCD 60 Hz TCB92 601 P 478 STENO 2 6000 CCD 50 Hz

COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION CATALOGNUMBER

478 479 480 481

STENO 2 –MOBILE FRAME ASM(with XR head, without monitor cart)

OO OO OO OO

BASE 6000 / 9000 OO OO OO OO

KIT STENO 6000 / 9000 CCD PEG OO OO OO OO

IMAGER 16 (6”) CCD 50 Hz OO




16 CCD IMAGER KIT (collimator + screened mylar) OO OO

22 CCD IMAGER KIT (collimator + screened mylar) OO OO

CASSETTE HOLDER (16) 24 x 30 cm (1) B92 601 P325 OF OF

CASSETTE HOLDER (16) 9,5” x 9,5” B92 601 P326 OF

CASSETTE HOLDER (16) 10” x 12” B92 601 P358 OF OF

CASSETTE HOLDER (22) 24 x 30 cm (1) B92 601 P327 OF OF

CASSETTE HOLDER (22) 9,5” x 9,5” B92 601 P328 OF

CASSETTE HOLDER (22) 10” x 12” B92 601 P359 OF OF

RAD REMOVAL GRID (1) 24 x 30 cm (8:1, 28 L / cm)

B95 601 P172 ACC ACC ( 1 ) ACC ACC

RAD REMOVAL GRID 9,5” x 9,5” (10:1, 44L / cm )

B93 601 P157 ACC ACC ACC

RAD COLLIMATOR KIT 24 x 30 cm B92 601 P453 OO OO OO OO

RAD COLLIMATOR KIT 9.5” x 9.5” B92 601 P454 OO OO

TV MONITOR FFD NOT ROT.( with MDA ) 2153979 OO OO OO OO

TV MONITOR FFD/ROT. (+/– 170o) (with DR memory) 2153980 OO OO OO OO

2nd TV MONITOR FFD/ROT. (+/– 170o) (with DR memory) 2153980 OF OF OF OF

1 MONITOR KIT (with shelf) OO OO OO OO

2 MONITOR KIT (with shelf) OF OF OF OF


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 3

COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION CATALOG N ber 448 449 450 451MDA MEMORY B92 601 P494 OF ( 2 ) OO OO OO

Seq. Low Speed B92 601 P495 OF OF OF OF

Seq. Mid Speed B92 601 P496 OF OF OF OF

Seq. High Speed B92 601 P497 OF OF OF OF

Soft Measure B92 601 P500 OF OF OF OF

Soft Vascular 1 B92 601 P501 OF OF OF OF

Soft Vascular 2 B92 601 P502 OF OF OF OF

DR4 MEMORY + KIT B92 601 P441 OF ( 2 ) OO OO OO

MD10 MEMORY + KIT B92 601 P442 OF ( 2 ) OO OO OO

MD10 KEY BOARD OF ( 3 ) OF OF OF

CCM 620–1 VISIPLEX CAMERA 625L B92 601 P385 SOF SOF SOF SOF




CCM 620–1 + 4 VISIPLEX CAMERA 625L B92 601 P445 SOF SOF SOF SOF

CCM 620–1 + 4 VISIPLEX CAMERA 525L B92 601 P446 SOF SOF SOF SOF

FILM IMAGER KIT /STENO 6000/9000 SOF SOF SOF SOF

PAPER IMAGER UP890 CEI/ 220V 861 190 P035

PAPER IMAGER UP880 UL/ 110V 861 190 P045

PAPER IMAGER SONY UP910 CEI/ 220V 861 190 P015 SOF SOF SOF SOF

PAPER IMAGER SONY UP910/ 110V 861 190 P025 SOF SOF

PAPER IMAGER KIT / STENO 6000/9000 SOF SOF SOF SOF

VCR S–VHS SONY 220V/ 625 L/ CEI / RS232 B92 601 P503 SOF SOF

VCR S–VHS SONY 110V/ 525 L/ UL / RS232 B92 601 P504 SOF SOF

KIT VCR .SONY STENO 6000/9000 B92 601 P505 SOF SOF SOF SOF

STERILE DRAPES SET (cloth) B92 601 P350 C C C C

DISPOSABLE STERILE DRAPES SET B92 601 P357 C C C C

PM STAND ALONE KIT B92 601 P506 OO OO OO OO

XR HANDSWITCH KIT B92 601 P338 OF OF OO OO

KIT LASER IMAGER 16 (6”) B92 601 P457 OF OF

KIT LASER IMAGER 22 (9”) B92 601 P458 OF OF

KIT LASER CUVE 832 139 G015 OF OF OF OF

KIT DAP B92 601 P459 OF OF OF OF

( 1 ) Not for USA( 2 ) One of those is obligatory( 3 ) With MD10 memory only

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 4

2–2 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER SPECIFICATIONS.

2–2–1 Model 841–SO Chamber :

� Type: full field ion chamber.

� Chamber active area: 72.38 cm2.

� Dose area product rates: 1 mGycm2s–1 to 400000 mGycm2s–1.

� Energy range: 50 KVp to 150 KVp.

� Chamber sensitivity: 130 pC/mGycm2.

� Absorption: less than 0.5 mm Al.

� Connection: 2 sets of co–axial cable.

� Warm up time: 8–10 minutes.

� Transparency: greater than 75 %.

2–2–2 Electronic Enclosure :

� Calibration and offset adjustment: user accessible controls.

� Weight: 0.200 Kg.

� Signal processing: assembly contains integrated electronics.

� Test and reset push buttons.

� Power on indication.

� Physical size: 165mm x 44mm x 28mm.

2–2–3 Display Unit : not used with MDA Memory

� Display: 8 digit LCD with reset and test function.

� Display units: mGycm2.

� Dose area product range: 1 mGycm2 to 99,999,999 mGycm2.

� Free running rate: 10 KHz.

� Response time: dose rate dependent 1 ms – 5 seconds.

� Power input: < 120 mA at 24 VDC.

� Power input range: 15 – 28 VDC.

� Test & reset buttons.

� Overall size (including overlay): 120mm x 30mm x 19.5mm.

� Weight: approximately 200g.

2–2–4 Power Supply :

� Local supply at Image Intensifier: 24 VDC, 120 mA (tolerance 15 – 28 VDC).

2–2–5 Cable :

� Co–axial cable: RG174.

� Type: 9 mm oval cross section, pvc insulated 6 core.

� Length: X–ray machine specific.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 5

2–3 IMAGER 16/22 CCD SPECIFICATIONS.

2–3–1 Overview

The Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD* and 16 Stenoscop CCD are compact image intensifier (II)systems used to:

� Convert radiology images to a video image (625– or 525–line).

� Display this image on a TV monitor.

The Imageurs Stenoscop are intended to equip mobile surgical units Stenoscop 2 –6000/9000.

The different versions of the Imageur Stenoscop are:

� Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD 625 L




2–3–2 Composition

The Imageur Stenoscop CCD includes the following subassemblies:

� Mechanical mount,

� II tube (image intensifier),

� High voltage power supply,

� Optical unit, equipped with a CCD sensor.

The front cover is fitted with an anti–scatter grid which is protected by a sheet of Impax.

* Charged–Coupled Device.

2–3–3 Safety Instructions

The Imageur contains Extra High Voltage circuits indicated by a DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE label.

� Pay close attention to high–voltage safety warnings (label: ).

� All disassembly should be performed by the Field Engineer only.

� Before any disassembly of the Imageur, ensure that the unit is not under power.

� Before using the Imageur, ensure that it is correctly connected to ground by the yellow/greenground wire connecting the power supply chassis to the II assembly.

CAUTION

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 6

2–3–4 Specifications

2–3–4–1 Regulations

The Imageur complies with the following regulations:

� UL 187.

� CSA 22–2 114.

� IEC 601–1.

� JIS Z 4701 (Reference to IEC 601 – General Rule for Medical X–Ray Equipment).

� JIS Z 4721 (Medical X–Ray Intensifier).

� CDRH – Code of Federal Regulation 21 CFR.

� REDACT.

� GE 806–1 thru 806–14.

� EMC – According to IEC 601–1–2.

2–3–4–2 Operating conditions

� Temperature – Operating– Storage/transport

0°C thru 45°C – 40°C thru 70°C (IEC Standard 601–1)

� Relative humidity – Operating– Storage/transport

<80% w/o condensation <95% w/o condensation

� Altitude – Operating– Storage/transport

0 m thru 5000 m 0 m thru 5000 m

� Power supply – Voltage 24 V (dc) +10%/–15%– Consumption 850 mA (typical)– Fuse rated 2A–250 V


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 7

2–3–4–3 Mechanical characteristics

ILLUSTRATION 1–1IMAGEUR 22 CM STENOSCOP

� IMAGEUR 22 STENOSCOP CCD

– Dimensions (H x D x W) 456 x 407 x 302 mm(see ILL. 1–1).

– Input Field (at grid) 210 mm (SID of 913 mm)in Normal Mode

150 �0.5mm (SID of 913 mm)in Mag 1 Mode

– Axis/C–Arm distance 240 mm

– Weight 28 kg

ILLUSTRATION 1–2IMAGEUR 16 CM STENOSCOP

� IMAGEUR 16 STENOSCOP CCD

– Dimensions (H x D x W) 450 x 350 x 220 mm(see ILL. 1–2).

– Input Field (at grid) 144 mm (SID of 913 mm)

– Axis/C–Arm distance 145 mm

– Weight 26.7 kg

2–3–4–4 Performance

� Horizontal resolution of video image

– 22 cm

13 lp/cm in Normal Mode19 lp/cm in Mag 1 Mode

– 16 cm

17 lp/cm

(Measurements are performed at 50 kV for an exposure rate of 30 �R/s(22 cm) or 60 �R/s (16 cm) under standard conditions in the nominal field).

� Video bandwidth �0.5 db from 50 Hz through 7 MHz


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 8

2–3–4–5 Image intensifier tube

The II Tube converts the radiant image to a high luminosity image of excellent contrast. EachII tube has several qualities:

� High resolution,

� Excellent resolution uniformity.

Parameters Imageur 22 StenoscopCCD

Imageur 16 StenoscopCCD

Units

II Tube TH 9438 HX-H560 TH 9449 HP-H506 -

Quantum detection efficiency 65 65 %

Typical conversion factor 200 (150 min.) 180 (140 min.) cd m-2 /mRs-1

Typical contrast ratio (10 % disk) 30 (24 min.) 20 (16 min.)

Diameter of output image 25.2 ±0.2 14.5 ±0.5 mm

Useful entrance field size (min) 215 145 cm

Typical maximum resolution

� Normal Mode Center70% radius

≥46≥44

≥40≥40

lp/cmlp/cm

� Mag 1 Mode Center70% radius

≥52≥50

--

lp/cmlp/cm

2–3–4–6 Anti–scatter grid

An anti–scatter grid is mounted inside the bottom cover of the II System. It is sealed by a sheetof Impax of very low absorbtion coefficient (2%). The grid eliminates the x–rays scattered bythe patient. The features of this anti–scatter grid are:

Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD Imageur 16 Stenoscop CCD

Grid ratio 10 : 1 8 : 1

Focal spot 90 cm 90 cm

Number of lines /cm 36 36

Diameter 234 mm (useful diameter 225 mm) 170 mm (useful diameter 160 mm)

A spigot positions the grid at ± 45° with respect to the two sweep axes, to avoid moiré effectson the image.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 9

2–3–5 Special Functions

2–3–5–1 Fluoroscopy regulation

Automatic monitoring of the fluoro dose is based on the measurement of the average videosignal value, inside a round window inserted in the image. The diameter of this window is40% of the usable diameter of the image. In addition, the measurement circuit features adevice which enables the computation of the average value without taking into account thedark zones of the image (collimator blades, barite, etc.). With this system, the image can beused under all circumstances, particularly when the collimator blades are closed.

Note: This system operates in Automatic Mode only.

ILLUSTRATION 1–3

MEASUREMENT WINDOW

2–3–5–2 Automatic gain control (AGC)

The generator can no longer ensure the automatic dose control when it is at min. or max. stop,the automatic gain control circuit of the camera takes over. This circuit regulates the averagevalue of the video signal, in the same window as described above (40% of the usable diameterof the image). The AGC dynamics covers the x5 to ÷2 range.

2–3–5–3 Dose

The Imageur can operate for two different dose rates, corresponding to the two iris diaphragmpositions.

2–3–5–4 Recursive filter

The CCD sensor mounted in the Imageur is inherently remanence–free. In the ImageurStenoscop CCD, the noise reduction function is performed by digital processing included inthe DSM memory.

2–3–5–5 Iris diaphragm

In Automatic Mode, when the generator has reached the max. stop, a system enables theautomatic opening of the iris diaphragm in order to widen the range of video signal regulation.

� This function can be disabled.

� It is maintained to the end of the fluoroscopy sequence.

� The next fluoroscopy sequence will start with normal iris diaphragm.

2–3–5–6 Go to black

During a radiographic exposure, the image is masked by the Go to Black function.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 10

2–3–5–7 Buzzer

Triggering of the buzzer located in the II assembly indicates that an excessive temperature hasbeen reached. In case of buzzer triggering, terminate the examination. Call the GEMSmaintenance service.

2–3–5–8 CLEANING

Do not use solvents, which could dull the finish or damage the labels. Simply use a cleanduster and warm soapy water.

2–3–6 MAINTENANCE

2–3–6–1 Maintenance principle

The causes of faulty operation on the Imageur can usually be located by the user.

However, reconditioning and adjustments following replacement of defective parts call forqualified personnel.

Five main types of operating fault have been listed:

� No image appears on screen.

� Video mask only visible on screen.

� X–ray image out of focus.

� Image is present but unstable.

� Image too bright or too dark.

Note: Most defective parts can be repaired at the factory. It is therefore strongly recommendedto recuperate these parts.

2–3–6–2 Preventive maintenance

Checks to be performed annually by the Field Engineer:

� Thermal safety buzzer.

1. Connect a wire between TP2 and TP5 on the CCD Supply Board. The buzzer shouldsound.

2. Remove the wire.

3. If the buzzer does not sound, replace the CCD Supply Board.

� Focusing.

1. Set the kV to the minimum, and run the test wide open using a FUNK test pattern10–48.6 lp/cm.

2. The resolution limit measured must be superior or equal to the values given inPara 4.4. If the correct values are not found, repeat the II tube focus adjustment(see ASM, RG 350), and if necessary the optical focus adjustment (see ASM,RG 351).

� Dose rate control.

Run the tests described in RG 256 (Periodic Dose Check) of this document.

2–3–6–3 Fuse

F1/CCD Supply Board: rated 2 A/250 V (protects the 24–V (dc) power supply located in theStenoscop unit).

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 11

2–4 MONITOR SPECIFICATIONS.

2–4–1 Physical Characteristics

20”

Weight 23.5 kg (52.76 lb)

Width 460 mm (18.11 inches)

Height 379 mm (14.92 inches)

Depth 382 mm (15.03 inches)

2–4–2 Power Input

The monitor is a full range input of voltages:

� 90V to 264V.

� 50/60Hz.

� 70W.

2–4–3 Video Input

The monitor is set to a nominal 1 V signal (0.7 V video amplitude, 0.05 V set-up level, 0.3 Vsynchro). As normally adjusted, a signal with video amplitude up to 1 V can be acceptedwithout detriment to the display, provided that the overload white level signal does not occurover more than 30% of the image area.

A higher video signal (up to 1.8 V), can be accepted by adjustment of the CONTRASTCONTROL.

In all applications the video signal must be terminated by a 75 � load (normally plugged intothe OUT connector; for chained monitors only the last monitor in the chain is terminated).

2–4–4 Rotating Connector

On FFD–ROT models, this connector carries the rotation control signals: the maximumcurrent required is less than 25 mA.

2–4–5 Environmental Conditions

The monitor will maintain its performance under the following conditions:

� Temperature: -10� to +45�C.

� Relative Humidity: < 95% non-condensing.

� Atmospheric Pressure: 700 to 1060 hPa.

� Storage Temperature: -40� to +70�C.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

2 . 12

2–4–6 Regulations

The monitor complies with the standard and regulation requirements of the following:

� Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL), an independent testing laboratory following (UL 478).

� Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

� International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), international standards organization:

– IEC 601–1–2 (EMC),

– IEC 601–1.

� 21 CFR para. 1020.10 (ionizing leakage radiation).


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . i

CHAPTER 3 – INSTALLATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3–1 RECEPTION OF THE MOBILE SURGICAL UNIT 3. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–1 INTRODUCTION 3. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–2 RECEPTION OF THE STENOSCOP 2 3. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–3 IDENTIFICATION AND COMPATIBILITY 3. 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–4 Travel conditions 3. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–2 MAIN SUPPLY 3. 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–2–1 NETWORK ADAPTATION OF THE MOBILE 3. 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–2–2 SUPPLY CABLE 3. 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–3 INTERCONNECTION 3. 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 3. 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–4–1 UNBLOCKING THE COLUMN 3. 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–5 CDRH CERTIFICATION 3. 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–6 DR4 / MD10 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. 3 . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–7 MDA COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS. 3 . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–8 COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING. 3 . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–9 CCM 620 – Photography parameters setting 3 . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–9–1 Brightness, contrast and density adjustment. 3 . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . ii

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . iii


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . iv

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 1

3 INSTALLATION

3 .

3–1 RECEPTION OF THE MOBILE SURGICAL UNIT

3–1–1 INTRODUCTION

The STENOSCOP 2 is supplied ENTIRELY FACTORY MOUNTED AND CALIBRATED, so it needs NOADJUSTMENT ON PUTTING INTO SERVICE.The procedure given below makes it possible to check the reception of the various components and set thesystem going.

3–1–2 RECEPTION OF THE STENOSCOP 2

See chapter 2 PRE–INSTALLATION to check both the conformity of the site for installation and the composi-tion of the equipment to be received.

3–1–2–1 DETERIORATION DUE TO TRANSPORT

On the delivery of the equipment, all the packages will be examined to make sure that they have not been dam-aged during transport.If damage is observed, immediately notify the transport service and the transport insurance service of the fac-tory.

The same will apply for non–apparent damage due to transport discovered when unpacking the material or dur-ing installation, UP TO 15 DAYS MAXIMUM AFTER DELIVERY.

A transport service will generally not pay a bill for non apparent damage unless an inspection has beendemanded within 15 days after delivery.

If damage is discovered, immediately contact the services concerned, specifying the type of apparatus, theserial number and the order number if possible, and describe the nature of the damage.

3–1–2–2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION

See chapter 2 PRE–INSTALLATION for checking the conformity of the delivery and of the equipmentordered.

The unpacking of the components of the apparatus before it is transported into the room will be made only ifnecessary for checking damage occurring during transport. The packages will be minutely examined during installation, in order not to overlook parts of small dimensionsor envelopes containing screws, washers, etc.

3–1–3 IDENTIFICATION AND COMPATIBILITY

The STENOSCOP 2 is identified by labels giving the following information :

. Date and place of manufacture

. Serial number

. Model type and number

. Type approval and compliance with standards.

In addition, to meet HHS requirements (USA) concerning RX radiation, mAs accuracy, filtration and source–skin distance, the different components concerned carry a label ”COMPLIES WITH RADIATION PERFOR-MANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J”.

Other labels are also supplied separately for specific compliance with prevailing local regulations.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 2

edward r rogala

Imager

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Imager

edward r rogala

Cassette Holder

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Collimator

edward r rogala

Frame

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Xray Tubehead

edward r rogala

Monitor Cart


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 3

ITEM DESCRIPTION REFERENCE MODELE (USA)

A FRAME – CONTROL CONSOLE 828 490 G055 ZF0XCST2

B X R HEAD 828 520 G015 ZH0HTST2

C COLLIMATOR for IMAGER 16 cm (6”) 828 751 G 025 Z0A16ST2

22 cm (9”) 828 752 G 025 Z0A22ST2

D CASSETTE HOLDER for IMAGER 16 cm (6”)

24 x 30 cm 830 534 G 015

9,5” x 9,5” 830 535 G 015 Z0L16ST2

CASSETTE HOLDER for IMAGER 22 cm (9”)

24 x 30 cm 830 536 G 015

9,5” x 9,5” 830 537 G 015 Z0L22ST2

E IMAGER 16 cm (6”) CCD 50Hz 860 926 P 075 ZCCD16ST

22 cm (9”) CCD 50Hz 860 926 P 095 ZCCD22ST

16cm (6”) CDRH 60Hz 860 926 P 085 ZCCD16ST

22cm (9”) CDRH 60Hz 860 926 P 105 ZCCD22ST

F MONITORS CART

3–1–4 Travel conditions

To move the mobile unit from one place to another, respect the following conditions :

– vertical ”C–Arm” – imager upwards– ”wigwag” movement centered– C–Arm retracted as far as possible toward the console– column low position– movements locked– ratchet the direction handle in order to have the back wheels parallel to the chassis– foot brake released

CAUTION

THE MOBILE UNIT IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH NEGATIVE ACTION BRAKES.FOR TRAVELLING ON A SLOPE, THE OPERATOR HAS TO BE IN FRONT OF THE MOBILE UNIT ANDTHE MONITOR HOLDER, AND, IF NECESSARY A SECOND PERSON MUST BE AVAILABLE TO HELP.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 4

3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 832 502 G015

220V to 240V Mains 100V to 120V Mains

21 9R1

21 9R2

21 9R1

21 9R2

JumperJumper


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 5

3–2 MAIN SUPPLY

The mobile is factory wired for :

228V/50Hz single – phase networks (Europe)

OR 120V/60Hz single – phase networks (U.S.A.)

A frequency adaptation on site requires adaptations in the mobile but also in the imager, memory and monitorFor the mobile, proceed as specified hereunder.

3–2–1 LINE ADAPTATION OF THE MOBILE

ATTENTION : The Imager frequency is not adaptable on site. The complete CCD Camera must be changedif the frequency has to be modified.

3–2–1–1 9TR1 TRANSFORMER

The line adaptation is made at the transformer 9TR1 (diagram 1–10)

Connect wires marked A and B, and jumpers marked C and D as shown in the hereunder chart according to themains voltage and frequency.

MAINS SUPPLYFREQ

240V 228 V 220 V 208 V 200 V *120V

*108 V

*100V

Marqued wire

9TR1 TERMINALSFrequencyAdaptation A

50Hz 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

60Hz 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

VoltageAdaptation

B 1 1 1 3 3 1 2 3

Jumper C 4 – 5 4 – 6 4 – 7 4 – 6 4 – 7 4 – 8 4 – 8 4 – 8

Jumper D 2 – 2 2 – 2 2 – 2 2 – 2 2 – 2 1 – 5 2 – 6 3 – 7

* For the lines 120, 108 and 100V, it is obligatory to switch the machine over to REDUCED POWER.

The REDUCTION OF POWER is programmed at the CI 3A3 DIAPHRAGMS 2 using the switch S133.B(2–7) (diagram 117F)

S133.B OFF Normal power

S133.B ON Reduced power

* For the lines 120V 108V and 100V, it is also obligatory to connect in parallel on 9R1 an additionalresistor 9R2, see diagram 1–10b–2AConnect the jumper from 9R2 to 9R1.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Series

edward r rogala

Parallel

edward r rogala

edward r rogala


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 6

Locking rood

Transportationlock bar (rod)

9Sm1ON / OFF

9PL1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 7

3–2–2 SUPPLY CABLE

For the mobile units wired for 120V(USA), the supply cable is delivered from the factory with its plug.

For the mobile units wired for 228V (Europe), the supply cable is delivered without a plug.

According to local regulations, connect a plug (min 16A single phase + earth) as follows :

blue wire : 228V

brown wire : 228V

yellow/green wire : earth

3–3 INTERCONNECTION

– Connect the cable coming from the mobile unit to the plug 9PL1 situated on the back of the monitor holder.

Screw the fixing device in a clockwise direction.

– Connect the supplementary equipotentiality cable to the earth terminal bar (CEI only).

– Connected the network supply cable to the socket provided at the installation.

3–4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

Put the apparatus under tension with the switch at the back of the monitor cart.

3–4–1 UNBLOCKING THE COLUMN

For transport, this equipment is fitted with a bar which immobilizes the column. This bar is placed in a sheathsituated under the chassis and accessible from near the right rear wheel.The bar must be removed to allow the column to move. To remove the bar, activate for a short instant the button controlling the descent of the column.

This action has the effect of unblocking the bar which can then be removed.

ATTENTION!It is absolutely necessary to keep this bar and put it back in place if the equipment has to be transported. To avoid losing it, it is suggested that the bar be fixed on the monitor cart (behind the monitor).


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 8

3–5 CDRH CERTIFICATION

The unit is completely assembled and tested for CDRH compliance in the plant except for video imager, whichfor certain markets, is associated in the field.

In order to make sure that the installed unit complies, the following tests have to be made :

1. Check that all mounting bolts for the X–Ray head and image intensifier are tightened.If a loose bolt is found, perform the beam alignement in Rad and Fluoro.

2. Check operator display, operation of pushbutton and of buzzers.

See chap 6 RG 40 PWB swiches position.

3. Verify Fluoro mA

4. Verify Rad mAs

5. Verify Fluoro mA kVp range in manual and automatic mode

6. Make a quick test of the Fluoro ABC loop.

With 2 mm copper on the X–ray head, in normal fluoro automatic mode, the kVp–mA normally stabilize

for the 6” II

for the 9” II, large field :

9” Low Dose High Dose

KV 65/67 65/67

mA 1.7/1.9 3.2/3.4

6” Low Dose High Dose

KV 68/70 68/70

mA 1.9/2.0 3.6/3.9

If this test fails, make a complete kVp test.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 9

Blank page

HARD COPYVIDEO

SCREEN BOUT

SCREEN AOUT

CAMERAIN

R.X. CONTROLDSM

R.X. CONTROLDR

DB 15 Male DB 15 Female BNC BNC BNC BNC

FRONT PANEL

HARD COPYCONTROL

I.R. REMOTEPOWER

REAR PANEL

BNC DB 9 MaleDB 9 Male

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏMD10 Option

DR4 / MD10 DR4 / MD10

A or B C or D

or

A BC D

MonitorsOnly in DR(EMULATION)


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 10

3–6 DR4 / MD10 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏ

��

��


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 11

3–7 MDA COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.

+12V

��

9A1 TRANSPANEL

PL4

8

7

10

9


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 12

3–8 COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 13

3–9 CCM 620 – Photography parameters setting

This procedure is a summary of this one available in the camera documentation (furnished with the unit).

3–9–1 Brightness, contrast and density adjustment.

Values to be set:

Positive Negative 50 Hz 60Hz

BRT 020 025 Density 056 064CRT 250 200

a Switch ON the Video Imager.

b The message windows indicates the warm – up cycle time (60 sec.)

WARMUP 60

WARMUP 59

WARMUP 58

WARMUP 00

c At the end of warm – up, you will hear a short beep, followed by the messages here after.

SELF TEST

CALIBRATING

IMG 1/1 USR1 POS

d Hit the ”PROGRAM” button and check the displayed message.

>FMT4 USR1 POS

cursor


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

3 . 14

POS. or NEG. Selection.

Hit the buttons to set the cursor on the left side of ” POS ”.

Then hit the buttons to select ” POS ” or ” NEG ”

Press once the key in order to diplay

Adjust the BRIGHTNESS with the keys

Hit once the key to select the CONTRAST with the keys

Then adjust the contrast with the keys

Press the button

and set the appropriate DENSITY ( 50 or 60 Hz )

Store these new values with the ” PROGRAM ” button.

Refer to the CCM 620 manual for more details over theseadjustments.

POSNEG

13

24

RESET

13

>B00 C00 D00

>B020 C00 D00

24

RESET

13

24

RESET

>B020 C250 D00

13

>B020 C250 D050


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . i

CHAPTER 4 – FUNCTIONAL CHECK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4–1 MECHANICAL TESTS 4. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–1 DISPLACEMENT 4. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–2 WIG–WAG of ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY 4. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–3 IN–OUT MOTION OF ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY 4. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–4 C – ARM ROTATION AROUND THE HORIZONTAL AXIS 4. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–5 ORBITAL ROTATION OF C–ARM 4. 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–6 STABILITY OF ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY 4. 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–7 C–ARM UP–DOWN MOTION 4. 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2 CDRH COMPLIANCE TEST 4. 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–1 GENERATOR OPERATOR INDICATORS 4. 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–2 LEAKAGE RADIATION TESTING OF THE DIAGNOSTICSOURCE ASSEMBLY 4. 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–3 PRIMARY BARRIER PROTECTION 4. 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–4 RADIATION LEAKAGE OF THE IMAGE INTENSIFIER ASSEMBLY 4. 6. . . . . . .

4–2–5 KV PEAK MEASUREMENT 4. 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–6 FLUORO mA MEASUREMENT 4. 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–7 TUBE CURRENT EXPOSURE TIME PRODUCT 4. 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–8 FLUOROSCOPY TIMER. (Not required for tube replacement or re–load). 4. 8. . . . .

4–2–9 REPRODUCIBILITY 4. 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–10 QUALITY CONTROL OF THE X RADIATION 4. 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–11 MAX FLUOROSCOPIC ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE 4. 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–2–12 ALIGNMENT OF THE X–RAY FIELD AND SPOT FILM CASSETTE 4. 12. . . . . . .

4–2–13 ALIGNMENT OF THE EDGES OF THE X–RAY FIELD WITHTHE EDGES OF THE FLUOROSCOPIC IMAGE RECEIVER 4. 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . ii

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 1

4 FUNCTIONAL CHECK

4 .

1

2

43

5


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 3

4–1 MECHANICAL TESTS

The mechanical tests will be only performed when unit installation is completed : all the covers are fixed.The cassette holder is not present on the image intensifier head excepted if required.

4–1–1 DISPLACEMENT

With brake ON, a minimum of 180 N (18 kg – 40 lbs) is required to move the unit on a level hard sur-face.

With brake released (item 1), a maximum of 50N (5kg – 11 lbs) is required.

4–1–2 WIG–WAG of ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY

Motion : 12.30 degrees.

with brake ON (item 2), a minimum torque of 100 mN (10 mkg– 72 foot pounds) is required to move theassembly.

With brake released, a maximum torque of 1.5 mN (1,5mkg – 11 foot pounds) is required.

4–1–3 IN–OUT MOTION OF ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY

Travel : 200 mm

When brake is released (item 3 : not showed on image), a maximum of 50 N (5kg – 11 lbs) in required tomove the assembly when the unit is horizontal.

When the brake is ON, a minimum of 250 N (25 kg – 55 lbs) is required.

4–1–4 C – ARM ROTATION AROUND THE HORIZONTAL AXIS

Rotation : 330o ( 210o CW and 120o CCW)

With brake ON (item 4), a minimum torque of 100 mN (10 mkg – 72 foot pounds) is required to rotate theassembly.

With brake released, a maximum torque of 20 mN (2mkg – 14.5 foot pounds is required.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 4

4–1–5 ORBITAL ROTATION OF C–ARM

Rotation from the horizontal : 115º with 16 cm (6”) imager105º with 22 cm (9”) imager

1. C–Arm in a vertical plane

With brake released (item 5), a maximum of 50 N (5kg – 11 lbs) is required to rotate the assembly.

2. C–Arm in an horizontal plane

With brake released, a maximum of 100 N (10 kg – 22 lbs) is required to rotate the assembly.

With the brake ON, a minimum of 250 N (25kg – 55 lbs) is required to rotate the assembly.

4–1–6 STABILITY OF ”C” ARM ASSEMBLY

Conditions :

– all covers in place– cassette holder no fixed on the imager– brakes released : C–ARM, C–ARM support...

A maximum of 30 N (3kg – 7 lbs) is required to maintain the assembly in any position.

4–1–7 C–ARM UP–DOWN MOTION

Total travel : 455 mm (17,9”) for Imager 16 cm (6”)475 mm (18,7”) for Imager 22 cm (9”)

The maximum time of travel is 13 seconds.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 5

4–2 CDRH COMPLIANCE TEST

For more details, see HHS Stenoscop Test – Direction 46–017567.

Precautions

a) Be sure that both leads are connected when the milliammeter is inserted in the middle point of the H.V. transformer.Failure to do so could cause electrical shocks and damage the equipment.

b) Avoid thermal overload of the X–ray tube. Refer to the tube rating charts (included in the user’smanual (OM)

c) The sign indicates that X–rays will be emitted during this test.

GUARD AGAINST X–RADIATION.

NOTE 1: instruments used are listed at the end of this chapter § 5.NOTE 2: if the measured or calculated values are not within the tolerances, consult a qualified techni-cian.

The FDA tests for the Stenoscop are suitable for the GE HHS form 3382. The following information on doing the applicable tests will provide the means for adapting the data tothe form 3382. Applicable data forms are referenced with sample date. References are made to standard GE methods described in DIRECTION 13894, SYSTEM TESTS FORHHS. Only the tests that apply to the Stenoscop are included.

4–2–1 GENERATOR OPERATOR INDICATORS

TONES AND BUZZERS YES � NO � N/A �

WARNING LABEL PRESENT YES � NO � N/A �

TONES AND BUZZERS ALSO INCLUDE LIGHTS. As a radiographic exposure is made the exposure push button lights and at the end of the exposure itextinguishes.In addition a tone is heard at the end of the exposure.In Fluoro the 5 minutes timer push button flashes at 4:27 seconds and at 4:57 seconds it terminates thefluoro exposure. The ”YES” box should be checked.

WARNING LABEL PRESENT is applicable. The label can be found below the lock for the rotational motion of the C Arm. ”WARNING : This X–rayunit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless sale exposure factors and operating instructions areobserved.” The ”YES” box should be checked.

4–2–2 LEAKAGE RADIATION TESTING OF THE DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY

The radiation leak test is carried out in factory on each unit.Rejection limits : 60 mR/H or 1 mR/min (at 110 kV – 1 mA continuous duty).This leakage radiation being a constant factor, there is no need to check it on site.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 6

4–2–3 PRIMARY BARRIER PROTECTION

On each unit, the conformity of the primary barrier, dimensions, position and Lead thickness is verifiedby the manufacturer.

4–2–4 RADIATION LEAKAGE OF THE IMAGE INTENSIFIER ASSEMBLY

(Max 1 mR/hour)

Test performed on each unit by the manufacturer (must not be checked in the field).

4–2–5 KV PEAK MEASUREMENT

Tools Needed :

kV measurement Wisconsin Cassette or Keithley 35080 kVp divider, (or equivalent) (32865C Filter Pack, 65 kV – 135 kV)

Note : Conversion factor for this Pack = +.55V.Voltage measurement Digital Multimeter, 4 digits

input impedance > 10 megohmRippel measurement Oscilloscope dual channel

input impedance > 10 megohm

Procedure:

A direct measurement of the kVp is not possible because the ANODE and CATHODE connections are notaccessible.

This procedure uses the Keithley non – invasive kVp meter to calibrate the voltage reference at 110 kV and then to rely on this calibrated voltage reference to check the other kVp values.

NOTE: kVp measurements may also be taken with the Keithley, the appropriate filter pack and it’s con-version factor, however the accuracy of these different packs at these different ranges is not established. So use these as a means of checking and not necessarily as the actual definitive measurement.

Connect DVM to 3A12.a12 with reference to V. Com. (DVM...)Make these radiographic exposures : 110 kV XmAs choose the mAs appropriate, see Wisconsin or Keithley manual.

K�kVp 110kV

DVM 3A12.a12Example19.94� 109.1 kV

5.47 V

Now this RATIO K can be used to calculate the other kVps as the 3A12.a12 values are measured : (Noexposures needed).


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 7

SELECTED kV 3A12.a12 (X) CALCULATED KV (K * X)

40 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

54 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

55 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

80 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

110 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Rejection Limits = 40 to 54 kVp : + / – 15%55 to 110 kVp : + / – 7%

With a scope check : 3A12.E7 / E8 for 55 kV: 27.5V Pk. + / – 15%Ripple 110 kV: 55.0V Pk. + / – 10%

SEE SHEET RG 201 or RG 202 FOR ADJUSTMENTS IF NEEDED

4–2–6 FLUORO mA MEASUREMENT

Instrument required: mA meter (category 0.5).

The tube current is preset only in manual fluoroscopy.The current measured with the mA meter, connected to the middle point of the HV transformer, will

be the sum of the tube current and the current in the voltage divider.At 40 kV, the current in the voltage divider is 0.1 mA (i.e. without filament heating). This corrective fac-tor is proportional to the kVp.At 100 kVp, take the following measurements, after connecting the mA meter to the HV circuit (middlepoint) as shown in schematic 17C.

Preset value Measured current Corrective factor Tube current

at 100 kVp

0,1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0.25 _ _ _ _ _ _ _

0,4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0.25 _ _ _ _ _ _ _

1,6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0.25 _ _ _ _ _ _ _

4,5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0.25 _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Max. limits accepted.The difference between tube current and current displayed must not exceed + / – (0,18 mA + 7% of preset value)

NOTE: If the measured values are not within the tolerances, apply the adjustment procedureon sheet RG 204.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 8

4–2–7 TUBE CURRENT EXPOSURE TIME PRODUCT

Instrument required : mAs meter.Connect the mAs meter to the middle point of the HV transformer –,see schematic 17C.mAs measurement to be taken at 60 kVp:

mAs setting mAs measurement

60 kVp 0.16 _ _ _ _ _ _ _

1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _

5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _

160 _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Max. limits: + / – (0,18 mAs + 7% of preset value)

NOTE : If the measured value is not within tolerances, apply the adjustment procedure of adjustmentsheet RG 210.

4–2–8 FLUOROSCOPY TIMER. (Not required for tube replacement or re–load).

Tools : Huer stop watch

Method Measure the timeMeasured time must be between 4 min. 26 sec between a reset of Fluoroscopy and the moment

when the buzzer is energized : + / – 10 sec.Check the ”YES” box.

NOTE: If the measured value is not within tolerances, apply the adjustment procedure on adjustmentsheet RG 206.

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 9

4–2–9 REPRODUCIBILITY

Tools:

Capintec 192 Dosimeter with PM30 ionization chamber (30cc) or equivalent device.

Procedure :

. Place the radiation probe approximately 300 mm from the Image Intensifier as shown below.NOTE : X RAY TABLE TOP CAN BE USED WITH THE CARM EITHER VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL TO POSITIONTHE PROBE.. Place Aluminum filtration of 3.8 cm 200 mm from theimage intensifier.Note that the Aluminum filtration have a very slight influ-ence on the measurement.. Select 80 kV, 50 mAs and make a preheating exposure. Select 50 kV, .16 mAs and make an exposure and measurethe dose in mR.. Select 110 kV, 20 mAs and make an exposure and mea-sure the dose in mR.. Repeat these last two steps ten times within one hour andfill in the table below;

REPRODUCIBILITY OF EXPOSURE TEST 3.6

kVp mAs SecEXPOSURE – (mR)

X S CVkVp mAs Sec.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

X S CV

50 .16

110 20

CV = Coefficient of variation = ( S : X )

Acceptance Criteria CV < 0.045

X = Average exposure

S = Standard deviation

Standard deviation =

Xi = Exposure # 1 . 2 . 3 etc

n = Number of exposures

�

�

�

�

n

i�1

�Xi – X�2

n – 1 �

�

12

200mm 300

mmFILTRATION

PM30 IONISATIONCHAMBER

STENCDRH1

300 mm


STANDARDABSORBER


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 10

4–2–10 QUALITY CONTROL OF THE X RADIATION

NOTE : Specific test point is at 71 kV, thus the minimum half value layer requirement is 2.1 mm of Al.(mandatory).

Tools:Capintec 192 Dosimeter with PM30 ionization chamber(30cc) or equivalent device.Standard absorber : 2.5 mm of 1100 type Al : 46–173 632G1.

Procedure :. Position the radiation probe as shown here;NOTE : X RAY TABLE TOP CAN BE USEDWITH THE C ARM EITHER HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL TO POSITION THE PROBE.

. Open the collimator blades.

. Select 71 kV at 2.5 mA in Fluoro Mode.

. Make an exposure and measure the exposure rate with no added filtration.This represents 100% transmission level.

. Place the Standard Absorber in the beam as shown in theillustration and repeat the above exposure and also note exp. rate.

. Divide the WITH ABSORBER reading by the WITHOUT ABSORBER reading :

RATIO�

Std Absorber Reading(R�min)Initial Reading (R�min)

Ratio must be greater than 0.50

Record value on form 3382

RADIATION READINGRATIO

(WITH/WITHOUT)

ADDITIONAL FIL-TRATION MOUN-TED IN BEAM TO

WITHOUT STAN-DARD ABSORBER

WITH STANDARDABSORBER

(WITH/WITHOUT) TED IN BEAM TOOBTAIN THIS

RATIO (NONREMO-VABLE)

STENOSCOP 2

200mm300

mm ABSORBER


LEAD SHEET – PLOMB


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 11

4–2–11 MAX FLUOROSCOPIC ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE

Tools :Capintec 192 Dosimeter with PM30 ionization chamber (30 cc) or equivalent device.Lead Sheet 1/8” thick or equivalent blocking.Standart absorber 20 x 20 x 3.8 cm Alu type 1100

Procedure :

. Position equipment as shown in the illustration; Note : I.I. needs to be blocked from Radiation.NOTE : X RAY TABLE TOP CAN BE USED WITHTHE C ARM EITHER HORIZONTAL OR VERTICALTO POSITION THE PROBE.Place Aluminum filtration of 3.8 cm 200 mm from the image intensifier.Note that the aluminum filtration have a very slight influence on the measurement.. Open the collimator blades.. Select AUTO mode (HLC) and initiate Fluoro. . Note the exposure rate and the kV / mA parameters 110 kV – 3.9 mA.

. Select MANUAL mode 90 kV at 5.5 mA and initiate Fluoro. Note the exposure rate.

Record value on form 3382

TECHNIC DATA TAKEN

SELECTED DIALED ACTUALNORMAL DOSE HLC DOSE

SELECTEDmA MODE

DIALEDkVp

ACTUALkVp mA R/MIN mA R/MIN

MaximumManual

40

60

80

110

MaximumAutomatic

110

The dose rate shall not exceed 9 R/Min.

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 12

4–2–12 ALIGNMENT OF THE X–RAY FIELD AND SPOT FILM CASSETTE

On each unit, the X–ray field and the film cassette are aligned by the manufacturer.This alignment is not to be checked on site, except in the case of replacement of image intensifier orX–ray tube head.

Test:

equipment required:cassette, ( 9” 1/2 x 9” 1/2 for USA ), standard X–ray film, and a lead plate (2 mm thick andabout 3 cm of diameter).

Procedure :

Install the cassette holder :Place a cassette ( 9” 1/2 x 9” 1/2 for USA ) with the lead plate in its center in the cassette holder. Initiate 3 RAD exposures 50 kV – 1 mAs.WITHOUT MOVING THE CASSETTE, remove the lead plate.Initiate 1 RAD exposure 50 kV 1 mAs.After processing the film, measure the distances between the edges of the images and the edges of thefilm.The edge of the image is determined with points having the same density than in the mark of thelead plate.Then, measure the distance between the center of the field and the center of the film.

Max. limits: L + L’ and l + l < 2,5% SID (22.5 mm)L + L’ + l + l’ < 3,5% SID (31.6 mm)a < 1,5% SID (13,5 mm)

SID (source image distance).

L

l’

L’

al

If measured values are not within the tolerances, see Disassembly / Reassembly sheet D/R 11.

l”

L”

l’

L’ R

Edge of the field (film)

Edge of the image


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 13

4–2–13ALIGNMENT OF THE EDGES OF THE X–RAY FIELD WITH THE EDGES OF THE FLUOROSCOPIC IMAGERECEIVER

This alignment is carried out on each unit by the manufacturer and is not to be checked on site, exceptwhen the image intensifier, X–ray tube head or collimator is replaced.

Test equipment required:Special fixture made of two sets of steel wires.Each set is made of straight parallel wires (1 cm apart). A washer is located in the center of the mesh, standard X–ray film and cassette.

Method:

–Place the fixture on the cassette holder and make an exposure in fluoro mode (50 kV – 0.5 mA – 3 sec.). The collimator must be open to the fluoroscopic field size.

–After processing the film, observe the image of the fixture (in the same position) on the TV screen andthen redraw this image on the processed film taking the mesh and the washer as a reference.

The edges of the X–ray field and the edges of the fluoroscopic image receiver are then visible on thesame film and the alignment faults can be measured as shown

Max. limits: L’ + L” < 2,5% SID (22.5 mm)l’ + l” < 2,5% SID (22.5 mm)L’ + L” + l’ + l” < 3,5% SID (31.6 mm)

NOTE 1 : With the dual field image intensifier, this alignment shall be checked with the 2 fields.

NOTE 2 : Mandatory Compliance Form is supplied with each system.

If measured value are not within the tolerances, see Disassembly/Reassembly sheet D/R 11.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

4 . 14

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . i

CHAPTER 6 SERVICE PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6–1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 6 . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–1–1 GENERAL 6 . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–1–2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 6 . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–1–3 ANNUAL CHECK OF ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS 6 . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 6 . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–2–1 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS 6 . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–2–2 BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY 6 . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–2–3 FUSES REPLACEMENT 6 . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–3 JOB CARDS SYNOPTIC TABLE 6 . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS 6 . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4–1 GENERAL 6 . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4–2 STENOSCOP D/R SHEETS 6 . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MOBILE SYSTEM FRONT COVER. 6 . 8

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MOBILE SYSTEM REAR COVER. 6 . 10. .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF X–RAY HEAD UPPER COVER. 6 . 12. . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF THE STEERING HANDLE. 6 . 14. . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: CONTROL CONSOLE OPENING PROCEDURE. 6 . 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF GAS SPRING. 6 . 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

��

Purpose: RELEASING THE CONVERTER AND CARD RACK. 6 . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BACK WHEEL. 6 . 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BACK WHEEL BRAKE CAM. 6 . 24. . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY BRAKE SHOE. 6 . 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF X–RAY HEAD. 6 . 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF THE C–ARM MOTOR PWB. 6 . 32. . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MODULATOR CAPACITORS

4C1 TO 4C6. 6 . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF INVERTER RECTIFIER

BRIDGE 4CR7. 6 . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF PRESSE–PACK

SEMICONDUCTORS. 6 . 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF TRANSFORMER 5TR1. 6 . 40. . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF HEATING POWER SUPPLY 5A1. 6 . 42. . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF CONTROL CONSOLE 6 . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . iii


��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF C–ARM MOTOR 1M1. 6 . 46. . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BREAKER 9SM1. 6 . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: X–RAY LAMP. 6 . 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: “C–ARM” CABLE REPLACEMENT. 6 . 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4–3 DAP D/R SHEETS 6 . 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: ION CHAMBER. 6 . 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER DISPLAY REPLACEMENT

(NOT WITH MDA MEMORY) 6 . 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4–4 IMAGEUR D/R SHEETS 6 . 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: IMAGEUR HEAD DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. 6 . 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: X–RAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBE DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. 6 . 68. . .

��

Purpose: EHV POWER SUPPLY DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. 6 . 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: COMPACT OPTICS. 6 . 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: BOARD CAGE DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. 6 . 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: PRINTED WIRING BOARDS DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. 6 . 84. . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . iv


6–4–5 MEMORY D/R SHEETS 6 . 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: MIDAS BOARD. 6 . 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: AVIAS BOARD. 6 . 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: RS 232 BOARD. 6 . 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: VGA BOARD. 6 . 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: TOUCH SCREEN ASSEMBLY 6 . 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: HARD DISK 6 . 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–4–6 MONITOR D/R SHEETS 6 . 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MONITOR CART COVERS. 6 . 102. . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BOARDS FROM THE MONITOR 6 . 104. .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . v


6–5 ADJUSTMENT SHEETS 6 . 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5–1 GENERAL 6 . 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS 6 . 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5–2 STENOSCOP R/G SHEETS ( MECHANICAL ) 6 . 111. . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: BACK WHEELS ALIGNMENT. 6 . 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: HANDLE POSITION. 6 . 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: “C ARM” ROTATION BRAKE. 6 . 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5–3 LASER R/G SHEETS 6 . 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: EXTERNAL LASER AIMING. 6 . 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: INTEGRATED LASER ALIGNMENT. 6 . 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS 6 . 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5–4 STENOSCOP R/G SHEETS 6 . 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: KV CIRCUIT (3A12 – R216) – DIAGRAM 23D MEASURE WITH

WISCONSIN CASSETTE. 6 . 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: KV CIRCUIT (3A12 – R216) – DIAGRAM 23D MEASURE WITH

KEITHLEY 35080. 6 . 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: TRAVEL SAFETY (3A19 – R123) DIAGRAM 38B. 6 . 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: FLUORO ADJUSTMENT (3A26 – R9) DIAGRAM 81E FILAMENT 4. 6 . 134. . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . vi


��

Purpose: FLUORO PREHEATING (3A26 – R3) DIAGRAM 84D FILAMENT 4. 6 . 136. . . . . .

��

Purpose: FLUORO TIMER – DIAGRAM 103A. 6 . 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: RAD SAFETY DIAGRAM 83D FILAMENT 4. 6 . 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: RAD MA – RAD PREHEATING (3A26 – R4) DIAGRAM 84B FILAMENT 4. 6 . 142

��

Purpose: RAD / FLUORO SWITCH CHECK. 6 . 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: MAS INTEGRATORS (3A26 – R6) DIAGRAM 82C FILAMENT 4. 6 . 148. . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: AUTOMATIC FLUORO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT. 6 . 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB (201 – 210B). 6 . 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: PWB SWITCHES PROGRAMMATION. 6 . 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5–5 DAP R/G SHEET 6 . 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: CALIBRATION DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER. 6 . 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5–6 IMAGER R/G SHEETS 6 . 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: INTERFACE CONTROLS ALIGNMENT CHECK. ( IMAGER ) 6 . 176. . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: DOSE ADJUSTMENT. 6 . 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . vii


��

Purpose: “X–RAY ON “ DELAY ADJUSTMENT. 6 . 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: BLACK LEVEL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT. 6 . 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: II ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT WITH LONGITUDINAL AXIS. 6 . 189. . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: VIDEO SIGNAL LEVEL CHECK. 6 . 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: PERIODIC DOSE CHECK. 6 . 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5–7 MONITOR R/G SHEETS 6 . 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 100 HZ. 6 . 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 120 HZ. 6 . 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

��

Purpose: MONITOR BRIGHTNESS AND BLANKINK ADJUSTMENT. 6 . 212. . . . . . . . . . . .

6–6 LIST OF USED MEASURING EQUIPMENT. 6 . 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–6–1 RADIATION MEASUREMENTS 6 . 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–6–2 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS 6 . 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . viii

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 1

5 SERVICE PROCEDURES6 SERVICE PROCEDURES

5 . 6 .

6–1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

6–1–1 GENERAL

The purpose of preventive maintenance is to maintain equipment and verify correct equipment performance. It has three stages :

– routine maintenance: daily or weekly maintenance by the user,

– annual electronic adjustment check: this check consists in checking and, if necessary, resetting all main elec-tronic adjustments of the equipment in order to prevent derivation.

– These tests are carried out by qualified technician, the CDRH compliance tests: testing procedures required to check that the unit meets its operational specifications (see ch. 4 § 2)

These tests will be performed when X–ray head or collimator are replaced or when corrective maintenance is per-formed in regulation networks of kV and mA.

6–1–2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

This maintenance is carried out by the user. See User’s Manual.

6–1–3 ANNUAL CHECK OF ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS

These adjustments are made to ensure the highest possible operating safety. See User’s Manual.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 2

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 3

6–2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

6–2–1 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

6–2–1–1 X–RAY PROTECTION

During an operation involving X–ray emission, put a lead apron between the X–ray head and the image intensifierof the mobile system.

6–2–1–2 DIFFERENTIAL ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS

Differential electrical measurements taken with the oscilloscope (in particular, thyristor trigger voltages) must betaken with the oscilloscope in differential mode. Measurements taken in common mode with an earthed oscilloscope may destroy components.

6–2–1–3 CONNECTOR PL1 OF PWB 3A19 ”COMMANDE SCR”

Never remove this connector while the mobile system is energized. The thyristor trigger protection currents are on PWB 3A19 and there is a risk of accidental triggering if PL1 isdisconnected.

6–2–1–4 GROUNDING OF BOARDS ON EXTENDERS

Don’t forget to ground the boards (with an extension wire with FASTON terminals).

6–2–1–5 BOARD REPLACEMENT

De–energize the mobile system when replacing or extending a board.

6–2–2 BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY

6–2–2–1 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

The standard troubleshooting technique consists in replacing the boards. The interchangeability criteria for the boards are listed below in three groups:

1) Non–interchangeable boards.

2) Readily interchangeable boards. Boards without adjustment or boards which have been calibrated in the factory.

3) Interchangeable boards which require adjustments.

NOTE : Make sure that the required procedure is at hand before proceeding with adjustments.

In some instances, it will be necessary to repair the mobile system on site and to recalibrate it. All the information needed for this is given in the paragraph 4 of this chapter : Adjustments sheet RG...

6–2–2–2 NON INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS

– DIVIDER 6A1 PWB

In factory, the divider PWB 6A1 is calibrated with the X–ray head, on which it is mounted.This calibration requires specific tools which are not available on site.After accidental destruction of the 6A1 circuit, it is, however, possible to recalibrate a circuit with similar charac-teristics. This can be done in the factory only.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 4

6–2–2–3 READILY INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS

1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU PWB (C–arm motor)

2A1 MODULE G2 (control console) PWBSwitches position : see adjustment sheet RG 213

2A3 MODULE D2 (control console) PWB

3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2 (collimator) PWBSwitches position : see adjustment sheet RG 213

3A7 AD/kV PWBCheck the presence of bridge W10 (See sch 53A)

3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA2 (kV/mA reference) PWBSwitches position : see adjustment sheet RG 213Check the presence of W245 bridge (See sch 092D)

CAUTION : EPROMCheck agreement: name, position, revision

3A12 kV/mA PWBAdjustment of kV measurement: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG 201 or RG 202)Adjustment of FLUORO TIMER: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG 206)Check bridges presence W107, W109, W220, W231, W244, W245.

3A19 COMMANDE SCR2 (SCR control) PWBSwitches position : see adjustment sheet RG 213Check bridge presence W16

4A1 SCR No1 PWB

4A2 SCR No 2 PWB

5A1 PUISSANCE 4 PWB (Heating power)

7A1 FROTTEUR PWB (contact brush)

7A2 DISQUE PWB (Disk) – Complete adjustment of collimator

9A1/9A2 Relais PWB (relay)

9A4 PRISE PWB


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 5

3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G 035 – STENOSCOP 2

This board is also used for DR4 and DR7 memories.This board is fully factory calibrated.If an accidental uncalibration occurs, refer to adjustment sheet RG 212.

Switches position : see adjustment sheet RG 213

6–2–2–4 INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS WHICH REQUIRE ADJUSTMENTS

3A5 Timer PWB (Minuterie 2.)–Adjustment of ABC video (adjustment sheet RG 211).

3A26 Filament heating PWB (Chauffage filament 4)Switches position : see adjustment sheet RG 213–Adjustment of fluoro mA (adjustment sheet RG 204)–Adjustment of fluoro preheating (adjustment sheet RG 205)–Adjustment of RAD preheating (adjustment sheet RG 208)

6–2–3 FUSES REPLACEMENT

The unit is internally protected by fuses inaccessible by the user.

During corrective procedure, it is OBLIGATORY to replace a blowed fuse by means of the SAME MODEL OF FUSE.

A plastic bag with spare fuses is provided in the unit in the module 3. See D/R 1 sheet for access.

This bag countains :2 Fuses ABC 1A 250V code 854 352 P 0251 Fuse ABC 3A 250V code 854 352 P 0451 Fuse ABC 5A 250V code 854 352 P 0551 Fuse ABC 8A 250V code 854 352 P 0751 Fuse MDA 3A 250V code 854 352 P 4251 Fuse FNQ 1A 500V code 854 362 P 315

It is possible to order this ”Maintenance bag” with the code number 828 731 G 015.

6–2–3–1 FUSES LIST

NAME MODEL LOCALIZATION ACCES

1A1F5 MDA 3A 250V UNIT see sheet

1A1F8 ABC 3A 250V MODULE 1 D/R 2

5F2 ABC 3A 250V UNIT see sheet

5F3 ABC 8A 250V MODULE 5 D/R 1

9F1 ABC 1A 250V MONITOR CART see sheet

9F2 ABC 1A 250V

9F3 ABC 5A 250V MODULE 9 D/R 90

9F4 FNQ 1A 500V


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 6

6–2–3–2 REMARKS RELATING TO FUSES REPLACEMENT

Replacement of 1A1 F5 fuseMODEL MDA 3A 250VWhen 1F5 fuse blows, verify the UP/DOWN motion system– Check the wear of the driving shaft and roller plates of the column.– Check cleanliness of the roller plates– Verify that the motor current is lower than 2.5A when column is on mechanical stop.

6–3 JOB CARDS SYNOPTIC TABLE

Service Manual Advanced Service Manual

Subsystem D/R sheets RGm sheets RGe sheets RGe sheets LA sheets DI sheets

Stenoscop 1 – 22(1 – 29) *

101 – 103(101 – 129)

201 – 213(201 – 229) (301 – 329) (401 – 429) (501 – 529)

Laser(30 – 39)

130 – 131(130 – 139) (230 – 239) (330 – 339) (430 – 439) (530 – 539)

DAP 40 – 41(40 – 49) (140 – 149)

240(240 – 249) (340 – 349) (440 – 449) (540 – 549)

Imager50 – 55(50 – 69) (150 – 169)

250 – 256(250 – 269)

250 – 256350 – 354(350 – 369)

450 – 456(450 – 469) (550 – 569)

Memory 70 – 75(70 – 89) (170 – 189) (270 – 289) (370 – 389) (470 – 489)

570 – 579(570 – 589)

Monitor 90 – 91(90 – 99) (190 – 199)

290 – 292(290 – 299) (390 – 399) (490 – 499) (590 – 599)

* ( ) : reserved numbers

6–4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS

6–4–1 GENERAL

– Each sheet gives the list of tools and equipment needed, preliminary precautions and part disassemblyand reassembly procedure.

– The part numbers of the hardware mentioned in this chapter are given in chapter 9, Renewal Parts.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 7

6–4–2 STENOSCOP D/R SHEETS

Version No.: 00

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A Job Card D/R 11 of 2

Purpose: DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MOBILESYSTEM FRONT COVER. Date: May 1993

Time: 10 min. Manpower: 1

11

1

3

2

3


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 8

Job Card D/R 1 2 of 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 9

1 – TOOLS REQUIRED

– Cross–tip screwdriver.

2 – PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS

– De–energize the mobile system.

3 – DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE

– Remove the 4 CTFH M4x12 screws with cups (item 1), 1 CTFH M4x15 screws with cups (item 2) and the 4 CTFH Parker 4.2 x 19 (item 3) holding the cover.

– Very carefully remove the cover and disconnect the ground terminal.

4 – REASSEMBLY PROCEDURE

– Carry out the previous operations in reverse order.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MOBILESYSTEM REAR COVER. Date: May 1993


1

2

3

4


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 10



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 11




– Lift the C–Arm.– De–energize the mobile system.


– Remove the front cover (D/R 01)– Remove the 2 caplugs and the 2 Parker screws (item 1) fixing the top cover of the column (item 2).– Remove the 2 caplugs and the 2 CTFH M4 x 16 screws (item 3) on each side – Very carefully remove the cover (item 4).



Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF X–RAYHEAD UPPER COVER. Date: October 1996


1

2

3

4

No display withMDA memory

5


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 12



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 13






– Remove the stop–gap of the screws.– Remove the 2 CTMS M4x8 screws (item 2) from either side of the X–ray head.– Remove the 2 CTMS M4x12 screws with cups (item 3) in order to remove rear cover (item 4).– Lift the cover and disconnect the 2 coaxial cables of the ion chamber (Option) and the flat cables from the display if present.– Remove the cover (item 1).



– Take care that the joint (item 5) between the cover and the C–arm is correctly set.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF THESTEERING HANDLE. Date: May 1993


1 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 14



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 15


– Dia. 5 mm flat screwdriver.

– 3 mm hexagonal wrench.




In order to remove the steering handle, proceed as follows:– Unscrew the 2 M6 screws (item 1) and remove the handle. (item 2)


– Set the rear wheels in the longitudinal direction. – Put the handle back in place to hinge at the alignment with the wheels. – Tight the 2 M6 screws (item 1).

– Alignment : See RG 101.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: CONTROL CONSOLE OPENING PROCEDURE.Date: May 1993


3

1

2

1

2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 16



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 17


– 4 A/F wrench.– 6 A/F wrench.



3 – OPENING PROCEDURE

– Remove the front cover (See sheet D/R 1).– Remove the rear cover (See sheet. D/R 2).– Remove the steering handle (see Sheet D/R 4).– Remove the 4 caplugs (item 1) : the 4 screws 6HSH, M4x10, with washer (item 2) are accessible through the holes in the cover. Remove the 4 screws.– Unscrew the 4 screws 6HSH, M4x10 on the card rack front side and the 2 screws on the card rack back side in order to release the shield plate of the console.. – Unscrews the 2 screws holding the right handle (See ill of Job Card D/R 4). – Remove the control console (item 3).

4 – CLOSING PROCEDURE


Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF GASSPRING. Date: April 1995

Time: 1.30 H. Manpower: 2

1

2 2

3

Insertthe rod

5

4


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 18



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 19


– Gas spring, code 824 035 P 024.– Screwdriver.

2 –PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS

– The gas spring balances the whole movable load (column, C–arm, image intensifier, camera, X–ray generator).– A faulty spring would first cause an increase in rise time.– The safety device (parachute) would then be activated.– The following procedure should be carried out by qualified technicians only.– Before handling the gas spring, take all precautions to prevent the rod from being damaged.– The least fault could make it unserviceable.


– Remove the front and rear covers (see sheets D/R 01 and D/R 02).– Manually or by means of the motor, bring the mobile system column to the highest possible position

in order to loosen the spring as much as possible.

NOTE : There is no risk of damage to the mobile system column because travel is limited by a mechanical stop (fixed to the lower part of the column) and a shaft (item 3)

– Install the locking rod through the holes provided in the column.The column is locked in upper position.

– Remove the upper attachment screws (item 4) of the spring after having removed the 2 screws CTMS M4x8 and the 2 screws CTMS M4x16 (item 2) attaching the cover (item 1).

– Remove the clips and the attachment shaft from the lower part of the spring (item 5).


– Install the new gas spring, by installing in the lower part with the shaft and clips.– Position the upper part of the spring in front of its attachment piece.– Introduce a screwdriver between attachment piece and spring and use it as a lever to set the spring

to its correct position.– Take all precautions not to damage the body.– Position and tighten up the upper attachment screw–bolt.– Unlock the safety device.– Remove the locking rod.– Lower the column (a few centimeters) and put back the stop shaft.– Check that the safety device is not damaged.– Check the operation.– Install the cover.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: RELEASING THE CONVERTER AND CARDRACK. Date: April 1995


1

2

2

3

4


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 20



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 21


– Allen wrench (6).

2 – PRELIMINARY PRECAUTION


3 – PROCEDURE

– Remove screw 6HSH M6x15 (item 1) to release the card rack (item 4).

– Remove 2 screws 6HSH M6x30 (item 2) to release converter (item 3).

– Carefully pivot the subassemblies, making sure that the cable bundles are not crushed.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BACKWHEEL. Date: April 1995


1

2

Illustration 1

Illustration 2

1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 22



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 23

1 – TOOLS

– Metric wrenches and screw–drivers– Jack


– Secure the C–arm once it is lifted


– Remove the caplug (ill.2/item 1).– Unscrew the M4 screw holding the wheel cover and remove it.– Repeat these two operations for the other wheel side.– Lift the C–arm and secure it.– Remove the clip (ill 1/ item 1)– Push the shaft out (ill.1/item 2)– Remove the defective wheel and replace by a new one.



Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BACKWHEEL BRAKE CAM. Date: April 1995


1

Illustration 1

Illustration 2

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

53

4


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 24



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 25

1 – TOOLS

– Metric wrenches and screw–drivers


– None


– Remove the chassis wheel cover– Unscrew the nut (ill.1/ item 1) holding the rod, it is easier if the shaft (ill.1/ item 2) is lock by a screw–driver.– Remove the screw (ill.1/ item 3) locking the rod.– Remove the screw (ill./ item 4) holding the cam in place, pull out the rod (ill.1/ item 5).


– Carry out the previous operations in reverse order taking care of the cam position (see ill.2/ item 1) and lubricating the different parts.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY BRAKE SHOE.Date: April 1995


12

Illustration 1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 26

Job Card D/R 102 of 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 27



– None


– Remove the wheel cover.– Unscrew the 2 HSH M4x 16 holding the brake–shoe ( see ill 1/ item 1) – Remove the brake shoe and replace by a new one ( see ill 1/ item 2).


– Carry out the previous operation in reverse order.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF X–RAYHEAD. Date: April 1995

Time: 4 H. Manpower: 1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 28

CAUTION

The X–ray head and the Divider PWB are associated and calibrated in the factory. Verify that the X–ray head and Divider PWB have the same serial number.

1. TOOLS REQUIRED

– Centering tube assembly.– Collimator centering bushing in X–ray beam.– See BEAM ALIGNMENT KIT 827 112 G 035.

2. PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS

– Before removing the X–ray head, MAKE SURE THE C–ARM IS STABLE.This stability depends on the CORRECT OPERATION OF THE C–ARM ROTATION BRAKE AND C–ARM BRAKE.

– Check that the locks are operating properly.

3. X–RAY HEAD DISASSEMBLY– Move the column, to its lowest position.

– Position the bar in order to lock the column in low position (see chapter 2 of this section, § 1.2).– Rotate the C–arm so that the image intensifier is positioned on the mechanical stop (unit side).– Remove X–ray head cover. See sheet D/R 3.– Disconnect 7A1.PL1 and remove the collimator.– Disconnect plugs 6PL1, 6A1.PL1, 6A1.PL2 and the Laser interface connectors.– Disconnect ground wires and 6SaTh2 connections.– Remove 6Sal support.– Remove X–ray head.– Before to perform the X Ray head replacement check the continuity of the kV and mA measure connections.

PROCEDURE

– Position 3A12 PWB on extender cart

– With an ohmmeter, check the connections between:6A1. PL2. 9 3A12. PL1. 76A1. PL2. 8 3A12. PL1. 106A1. PL2. 3 3A12. PL1. 8 and 96A1. PL2. 10 3A12. PL1. 66A1. PL2. 7 3A12. PL1. 46A1. PL2. 6 3A12. PL1. 36A1. PL2. 5 3A12. PL1. 1



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 29

– During each measure, twist the cable in order to be sure that there is no intermittent breaking in measure circuit cable.

– If cable default is detected, replace ”C Arm” cable: See sheet D/R 22.

4. X–RAY HEAD REASSEMBLY

– Position the new X–ray head.– Connect plugs 6PL1, 6A1PL1, 6A1PL2,– Connect the ground wires and the 6SaTh2 connections.– Fix 6Sa1 support.

CAREFULLY CHECK THE CONNECTIONS IN ORDER TO ENSURE CONTINUITY OF THE kV AND mA MEASUREMENT CIRCUIT.

5. UNIT CALIBRATION

– Preheating adjustment (see sheet RG 205).– RAD mA adjustment (see sheet RG 208).

6. X–RAY HEAD CENTERING

– Remove the locking rod from the column.– Rotate the C–arm in order to position the X–ray axis vertically with the X–ray head in low position.

Centering of X–ray beam limitation plate (RAD limitation) :

– Select FLUORO, Manual mode, 43 kV, 0.8 mA.– Position X–ray beam limitation plate on X–ray head – Insert the bottom of the centering tube in the aperture of the plate.– Initiate fluoro sequence.– Move the limitation plate and the centering tube in order to obtain on the TV monitor two concentric spots of about 2 and 4 cm in diameter.– Secure the limitation plate.

Centering of X–ray beam on the image intensifier :

– Select FLUORO.MDA memory : – Select the centering pattern

– The memory displays a circle and a cross on the screen.

DR4 / MD10 : – Locate the center of the screen.– Initiate FLUORO sequence.– Using the 4 screws, adjust the direction of the X–Ray head in order to align the 2 concentric spots at the center of the TV monitor.– Secure the X–Ray head fixations.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 30

– RAD mode centering adjustement.See Chap. 4 § 2.12

7. COLLIMATOR ADJUSTMENT ON THE X–RAY HEAD

Collimator reassembly :– Position and temporarily secure the collimator.– Connect plug 7A1.PL1.

CAUTION : NEVER MOVE THE BLADES MANUALLY.

Collimator centering in the X–ray beam :– Select FLUORO, Manual mode, 43 kV, 0.8 mA.

– Close the 2 pairs of blades in order to have a square shape on the monitor and move the collimator until the image is centered in the video mask.

– When the collimator is centered, the blades must appear symmetrically on monitor screen.

See chap. 4 TESTS CDRH COMPLIANCE


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 31

Blank page

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF THEC–ARM MOTOR PWB. Date: May 1993


3

3

3

1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 32



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 33


– Screwdriver (medium–size).




– Remove the rear cover of the mobile system block. See sheet D/R 2.– Disconnect the plug 1A1.PL1 (item 1).– Remove the self–tapping screws CTMS M3x20 (item 3) holding the board and remove it.


– Repeat the above operations in reverse order.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OFMODULATOR CAPACITORS 4C1 TO 4C6. Date: May 1993


1

2

3

42


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 34



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 35


– Flat box wrench for nut HH6.– Screwdriver (medium–size).


– De–energize the equipment.– Remove the mobile system front cover. See sheet D/R 1.– Make sure 4DS1 light (item 1), indicating presence of residual voltage at capacitor terminals, is off (LED vis-ible when mobile system front cover is removed).


– Remove the nuts (item 2) attaching bridge strips (item 4) on the faulty capacitor, and if necessary, loosen nutson other parts connected to these strips so as to be able to remove the capacitor smoothly.– Remove the 2 TCY M3x10 screws (item 3) from the collar holding the capacitor.– Remove capacitor.



Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF INVERTERRECTIFIER BRIDGE 4CR7. Date: May 1993


12

123

45

45

12

12


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 36



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 37


– Flat fork wrench (8).– Screwdriver (medium–size).


– De–energize the mobile system.– Remove the mobile system front cover. See sheet D/R 1.– Make sure 4DS1 light (See fig of sheet D/R 13, item 1), indicating presence of residual voltage at capacitor terminals, is off (Light visible when mobile system front cover is removed).


– Remove the 4 HH M5x10 screws with nuts and washers (items 1 and 2 attaching the terminals.– Remove the 2 MS M4x40 screws with nuts and washers (items 3 and 4) holding the rectifier bridge to

the side of the inverter.– Remove the rectifier bridge (item 5).



Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OFPRESSE–PACK SEMICONDUCTORS. Date: May 1993


1 23 3

3

3

3

3

2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 38



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 39


– Weld–iron– Fork wrench (8).– Screwdriver.– Sandpaper, No. 320 or 500.




– Remove the mobile system front cover. See sheet D/R 1.– Remove the 2 screws holding the inverter (module 4) and pivot (see sheet D/R 7).– Locate the wires of the thyristor triggers and unsolder them.– Remove the HH M6x16 screws (item 1) holding the various connection strips on the diode/thyristor assembly (item 2).

4 – INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

– Replace the diode/thyristor assembly in the inverter and attach with screws (item 3).– Resolder the thyristor trigger wires. If necessary, check wiring with diagrams 11 to 15.– Attach the various connection strips to the diode/thyristor assembly.– Replace the inverter, pivoting it and attaching it with 2 screws (See sheet D/R 7).– Switch the unit on and test its functionnalities.– Replace the mobile system front cover.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OFTRANSFORMER 5TR1. Date: May 1993


o

o

1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 40



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 41


– Allen wrench .




– Release the converter. See sheet D/R 7.– Remove the 4 6HSH M6x16 screws (item 1) attaching transformer 5TR1.– Disconnect the primary wires:

wire number: 6 5F27 5TB1.310 E2016 5F317 5CR323 5E20

– Disconnect the wires:wire number: 1 4TB1.6

2 4E103 4TB1.521 1A1.TB2.1

– Remove 5TR1.



Version No.: 0


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF HEATINGPOWER SUPPLY PWB 5A1. Date:

Time: Manpower:

1

21


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 42



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 43


– Tube wrench for nuts M6.


– De–energize the mobile system.– Remove the front cover ( see D/R 1)


– Remove connectors PL1, PL2 and PL3 of PWB 5A1.– Remove the 2 M6 nuts (item 1) attaching the PWB.– Remove PWB 5A1 (item 2).



Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF CONTROLCONSOLE PWB. Date: October 1996


1 2

3

4

5

6 6

6

6

6

4

4

4

4

4

4


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 44



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 45


– Tube wrench (6).


– De–energize the mobile system.– Open the mobile system control console. See sheet D/R 5.


– Left Module pwb 2A1 (item 1).Disconnect PL1, PL2 and PL3 (item 3).Remove the 7 M4 nuts (item 4) attaching the PWB beneath the console.Remove the PWB.

– Right Module pwb 2A3 (item 2).Disconnect PL5 (item 5).Remove the 5 M4 nuts (item 6) attaching the PWB beneath the console.Remove the PWB.



Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF C–ARMMOTOR 1M1. Date: May 1993


12

3

2

2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 46



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 47


– Hex. head tube wrench (6).




– Disconnect the power supply terminals (item 1).– Remove motor support and motor : 4HSH screw M4x16 (item 2)– Remove the belt (item 3)– Remove the pulley from the motor : 1HSCPS screw M4x6– Remove the motor : 3 HH screw M6x10



NOTE : Adjusting the belt tension (item 3).

– The tension is adjusted by moving the motor/reduction gear assembly upwards or downwards, then securingwith 4 HSH M4x16 screws.– Tighten the belt until a play of 10 +/– 2 mm is obtained when a force of 5 N (0,5 kg) is applied between the 2pulleys.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BREAKER9SM1. Date: May 1993



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 48



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 49


– Screwdriver (medium–size).


– De–energize the mobile system.– Remove the plug from the mains outlet.


– Remove rear cover of monitor support.– Rotate the breaker support (1 fixing screw).– Disconnect FASTON terminals of breaker 9Sm1).– Remove breaker from support (two fixing screws).

4 – REASSEMBLY PROCEDURE (NEW MONITOR SUPPORT)

– Carry out the above operations in reverse order.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: X–RAY LAMP. Date: October 96

Time: 1/2 H. Manpower: 1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 50



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 51

1 – TOOLS REQUIRED.

– Normal screw driver.

2 – PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS.

– Disconnect the equipment from the main supply.


– Unscrew the top cover. (See illustration)– Replace the bulb.


– Carry out the above operations in reverse order.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: “C–ARM” CABLE REPLACEMENT. Date: April 1995



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 52

1. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

”C Arm” cable replacement kit 828 953 G565


Disconnect the equipment from the mains.–The new Stenoscop CCD is E.M.C. compliant. For this reason, the cable is shielded and the shield is grounded at its outputs.To keep this E.M.C. compliance the spare part cable is now the same as the production cable.The adequate tools for the cable assembling are furnished in the kit.When removing the cable takecare of the way followed by this one in order to put the new cable back just inplace. This is important for the E.M.C. compliance.

3. PROCEDURE

DISASSEMBLY:

– Remove the Imageur top cover ( 2 screws and the stop rod for the 22cm; 3screws for the 16 cm).

– Remove the X–ray tank covers ( 4 screws)

– Remove the front and the back cover from the mobile.(see D/R 001)

IMAGEUR:

22CM/9 INCHES– Disconnect the cables from the ion chamber preamplifier ( 2 coaxial cables andSNGL cable).

– Remove the ion chamber preamplifier.( 4 screws)

– Remove the Sub D 25 pins connector.

– Remove the cover from the CCD rack ( 4 screws)

– Remove the 2 coaxial cables, the Iris cable and the ribbon cable from the boards.

– Unscrew the 4 screws on the rack back side and remove the rack.

– Remove the foam from the inside of the C–arm.

16CM/6 INCHES– Disconnect the cables from the ion chamber preamplifier ( 2 coaxial cables and SNGL cable).

– Unplug from J4 and J5 the 2 wires for the DAP power supply taking care of the polarity.

– Remove the ion chamber preamplifier.( 4 screws)

– Remove the Sub D 25 pins connector.

– Pull out the cable through the imageur frame taking care of the DAP cables.




REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 53

X–RAY HEAD– Unplug the cables from 6A1–PL1 and PL2.

– Remove the metallic collar from the PL2 cable shield.

– Remove the collimator (3 screws) and unplug the cable from 7A1–PL1.

– Remove the Y/G ground wire from the tank frame.

– Unscrew the connector 6PL–1. Remove the upper part from this connector.– With the AMP ( 305183–R) tool,unplug the pins from 6PL1– M,N,P,R,S.

– Cut the other wires coming from the main cable.


– Disconnect the yellow/green wire and the wire Nb 11(faston tag) from the 6SaTH2 thermal witch.

– Disconnect the wires Nb 2 and Nb3 and unsolder the wire Nb 1 from the bellows device.

C–ARM– Remove the cable clamp.

– At each extremity of the C–arm, join the different sub–cables together with a wire which will be used to reinstallthe cable.

– Pull out the cable from the C–arm taking care of the DAP cables as well as the ground wire between the Ima-geur and the X–ray tank which must stay inside the C–arm..

– To remove the metallic ring holding the cable to the C–Arm, unscrew the HSCPS screw M5x8 and pull downthe ring.

GENERATOR– Remove the metallic cable clamp

– Cut the collars keeping the cable in the harness.

– Remove the metallic collar holding the cable against the rack, cut the collar clamping the cable against the rackand remove the plug from 3A12 board.

– Cut the shrink sleeve insulating the BNC–BNC connectors and unplug them.

– Remove the metallic collar holding the cable against the frame on the bottom.

– Unplug the cable from 5 A 1 PL–2

– Remove the clip on the direction rod.

– Remove the rod.

– Unscrew the 2 M6 screws on the right side of the inverter and open the rack.

– Disconnect the wires 2–4–6–8 from 4A1–E1, 1–3–5–7–9 from the heatsink 5 ( see view on left side of sche-matic 11–20, in the service manual).

– Disconnect the Y/G wire from the heatsink 2 ( not for Stenoscop CCD).

– Remove the cable.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 54

REASSEMBLY

Preparation:

WIRING OF THE ”C ARM”

Two persons are required for this operation to avoid to create a mechanical stress to the cable and the connectors.

Offer up the 2 parts of the cable to the central opening of the ”C Arm”. Replace the cable clamp by the new one furnished.

While one person pulls the wires on the ”X Ray” head and imager side, introduce and push the 2 parts of the cable into the ”C Arm” until the rubber sleeve is correctly positioned for remounting the cable clamp of the ”C Arm”. Take care to not damage the DAP cables if present.Mount the cable as shown on the figure hereunder.

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

HANDEL

INTERNAL CABLES

PLASTIC RING

CABLE SHEAT

CABLE JOINT



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 55

Imageur side

Fix the wire provided when removing the cable to the Sub–D 25pins.Using scotch tape, join the connector parallel to the cable. It will be easier to pass it inside the C–arm. X–ray tube side

Cable installation:

Introduce the cable and pull from the C–arm extremities, carefully and taking care of the DAP cables.

IMAGEUR WIRING:

Remove the scotch tape and the pulling wire.The cable length required in the imageur is:

Imager 16cm/6 inches

33cm

27cmY/G wire

IMAGER 16 cm ( 6”) SUB D25 pins

Imager 22cm/9 inches

42cm

55cm

Y/G wire

IMAGER 22 cm ( 9”)

SUB D25 pins



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 56

Plug up the orifice of the C–Arm sole plate with the foam.Rewire the imageur performing the steps of disassembly procedure in reverse order.Reinstall the metallic ring cable support under the C–Arm.

– X–RAY HEAD WIRING

Remove the scotch tape from the cable extremity.Plug up the orifice of the C–Arm sole plate with the foam strip.Pass the wires throughout the Souriau connector rings.(included in the kit)With the special insertion tool (8500–39), insert the pins from the wires inside the Souriau connector followingthe table hereafter:

WIRE CONNECTOR 6PL1

4 from 6A1–PL1–4 N

5 from 6A1–PL1–5 P

8 from 6A1–PL1–8 S

9 from 6A1–PL1–9 R

10 from 6A1–PL1–10 M

WIRE 2 B

WIRE 4 D

WIRE 6 F

WIRE 8 H

WIRE 1 L

WIRE 3 A

WIRE 5 C

WIRE 7 E

WIRE 9 G

Plug the 6PL1 connector.Plug back in place the 6A1–PL1and the 6A2–PL1 connectors.Connect the shield and the yellow/green wire to the ground.Reinstall the collimator and its cable. ( See Job Card D/R 11 for adjustment )Secure the cables fixations with collars.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 57

–GENERATOR:

Perform the disassembly steps in reverse order.

When all the connections are done, switch the unit ON and verify that the Stenoscop operates correctly.

Turn the unit OFF.

Reinstall the different covers and check again the functionnalities of the units.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 58

ii. 6 . 58

blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 59

iii– 6 . 59

6–4–3 DAP D/R SHEETS

Version No.: 0


Purpose: ION CHAMBER. Date:

Time: Manpower:

No display withMDA memory

Spacer

Housing

Collimator Cover

Nylon White Plate

Full Field Ion Chamber

Aluminium Filter

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Gasket

COVER

ILLUSTRATION 1Head Upper Cover

ILLUSTRATION 2Ion Chamber and Housing Sub–assembly

ILLUSTRATION 3Coaxial Cables

3 A

3 B


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 60



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 61


– Cross–tip screw driver.




– Remove the head upper cover. – See D/R 3– Remove the spacer if present. (See illustration 2) – Unscrew and remove the 3 TC M5 x 12 screws. – Diconnect the 2 two coaxial cables. (See illustation 3A and 3B)– Remove the ion chamber.


– Carry out the previous operations in reverse order. – Take care to put well in place the coaxial cables, out of the X–ray field.– Check the functionnality and refer to the DAP Service Manual for adjustment.

Version No.: 0


Purpose: DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER DISPLAYREPLACEMENT (NOT WITH MDA MEMORY) Date:

Time: Manpower:

Dose display

ILLUSTRATION 1Dose display

ILLUSTRATION 2Remote Display Unit

ILLUSTRATION 3Display Overlay

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏ

Collimator Cover

Test and Reset ButtonsOverlay

LCD Display

Aluminium Bracket

TESTmGycm2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 62



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 63


– Cross–tip screw driver.




– Remove the head upper cover.– See D/R 3.– Remove the dose display mylar – Unscrew the 2 TF M3 screws. – Remove the display assembly taking care of the spacer


– Carefully take each item out of the shipping carton and remove its protective wrapping.

– Any discrepancies or obviously damaged items should be reported to your local representative without delay. If transit damage is evident the packing must be saved for inspection by insurance investigators.


Powering Up : check the functionnality as follow:

Power up the Dose Area Product Meter by turning on the X–ray machine.The following sequence of events should be observed:

1. A number will appear on the LCD display.

2. Press the “ “ button to zero on the display unit.

3. Press the “ TEST ” button> A number will appear on the display unit.The value of the number depends on several factors which are characteristics of the chamber,power supply and electronics.

4. Press the “ “ button to zero the display unit.

Note: Number will continue to be added to the display during the warm–up period (8–10 minutes).If satisfactory, the instrument is now ready for calibration : see Job Card RG 240and then routine use.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 64

iv. 6 . 64

blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 65

Blank page

v– 6 . 65

6–4–4 IMAGEUR D/R SHEETS

Version No.: 0


Purpose: IMAGEUR HEAD DISASSEMBLY /REASSEMBLY. Date:

Time: 15 min. Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 66

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD or Imageur 16 Stenoscop CCD.

SECTION 2TOOLS

� Hex socket and Allen wrench set.

SECTION 3SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

THIS UNIT IS IN EMC COMPLIANCE WITH THE IEC 601–1–2STANDARD. DURING ANY DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY,ENSURE THAT ALL THE SHIELDS ARE CORRECTLYINSTALLED.

TAKE ALL USUAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRONICBOARD MANIPULATION (I.E., MATS AND BRACELETS TOPROTECT AGAINST THE ELECTRONIC DISCHARGES).

1. Be careful not to damage the antischater grid on the front panel of the Imageur.

2. Set the column at its lowest position and lock its movement using the transportation rod(see SM of Stenoscop, chapter 3).

3. Remove power from the Imageur.

4. Recover all mounting brackets.

5. Because of the weight of the Imageur Head, prepare a flat surface on which to set the Imageur Head,to facilitate assembly and disassembly.

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 67

SECTION 4PREREQUISITES

1. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Head (three M5 screws for the 16–cm unit and two M5screws for the 22–cm unit).

2. Set the Stenoscop C–arm in the horizontal position in order to bring the Imageur just above its restsurface.

3. Remove the stop rod (22–cm unit).

4. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

1. Disconnect all cables coming from the C–arm that are connected to the Imageur as follows:

a. Main cable (HE5 connector, 25–contact).

b. Cable connected to the dose measurement preamplifier ( two coaxial cables with Subclicplugs and supply cables ).

c. Green/yellow security cable.

2. Remove the Imageur and position it on its temporary support (four M6 screws).

3. Route the C–arm cables through the opening of the Imageur Chassis facing the C–arm mounting.

5.2 Reassembly

1. Follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order.

2. Check that the Imageur cable is properly clamped to ensure correct grounding of the strapwith the chassis.

Version No.: 0


Purpose: X–RAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBEDISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY. Date:

Time: 1 H. Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 68

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

X–Ray Image Intensifier Tube 9438HX (22 cm) or 9449HP (16 cm).

SECTION 2TOOLS


� Job Cards RG (SEE ASM).




DUE TO THE RISK OF IMPLOSION, SAFETY GLASSESARE MANDATORY FOR ALL II TUBE HANDLING.

1. Remove power from the Stenoscop.


3. Be careful not to damage the II tube external surface, especially the entry window.

WARNING

DANGER



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 69


1. Because of the weight of the Imageur Head, prepare a flat surface on which to set the unit to facilitateassembly and disassembly.

2. Set the Stenoscop in the horizontal position in order to bring the Imageur just above its rest surface.

3. Prepare an area for II tube disassembly.

4. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Head (three M5 screws for 16 cm and two M5 screws for 22cm).

5. Remove the Imageur Head.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

1. Remove the shield from the optical system (Ill. 6 and 7, Item 1) and the lead ballast (Ill. 6 and 7, Item14), if provided.

2. Remove the Imageur rack cover (Ill. 6 and 7, Item 2).

3. Disconnect the J3 connector (Iris) from the CCD Interface Board (Ill. 8, Item 1).

4. On the CCD chip module, disconnect:

a. Subclic plug from the video coaxial cable (Ill. 6, Item 4).

b. Ribbon cable (Ill. 6 and 7, Item 5).

5. Remove the optical system as follows:

On 16–cm units:

Remove the optical system (Ill. 7, Item 6) (three screws).

On 22–cm units:

a. The two Boards comprising the CCD Module assembly—(CCD Sensor Board (Ill. 6, Item 8) andCCD Interface Module Board (Ill. 6, Item 9)—are interconnected by a flexible board (Ill. 6, Item10). Disconnect the flexible board from the CCD Sensor Board.

b. Remove the two screws securing the support angle that supports the CCD Interface ModuleBoard (Ill. 6, Item 11).

c. Remove the CCD Interface Module Board – Support angle assembly.

d. Remove the optical system (Ill. 6, Item 6) (three screws).

6. Disconnect the high voltage cables which run from the II tube to the EHV power supply as well as thecables connected to the EHV power supply ground terminal.

7. Unsolder the EHV contacts from the EHV cables.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 70

8. Install the EHV connectors and contacts on the replacement II tube High Voltage cables (observepolarization).

9. Remove the II tube (Ill. 6 and 7, Item 3):

On 16–cm units:

a. Remove the Imageur front cover (Ill. 7, Item 7) (three screws, Ill. 7, Item 8).

b. Remove the Imageur CCD rack temporarily to access the mounting screw of the II tube locatedunder the rack.

c. Remove the three screws securing the II tube to the chassis (Ill. 7, Item 9).

d. Remove the II tube from the front.

On 22–cm units:

a. Remove the stop (Ill. 6, Item 12).

b. Loosen the II tube mounting clamps on the chassis (Item 13, Ill. 6), as well as the clamp screws(Ill. 6, Item 15) on the mounts (Ill. 6, Item 16).

c. Remove the rear cover (Ill. 6, Item 7) from the Imageur (two screws, Ill. 6, Item 17) and threepins attached to the mounts (Ill. 6, Item 16).

d. Remove the three mounting screws (Ill. 6, Item 18) securing the II tube to the chassis.

e. Remove the II tube from the front.

5.2 Reassembly

1. Follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order.

2. Check that the optics and the II output window are clean. Clean them if necessary, using KodakOptical Paper, Ref. No. 1546027.

3. Perform the EHV Power Supply adjustment (see ASM).

4. Perform the optical adjustments (see ASM).



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 71

ILLUSTRATION 6imageur 22 steno CCD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 72

ILLUSTRATION 7Imageur 16 steno CCD

1

3

5

6

8

9

142

7

10



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 73

ILLUSTRATION 8video processing module

1

Version No.: 0


Purpose: EHV POWER SUPPLY DISASSEMBLY /REASSEMBLY. Date:



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 74

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

Thomson TH7191 power supply.

SECTION 2TOOLS


� Job Card RG : see ASM.







Remove the Imageur Head rear cover (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5 screws for the 22-cm unit).

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 75

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

1. Loosen and disconnect all EHV connections which run from the EHV power supply to the II tube.

2. Disconnect the ribbon cable connected to the EHV power supply.

3. Remove the EHV power supply (four M3 screws).

5.2 Reassembly

1. Recover the connectors and contacts to be soldered from the new power supply. These connectorsmay be used to replace the II tube EHV connectors.

2. Secure the new power supply to the supporting metal plate (Imageur 16) or the chassis (Imageur 22)with the four M3 screws.

3. Reconnect and tighten all the II tube EHV connections on the EHV power supply.

Note: On the TH9449HP H506 16–cm tube, the G2 electrode must be connected to the G3 terminalof the EHV Power Supply.

4. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the EHV power supply.

5. On the CCD Interface Board, preadjust the control voltages to the minimum setting by turningPotentiometers R1 thru R9 fully counterclockwise.

6. Restore power to the Imageur Chassis.

7. Perform the adjustments: Job Card RG from ASM.

Version No.: 0


Purpose: COMPACT OPTICS. Date:



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 76

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� Compact Optics: 50 Hz/625 lines 22 cm,60 Hz/525 lines 22 cm,50 Hz/625 lines 16 cm,60 Hz/525 lines 16 cm.

The optical system model is specific to each Imageur.

It is not possible to replace a 50 Hz/625 line optical system by a 60 Hz/525line optical system.

The CCD sensor cannot be separated from the optical system. In case ofsensor malfunctioning, the CCD Module optical system assembly (thetwo boards are coupled) must be replaced.

SECTION 2TOOLS


� Job Cards RG (see ASM).


THIS UNIT IS IN EMC COMPLIANCE WITH THE IEC 601–1–2STANDARD. DURING ANY DISASSEMBLY/ REASSEMBLY,ENSURE THAT ALL THE SHIELDS ARE CORRECTLYINSTALLED.


1. Remove power from the Imageur Chassis.


CAUTION

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 77


1. Tilt the C–arm aside to facilitate access to the Imageur.

2. Remove the Imageur Head rear cover (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5 screws for the22-cm unit).

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

1. Remove the shielding from the optics (Ill. 9 and 10, Item 1), as well as the lead counterweight (Ill. 9and 10, Item 14), if provided.

2. Remove the Imageur rack cover (Ill. 9 and 10, Item 2).

3. Unplug the J3 Iris connector on the CCD Interface Board.

4. On the CCD module, disconnect:

a. Subclic plug from the coaxial video cable (Ill. 9 , Item 4),

b. Ribbon cable (Ill. 9 and 10, Item 5),

5. Remove the optical system.

On the Imageur 16 cm:

Remove the optical system (Ill. 10, Item 6) (three screws, Ill. 10, 13 and 14, Item 3).

On the Imageur 22 cm:

a. The two boards comprising the CCD tandem – (CCD Sensor Board (Ill. 9, Item 8) and CCDModule Interface Board (Ill. 9, Item 9)) are coupled by a flexible board (Ill. 9, Item 10).Disconnect them from the CCD Sensor Board.

b. Remove the two screws (Ill. 9, Item 11) securing the CCD Module Interface Board.

c. Remove the CCD Module Interface Board/support angle assembly.

d. Remove the optical system (Ill. 9, Item 6), (three screws, Ill. 9, 11 and 12, Item 3).

5.2 Reassembly


2. Refer to Job Cards RG (ASM) for the necessary adjustments.

The adjustment ring locking screw (Ill. 12 and 14, Item 5) must becorrectly tightened to avoid any play in the optical system.

CAUTION



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 78

ILLUSTRATION 9imageur 22 ccd for stenoscop 2

14 9

6

14

1011

2

5

8

3



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 79

ILLUSTRATION 10imageur 16 ccd for stenoscop 2

��

�

6

�

�

�



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 80

ILLUSTRATION 11compact optics – imageur 22 CCD for stenoscop 2 6000/9000

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

ILLUSTRATION 12compact optics – imageur 22 CCD for stenoscop 2 6000/9000

�

�

�

P15

1

�

�



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 81

ILLUSTRATION 13compact optics – imageur 16 steno CCD

�

�

�

��

�

�

�

ILLUSTRATION 14compact optics – imageur 16 steno CCD

�

�

�

�

�

P15

1

Version No.: 0


Purpose: BOARD CAGE DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY.Date:



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 82

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

Board cage.

SECTION 2TOOLS

� Allen wrench set.







1. Tilt the Stenoscop C–arm aside to facilitate access to the Imageur.

2. Remove the Imageur rear cover from the Imageur (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5screws for the 22-cm unit).

3. Remove the Imageur rack cover (four M3 screws).

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 83

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

1. Disconnect all cables connected to the Imageur rack as follows:

a. Iris cable (connected to J3/CCD Interface Board).

b. Imageur cable (connected to J6/CCD Interconnection Board).

c. CCD Module cable (connected to J8/CCD Interconnection Board).

d. Dose measurement preamplifier cable (connected to J5/CCD Interconnection Board).

e. CCD Module coaxial video cable (connected to J2/CCD Video Board).

2. Remove the rack and dose measurement preamplifier assembly (four M4 screws).

5.2 Reassembly

Follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order.

Version No.: 0


Purpose: PRINTED WIRING BOARDS DISASSEMBLY /REASSEMBLY. Date:



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 84

SECTION 1SUPPLIES

� CCD Power Supply Board.

� CCD Video Board.

� CCD Interface Board.

SECTION 2TOOLS

� Hex socket Allen wrench set.

� Job Cards RG CCD Interface Board and RG CCD Video Board : see ASM.







Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Housing (three M5 screws for the 16-cm and two M5 screwsfor the 22-cm unit).

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 85

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Disassembly

1. Remove the rack cover (four M3 screws), leaving the lower screws in place.

2. Remove the board(s) that need replacing. To avoid error, colored tabs and handgrips show whereand in what orientation the boards are to be fitted on the rack.

5.2 Reassembly


2. Refer to Job Cards RG (ASM) for the necessary adjustments.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 86

vi. 6 . 86

blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 87

vii. 6 . 87

6–4–5 MEMORY D/R SHEETS

Version No.: 0


Purpose: MIDAS BOARD. Date:

Time: Manpower:

1

2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 88



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 89

SECTION 1TOOLS REQUIRED

� Standard tool kit.

SECTION 2PRELIMINARY PRECAUTION

1. Turn the power OFF.

2. All the precautions for electrostatic discharges have to be taken.

SECTION 3PROCEDURE

1. Remove the monitor cart back cover. (see D/R 90 page 6 . 102)

2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90 page 6 . 102)

3. Unscrew and remove the four screws holding the PC brackets to the cart.

4. Remove the PC.

5. Remove the top cover from the PC.

6. Disconnect the ribbon cable between AVIAS and MIDAS boards (item 1).

7. Unscrew the appropriate bracket and remove the board (item 2).

8. Replace the defective board by the new one and proceed in reverse order for the installation.

MIDAS takes place on the PCI bus.CAUTION

Version No.: 0


Purpose: AVIAS BOARD. Date:

Time: Manpower:

1

2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 90



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 91






SECTION 3PROCEDURE




4. Remove the PC.


6. Disconnect the ribbon cable between AVIAS and MIDAS boards (item 1).



AVIAS takes place on the ISA bus.CAUTION

Version No.: 0


Purpose: RS 232 BOARD. Date:

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 92






SECTION 3PROCEDURE

1. Remove the monitor cart cover. (see D/R 90 ).

2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90 ).


4. Remove the PC.



7. Check the board configuration following the table here after.

8. Jumper JP9 – 5 / JP10 – 10 / JP11 – 7 / JP12 – 7.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

SW5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON

SW1 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON

SW2 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON

SW3 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

SW4 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON


1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 93

9. Replace the defective board (item 1) by the new one and proceed in reverse order for the installation.

Version No.: 0


Purpose: VGA BOARD. Date:

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 94






SECTION 3PROCEDURE




4. Remove the PC.


6. Unscrew the appropriate bracket and remove the board.

7. Check the board configuration with the drawing (see Ill. 1).



ILLUSTRATION 1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 95

Version No.: 00


Purpose: TOUCH SCREEN ASSEMBLYDate: October 1996

Time: Manpower: 1

J1 Grounding plug

Touch screen interface

J2

VGA display

Take care of the position of this connector


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 96



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 97






SECTION 3PROCEDURE

1. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90)

2. Disconnect the cables from the display and the touch screen interface.

3. Unscrew the four screws holding the touch screen assembly.

4. Replace the defective touch screen assembly by the new one taking care of the position.(Connector : back side)

5. Carry these operations in reverse order.

6. Switch the unit On and check the functionnalities of the unit.

7. For touch screen calibration, see Advanced Service Manual.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: HARD DISKDate: October 1996

Time: Manpower: 1

1

2

3

J6

J2SCI Hard disk jumper

J2 J8 J3

IDE Hard drive


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 98

ILLUSTRATION 1–1

ILLUSTRATION 1–2

ILLUSTRATION 1–3



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 99






SECTION 3PROCEDURE

1. Remove the monitor cart back cover. (see D/R 90)

2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90)


4. Remove the PC.


6. Unscrew the two screws holding the hard disk assembly located on the back side of the PC frame.( See illustration 1–1 : item 1 on opposite page )

7. Remove the power supply cable (ill. 1–1 item 2 ) and the ribbon cable (ill. 1–1 item 3 ) from the disk.

8. Remove the disk assembly.

9. Unscrew the four screws holding the disk on its frame.

10. Verify the jumper configuration of the hard disk ( See illustration 1–2 and 1–3)

11. Replace the disk by the new one carrying these operations in reverse order.

12. Switch the unit On and verify the functionalities of the unit.

13. Enter the service menu (system setup / permanent data), then insert the customer configurationfloppy (located inside the monitor cart) in the disk drive.

14. Press the « Restore config » key. The message « Restore is OK » is displayed in the mail box.

15. The following screenwill appear.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 100

blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 101

viii. 6 . 101

6–4–6 MONITOR D/R SHEETS

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MONITORCART COVERS. Date: April 1995


Cover A

Cover C

Cover B

Touch screenfront panel

1

1

2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 102

1

2 6 . 102



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 103

1. TOOLS REQUIRED

– Cross tip screwdriver


– Switch OFF the unit

– Remove Mains plug from the outlet

3. COVERS REMOVAL

– Remove 9PL1 plug (item 1)

COVER A

– Remove the 10 screws CTFH M4x8.

– Remove the cover

COVER B

– Unscrew the 2 screws. (item 2)

– Remove the cover pulling it out.

COVER C

– Remove cover B first.

– Unscrew the 3 screws.

– Remove the cover.

4. REASSEMBLY PRODEDURE

– Carry out the previous operations in reverse order

Version No.: 0


Purpose: DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BOARDSFROM THE MONITOR Date: January 1997

Time: Manpower: 1

��

��

��

1 : B.T. Power supply2 : Deflection board3 : A.T. Power supply4 : Video board5 : Selection board6 : Light sensor board 7 : Yoke8 : CRT

��

��


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 104



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 105


Standard tool kit.


POWER REMAINS ON THE MONITOR FOR 2 - 3 SECONDSAFTER SWITHING THE TERMINALS PS OFF .

VERY HIGH VOLTAGES ARE GENERATED IN THE MONITOR( FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOCUS ELECTRODE IS IN THE REGION OF 8 KV AND THE EHT IN THE REGION OF 23 KV ).

Capacitance discharge.

Note: The screwdriver handle must be insulated.

When disconnecting the EHT cap (final anode) or performing a task requiring the CRT to be handled,the CRT buld capacitance.A safe method to do this follows :

� Disconnect the monitor from its power source.

� Connect one end of a wire to the shaft of a screwdriver (handle insulated) and connectthe other end of the wire to the CRT conductive braiding.

� Hold the screwdriver by its insulated handle, then insert the tip under the EHT insulationcal so the tip shorts the final anode to ground.Take care not touch the screwdriver’s metal shaft and not scratch the tube glass.

Physical handling.

In addition to the safety precautions due to the presence of high voltage, the following guidelinesmust also be observed :

� Never attempt to remove or straighten the mounting lugs or reposition the outer rimband of the tube.

� When it is necessary to remove the CRT from the monitor, never apply leverage to the glass bottleor support handle or carry it by the neck (Wear safety glasses at all times when handling).

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 106

SECTION 3PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS

For the removal of boards from the monitor follow these instructions :.

1. Remove the plastic cabinet.

2. Remove the upper part of the metal cabinet.

SECTION 4PROCEDURE

� LV power supply board ( illustration 1 : item 1 ).

– Remove the screw supporting the plastic guide.

– Remove the connection with the input AC connector.

– Remove connector J2.

– Remove connector J1 from the video board.

– Remove the screw of the ground connection.

– Remove the board from its position and replace it.

– Carefully insert the new board in exactly the same position as the one removed.

– Install the screw of the ground connection without tightening it.

– Reinstall the plastic guide and tighten the appropriate screw.

– Replace all connectors in the right position.

– Reinsert the input AC connector.

– Tighten the ground screw.

� Deflection board ( illustration 1 : item 2 ).

– Unscrew the metal support and remove it from the cabinet.

– Unplug all the following connectors : J1 – J2 – J4 – J5 – J6 – J7 – W2.

– Unplug connector J2 from the BT power supply board.

– After removing the screws, remove the board from the metal support, then replace it.

– Secure the new board on the metal support with the screws.

– Plug the connectors on the deflection board and on the BT power supply board.

– Screw the board support to the side panel of the metal cabinet.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 107

� HV power supply board ( illustration 1 : item 3 ).

– Remove the connector of the anode voltage from the CRT and the TB2of the video board.

– Remove connector J6 from the deflection board.

– Remove the screw placed to the left of the container and then carefully removethe HV power supply.

– Repace the HV power supply mounting it in the appropriate holding hole.

– Reinstall the screw placed on the left.

– Plug the power supply, anode voltage and TB2 connectors.

� Video board ( illustration 1 : item 4 ).

– Remove connectors J1 – J2 – J3 and TB2.

– Remove connector J5 and W2 from the deflection board.

– Remove the board from the CRT socket.

– Replace the board.

– Plug all connectors previously removed.

– Connect the central socket to the CRT.

� Selection board ( illustration 1 : item 5 ).

– Remove the rear metal part with the adjustment potentiometers.

– Remove connector J1.

– Remove the light sensor connector.

– Remove the two screws and replace the board.

– Install the new board paying attention to the position of the led and of the trimmers.

– Secure the metal plate to the frame.

� Light sensor board ( illustration 1 : item 6 ).

– Remove the connector placed along the wiring.

– Remove the mounting screw of the board from the plastic frame.

– Replace the board carefully placing the light sensor in the appropriate hole.

– Secure the board with screws and insert the connector.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 108

� CRT and deflection Yoke ( illustration 1 : item 7 & 8 ).

– Remove the plastic rear part.

– Remove the upper part of the metal chassis.

– Remove the light sensor connector.

– Remove the plastic front frame.

– Disconnect the clip of the anode voltage from the CRT.

– Remove the video board.

– Remove the two yoke connectors from the deflection board.

– Remove the CRT from the metal chassis by unscrewing the four mounting nutsplaced in the corners.

– Remove the yoke from the CRT.

– Replace the CRT and reinstall the yoke previously removed.

– Execute all mounting procedures in the opposite order.

ix. 6 . 108


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 109

xi. 6 . 109

blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 110

6–5 ADJUSTMENT SHEETS

6–5–1 GENERAL

The adjustment sheets given in this chapter comprise all possible preventive or corrective maintenance adjustments.The first group consists of mechanical adjustments. The second group consists of electronic adjustments.Before making any electronic adjustments, read the following instructions carefully.

CAUTION :

1) It is forbidden to remove or to replace a PWB when the unit is ON.

2) When a PWB is placed on an extender board, check the continuity of the earth connection with the extensionwire supplied. The omission of this earth connection causes malfunction of the unit.

NOTE : With the exception of the adjustments which are part of the replacement of the X–ray head, of the fila-ment heating PWB 3A26, or of the timer PWB 3A5, all potentiometers have been calibrated in the factory anddo not have to be readjusted. A recalibration might be necessary in the case of the replacement of a componenton site. Before adjusting a potentiometer, check that the corresponding procedure is at hand.

In this case, follow the procedure described below for the respective adjustment.

THIS SIGN INDICATES THAT TO PERFORM ADJUSTMENTS, X–RAY ARETO BE PRODUCED AND THEREFORE CARES AGAINST RADIATION HAZARDSARE TO BE TAKEN.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 111

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

6–5–2 STENOSCOP R/G SHEETS ( MECHANICAL )

Version No.: 00

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A Job Card RG 1011 of 2

Purpose: BACK WHEELS ALIGNMENT. Date: April 1995

Time: 1H. Manpower: 1

11

2

Illustration 3

Illustration 2

Illustration 1

2 1

43

A

B


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 112

Job Card RG 1012 of 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 113


– Metric wrenches


– If possible, this adjustment must be done on a flat floor.

3 – PROCEDURE

– Remove the front and the back covers.( see D/R 1 and D/R 2 ).– Unscrew the screws holding the monitor cart cable support (ill.1/ item1).– Unscrew the screws holding the footswitch cable support (ill.1/ item 2).– Remove the 3 screws M4x 16 (see ill.1/ item3).– Remove the chain cover (ill.1/ item4).– Remove the internal wheel covers.– Turn the wheels in longitudinal position.– Measure the distance between the wheels in the front and back side.(see ill.2/ A –B) – Turning the chain tighteners, adjust the wheels alignment in order to have A=B, +/– 2 mm.– Adjust the alignment between the handle and the wheels. For this release the 4 screws (see ill.3/ item1) and

turn the shaft (ill.3/ item 2).– Reinstall the covers carrying the previous operations in reverse order.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: HANDLE POSITION. Date: May 1993


Locked 100 o

45o

Locked 130 o

15o

Free

FreeLocked 45o


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 114



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 115


– Screwdriver.– Glue



NOTE : All the locking systems of the different movements, wiwag, C–arm rotation, etc. are equipped witha mechanical system which compensates mechanical wear.

3 – PROCEDURE

– Tighten the handle until the movement is correctly locked.– Remove cautiously the movement label glued on the center of the handel.– Set the handel in correct position– Tighten the screw– Glue the movement label

This procedure is valid for the correct positionning of the handel.If the movement label is damaged, see code number on figures page 9.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: “C ARM” ROTATION BRAKE. Date: May 1993


45 � 1 mm

12

34 5


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 116



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 117


– Screwdriver.


– Make sure C–arm is stable.

3 – PROCEDURE

– Remove the covers of the C–arm support.– Unlock the C–arm.– Unscrew the 4 attachment screws of the locking system (2).

– Do not completely unscrew them, to avoid dropping attachment plates (3).– Move attachment the locking system slightly forward.– Tighten the 4 attachment screws.– Check operation.

If it is not possible to operate correctly, it will be necessary to modify the length of the threaded rod (4).If locking device (rubber) is spoilt, replace threaded rod and rubber (code number : 861 205 P 015).

In this case, proceed as follows:– Unscrew the 4 attachment screws of the locking system and remove it completely.– Unlock the nut (5).– Extend the threaded rod by unscrewing it or replace it.– Tighten the lock nut (5).– Reassemble the locking system on the C–arm (do not tighten the screws).– Actuate the lock handle.– Move the locking system to bring it into contact with the C–arm.– Loosen the lock handle.– Move the system slightly forward.– Tighten the 4 attachment screws.– Check operation.– Install cover, handle and stop–gap.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 118

xii. 6 . 118

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 119

xii– 6 . 119

6–5–3 LASER R/G SHEETS

Version No.: 00


Purpose: EXTERNAL LASER AIMING. Date: May 1995


Illustration 1

1

2

1

Illustration 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 120



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 121


– Screwdriver.


WARNING:– THE AIMING USES A CLASS IIIA LASER LIGHT, DO NOT LOOK THE BEAM!

– THE LASER CENTRING ADJUSTMENT ISPERFORMED WITH X–RAYS

– Make sure C–arm is stable.

3 – PROCEDURE

Factory preadjustment or in case of replacement:

Preadjustment : – unscrew lightly the 3 holding screws of the U shape support (ill.1–item 1) – unscrew lightly the screw holding the laser on its U shape support (ill.2–item1) – it must be possible To move with allowance the laser on the support – precenter the laser on the support disk plate

Positioning on the I.I.:

– put the laser in place on the I.I.–see arrow – push it against the I.I. surface

Laser alignment

– on the console select manual fluoro–40kV/0.4 mA – set the C–arm with the I.I. upside – close the blades under fluoro in order To have a 1 square cm on the screen. – under X–ray, centre the cross included in the laser box inside the square centre. Set this cross in the

middle of the square moving the laser device in the 2 axis. – when the device is well centred, remove carefully the laser assembly support. – lock it on its support with the screw and then lock the support with the 3 screws (ill.1–item 1) taking

care of not moving the laser box.

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 122

Reticule positioning:

– put the laser in place on the I.I. – lay on the tube head a 1mm Al plate whith a 2 mm hole in the center – in fluoro observe the hole image position and the laser cross image position – under X–rays, centre the hole with the laser cross. – once the hole is centred, with a pencil, sign the hole position on the housing top

taking care of not moving the Al. plate. – place the circular reticule centre just on the mark and stick it.

Final adjustment on site :This adjustment has to be done before each utilisation

– set the C–arm in the forecasted working position. – switch on the laser and adjust the beam turning the 3 screws ( ill.2–item 2) located on the laser surface.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 123

Blank page

Version No.: 00


Purpose: INTEGRATED LASER ALIGNMENT. Date: August 1996


1 2 3

4

5

6

4


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 124

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 125


– Inches Allen wrench (small size)..


WARNING: – THE AIMING USES A CLASS IIIA LASER LIGHT, DO NOT LOOK THE BEAM!

– THE LASER CENTRING ADJUSTMENT ISPERFORMED WITH X–RAYS

– Collimator must be perfectly adjusted.

– Remove the collimator cover.

3 – PROCEDURE

� Determine the centre of the II using the centring pattern if available inside the memory or bymeasurement on the monitor sreen.

� Put a washer (for 4 mm screw) on the II cover, just in the centre.

� Switch the Stenoscop ON and set the laser in the x–ray field ( 2nd pushbutton of the X–ray handle ).

� Check the laser cross position (must be inside the washer) and correct it if necessary following theinstructions here after:

– Loosen the 2 screws (item 2 and 3) and move longitudinally the diode assembly (item 1).

– Check under fluoro and readjust until the correct position is reached.

– Play with the screw (item 5) to correct the end travelling limit. Make some <<return>>movements and verify the position.

� When the cross is well centred, the beam of the diode beam must be adjusted to merge at thesame point (washer centre).

– Diode beam lateral movement is obtained by the rotation of the diode assembly on its axis.For this, tight screw (item 2) and loose screw (item 3) for rotation in one direction and tightscrew (item 3) and loose screw (item 2) for the other direction.

– Diode beam longitudinal movement can be done in two ways.By moving the diode assembly (item 1) or the assembly support (item 6) along the longitudinalaxis by tilting the assembly playing with the press–screws (item 4).

� When the correct adjustment is obtained, set the collimator cover back in place and check that the lasermoves freely inside the cover.

Note: When the C–arm is rotated the laser beam moves and leaves the central position due to themechanical flexibility. A tolerance of 5 mm is normal. However the laser beam still merges withthe cross position and that does not affect the aiming efficacy.

WARNING


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 126

xiv. 6 . 126

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 127

xv– 6 . 127

ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS

6–5–4 STENOSCOP R/G SHEETS

Version No.: 00


Purpose: KV CIRCUIT (3A12 – R216) – DIAGRAM 23DMEASURE WITH WISCONSIN CASSETTE. Date: May 1993


3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 128



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 129


– The use of Wisconsin test cassette is obligatory.– This measure device is small, constant and accurate.– This test cassette is also in current use by field servicemen.– Ref. WISCONSIN X–ray test cassette. Model 101 or 015– Manufacturer: RMI – PO BOX 44 MIDDLETON

WISCONSIN 53562– A densitometer.



3 – PROCEDURE

– The specification of the maximum voltage for the HF unit is 110 kV +/-10 % : this corresponds to aVHV value between 99 and 121 kV.

– In order to reduce dielectric stress and increase reliability, it is the usual practice to make sure that theVHV is never higher than 114 kV.

– Verify, with Wisconsin test, cassette that the VHV is between 104 and 114 kV : take into account themeasurement error (relatively high) introduced by indirect measurement from the quality of theX–ray radiation.

– Use the calibration curve of the test cassette for triphase generator.Use a densitometer.

If the measurements are not consistent, measure the voltage VD as follows :– Connect, to the ground (0 V of the PWB), pin 3 of 3A12 Op114.– Connect a digital voltmeter (10 ME input impedance) between 3A12PL1.7 and 3A12PL1.10.– Select DC mode.– Switch ON the unit.– Select MANUAL–FLUORO.– Select 110 kV – 0.1 mA.– Initiate fluoro and note the value VD displayed on the voltmeter.– Remove the bridge between ground and Op114.3.

– VD value must be between 52.5 and 55.5 volts.– If the results of the VD measure and Wisconsin test cassette are out of tolerances, the unit is faulty.– If the PWBs are correct, read just 3A12–R216 in order to obtain 54.2 V. (VD). – With the Wisconsin test cassette, verify that the kV value is now within the tolerances.See CHAP. 4 for TESTS CDRH compliance

Version No.: 00


Purpose: KV CIRCUIT (3A12 – R216) – DIAGRAM 23DMEASURE WITH KEITHLEY 35080. Date: May 1993


3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 130

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

TPE7 TPE8

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

PIN 3



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 131


– Keithley 35080 kVp Divider, (or equivalent)– (32865C Filter Pack, 65 kV – 135 kV)– Note : conversion factor for this pack : +.55V– Digital multimeter– Oscilloscope


– De–energize the mobile system– The specification of the maximum voltage for the H.F. Generator is 110 kV +/-10 %, 99 kV to 121 kV.– In order to reduce dielectric stress and increase reliability, it is the usual practice to make sure that 114 kV

is never exceeded! (Use Keithley to verify).

3 – PROCEDURE

– Temporarily place a jumper from 3A12 Op114 pin 3 to com.– Connect a DVM between 3A12PL1.7 and 3A12PL1.10 (50–60 Vdc).– Turn unit on.– Select manual – Fluoro, 110 kV, .1mA.– Initiate Fluoro and note voltage reading on DVM.– A value of 54.2 Vdc on the DVM should correspond to 110 kV on the Keithley, with a range of

52.5 Vdc to 55.5 Vdc.– Adjust 3A12 – R216 to achieve if necessary– Remove jumper from Op114.

See chapter 4 for CDRH TESTING REQUIREMENTS

edward r rogala

Nick C. usually skips this step

edward r rogala

3A12 AR114 pin3

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Or use KV+ = TPE8 KV- =TEP7

edward r rogala

2 mA

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

1v = 2kv across TP8 to TP7 (=kvp feedback from internal bleeder)

edward r rogala

Adjust for 110 kvp if necessary

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

keithley

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

xray tube head

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

keithley must be perpendicular to anode/cathode axis

Version No.: 00


Purpose: TRAVEL SAFETY (3A19 – R123) DIAGRAM 38B. Date: May 1993


3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2 828 982 G035

PL1

PL1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 132

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

30 micro second delay

edward r rogala

Inverter SCR crossfire safety



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 133


– Dual channel oscilloscope.



3 – PROCEDURE

Connect an oscilloscope as follow :

Probe x10Channel A 3A19.E125Channel B 3A19.E172Sweep 2 s/div, single shotV/div 0.2 �V/divTrigger channel A, DC external +

– Energize the mobile system.– Select 40 kV and 0.1 mA, manual fluoro mode.– Adjust 3A19 R 123 to obtain a delay of 30 �S by commanding a fluoro operation.

edward r rogala

TPE125 see previous page

edward r rogala

TPE172 see previous page

edward r rogala

10 micro seconds/ division

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

5v/div

edward r rogala

Version No.: 00


Purpose: FLUORO ADJUSTMENT (3A26 – R9)DIAGRAM 81E FILAMENT 4. Date: May 1993


3A26 CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS 4 829 357 G055


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 134

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Remove W33 and insert mA meter

edward r rogala



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 135


– DC milliammeter.– Extender board.



3 – PROCEDURE

– Remove the cover of the X–Ray head – see sheet D/R 3

– Remove the jumper at the divider PWB 6A1 and connect a DC milliammeter (10 mA full scale)to the current measuring circuit.

CAUTION : CHECK CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT– Position circuit 3A26 on the extender board.– Connect the PWB ground to the ground of the card rack.– Energize the mobile system.– Select the fluoro manual mode.– Display 40 kV and 6 mA.– Initiate fluoro.– Adjust 3A26 R 9 so that 6.1 mA is read on the milliammeter (0.1 mA consumed in the HV divider).– Switch OFF the unit– Replace the jumper after adjustment.– Reinstall the cover of the X–Ray head.

See CHAP. 4–2 for CDRH COMPLIANCE TEST.

edward r rogala

Jumper = W33 on xray tube head (see previous page)

edward r rogala

Not necessary

edward r rogala

R9 = bottom pot see previous page

Version No.: 0


Purpose: FLUORO PREHEATING (3A26 – R3)DIAGRAM 84D FILAMENT 4. Date:

Time: Manpower:



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 136

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Filament boost Fluoro



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 137





3 – PROCEDURE

– Connect an oscilloscope as follows:Probe X10 3A26.23ASweep 20 ms/divV/div 20 mV/divTrigger external DC + to 3A26.24AGround rack ground

– Energize the mobile system.– Display 40 kV and 0.5 mA.– Fluoro mode (manual).– Command short fluoro sequences– Adjust 3A26.R3 to obtain a minimum rise time of the scope mA current.

The signal is triggered on the leading edge of the 85% kV signal. illustrations A, B and C. Adjust until the correct signal is obtained (B).

See chap. 4–2 TEST for CDRH compliancy

edward r rogala

3A26 bd pin 23A

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

50mS/div

edward r rogala

200mV/div

Version No.: 00


Purpose: FLUORO TIMER – DIAGRAM 103A. Date: May 1993


3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 138

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

TPE3



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 139





3 – PROCEDURE

– Position the kV–mA PWB 3A12 on the extender.– Connect the PWB ground to the ground of the board rack.– Connect an oscilloscope as follows:

Probe X10 3A12.E3Sweep 2 ms/divV / div 0.5 V/divTrigger LineGround board rack ground

– Apply voltage to the unit.– Select the Fluoro mode.– Display 40 kV – 0.1 mA.– Initiate fluoro– Adjust 3A12.R217 to obtain a time T = 20 ms.– Reset Fluoro Timer 5 min.– Initiate a continuous sequence of Fluoro during 5 minutes and verify with the chronometer that

the buzzer is energised after 4 min 26 sec +/–12 sec and that the X–Ray emission is stopped after4 min 56 sec +/–13 sec.

– Readjust R217 if necessary and verify.

See chap. 4–2 TEST for CDRH compliancy.

edward r rogala

3A12 TPE3 see previous page

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

5mS/div

edward r rogala

2v/div

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

20 mSec period

Version No.: 00


Purpose: RAD SAFETY DIAGRAM 83D FILAMENT 4. Date: May 1993




REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 140

edward r rogala

Backup timer for 160 max. maS exceeded

edward r rogala

edward r rogala



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 141





3 – PROCEDURE

A : 7 SECONDS SAFETY

– Remove 5A1.PL2 connector (PB PUISSANCE CHAUFFAGE).– Energize the mobile system.– Select the RAD mode.– Display 40 kV – 160 mAs.– Adjust 3A26–R7 so that the exposure is stopped after 7 +/–0.2 seconds.

The adjustment is made by using the fluoro timer display as reference and adjusting 3A26.R7so that the exposure is stopped as soon as the number 7 appears.

– Switch OFF the mobile

B : 15 SECONDS SAFETY

– Switch 3A3.S133.B into ON position– Switch ON the unit– Select RAD mode, 40 kV, 160 mAs– Adjust 3A26.R8 so that the exposure is stopped after 15 +/–0.5 seconds

The adjustment is performed by using the Fluoro timer display as reference and adjusting 3A26R8so that the exposure is stopped as soon as the number ”11” appears.

– Switch OFF the unit– Switch 3A3.S133.B into OFF position– Connect 5A1.PL2 connector

edward r rogala

for 220 vac power

edward r rogala

for 120 vac power reduced power

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

disables filament drive (no xray)

edward r rogala

will already be on for 120 vac systems

edward r rogala

actual mA = 24 mA

edward r rogala

ccw decreases time 2 turns/sec

edward r rogala

15 appears

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

don't do if you have 120 vac system

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Remember: remove 5A1.PL2 connector for 120 vac only systems too.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: RAD MA – RAD PREHEATING (3A26 – R4)DIAGRAM 84B FILAMENT 4. Date: May 1993

Time: 1 H 30. Manpower: 1



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 142

edward r rogala

filament boost Rad

edward r rogala

Only do if you have radiographic cassette option

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A31 A32 solder side

edward r rogala



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 143


– Dual channel oscilloscope 50 MHz.


– Check that the ground connections of the PWB are connected to the earth of the board rack.

3 – PROCEDURE

– Position 3A26 on extender board.

– Connect an oscilloscope to A26.a32–Vertical sensitivity 1 V/div. –External trigger DC – at 3A26.a31 (schematics 81D – PRE signal)–Time basis 20 ms/div.

– Select radiography mode – 100 kV – 5 mAs.– Make a few exposures and adjust A26–R4 to obtain a current of 20 mA (1V = 10mA) at the beginning

of the exposure. See oscillogram A to D.

NOTE : 20 mA Rad adjustment is performed with only 1 potentiometer and it is normal that tube currentis too low at the beginning of the exposure.So, for 40 kV and 60 mA, the tube current at the beginning of the exposure is about 15 mA andreaches 60 mA after about 40 msec.This situation is correct.In all ways, kV and mA values are correct, only the time of the exposure is a bit longer but withoutinfluence on the quality of the exposure.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

50 mS/div

edward r rogala

20 mA for 220 vac (13 mA for 120 vac system)

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

R4 ccw decreases adjust for waveform A on next page


PRECHAUFFAGE – PREHEATING


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 144

edward r rogala

edward r rogala



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 145

VERIFICATION OF TUBE CURRENT IN RAD MODE

– Remove upper cover of X–Ray Head : see sheet D/R 3– Remove mA jumper on 6A1 and connect a milliamperemeter DC in current measure circuit : see RG 204.

Caution : CHECK THE CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT

kV Current

40 kV 60 +/–3 mA50 kV 54.5 +/–2.8 mA60 kV 47.2 +/–2.4 mA70 kV 40.9 +/–2.1 mA80 kV 32.2 +/–1.7 mA100 kV 29.2 +/–1.3 mA

NOTE : mA will be measured after tube current stabilisation

For US model :

– Switch 3A3 Sm133.B into ON position

– Perform the following measurements : 40 kV 25.7 +/–2 mA 100 kV 12.8 +/–1 mA

– Switch 3A3.Sm133 A into OFF position

– Remove 3A26 PWB from the extender board and reinstall it.

– Remove the milliamperemetre DC and reinstall the jumper on 6A1.Tb24

See CHAP. 4–2 TESTS for CDRH compliancy.

edward r rogala

For 220 vac systems. Fixed mA values Eprom driven based on selected KVP.

edward r rogala

120 vac systems

edward r rogala

already on

edward r rogala

Leave on for 120 vac systems

edward r rogala

Jumper = W33 on xray tubehead

Version No.: 00


Purpose: RAD / FLUORO SWITCH CHECK. Date: May 1993


5A1 PUISSANCE CHAUFFAGE 4 829 355 G015


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 146

edward r rogala

1.5 seconds is normal

edward r rogala



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 147


– Dual channel oscilloscope 50 MHz.– Rad Preheating adjustment must be correct (see sheet RG 208)



3 – PROCEDURE

– The fluoroscopy/radiography switch must take place within a maximum of 1 second.– Check: connect an oscilloscope in differential mode to the terminals of 5A1–CR5 (see diagram 90D).

External trigger DC + at A26–36ASweep 0.5 sec/divV/div 50 Vdc/div

– Energize the mobile system.– Check that switches occur correctly in the X–ray housing – Remove the cover and examine the focal spots.

Looking at the apparatus from in front of the control panel, fluoroscopy focal spot is on the left.– In fluoroscopy or radiography, only one focal spot must exist in stabilized conditions.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

1.5 sec normal

edward r rogala

Use scope in differential mode channel 1 CR5 anode channel 2 CR5 cathode (select add mode) Gnd to chassis Option remove AL filter in collimator & watch for filament switching

Version No.: 00


Purpose: MAS INTEGRATORS (3A26 – R6)DIAGRAM 82C FILAMENT 4. Date: May 1993

Time: 1H. Manpower: 1



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 148

edward r rogala

Rad Function

edward r rogala

Only do if you have radiographic cassette option



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 149


– mAs meter.– Wire grip.



3 – PROCEDURE

– Remove the X–ray head upper cover. See sheet D/R 3– Remove the bridge of divider circuit 6A1.– Insert an mAs meter into the current measuring circuit (adjustment of Fluoro output) on the

divider PWB 6A1.

– CAUTION : CHECK THE CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT

– Energize the unit.– Select RAD mode.– Display 80 kV – 4 mAs.– Command a RAD exposure and adjust 3A26.R5 (diagram 82C) to obtain a reading of 4 +/–0.05 mAs

at the control mAs meter.– Display 80 kV – 80 mAs.– Command a RAD exposure and adjust 3A26.R6 to obtain a reading of 80 +/–0.05 mAs on the control

mAs meter.– Check the other positions of the mAs.

The tolerance on the mAs is 10% +/–0.1 mAs over the entire range.– De–energize the mobile system.– Disconnect the mAs meter from the measurement circuit and install the bridge on divider circuit 6A1.– Replace the X–ray head upper cover.

edward r rogala

W33 mA jumper wire located on xray tube head

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

R5 = mAS intergrator adjustment

edward r rogala

Using mA meter alone 13.2 mA x 6 sec = 79.2 mAS

Version No.: 00


Purpose: AUTOMATIC FLUORO SYSTEMADJUSTMENT. Date: May 1993


PL2

PL1

B A

3A5 MINUTERIE 832 501 G015

B A


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 150

edward r rogala

ABC response

edward r rogala

3A5.A82 pin 6 can be checked easily by clipping onto the top of R108

edward r rogala

edward r rogala



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 151


– Double beam Oscilloscope, double time base.– 3 cm of plastic material (polyamide or polyethylene)– 2 mm of Aluminium.– 2 mm of copper.– 0.8 mm of copper.– 1 plastic tray.

2 – PRELIMINARY REMARK

– This procedure is valid for the 828 970 G 015 MINUTERIE board

3 – ADJUSTMENT PREREQUISITE

– The image system must be correctly and completely adjusted. (See RG 251) .– The X–ray head cover must be in place.

4 – ADJUSTMENTS

4.1 X–RAY EMISSION REFERENCE

– Place a 2 mm copper absorption at the outlet of the X–ray head.– Connect an oscilloscop on 3A5.b9 (cde ABD)– On the control console :– select FLUORO MANUAL mode– select HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC)– if unit is equiped with a 22 cm imager, the ZOOM mode must not be selected.– Select 75 kV– Initiate Fluoro and select mA parameters in order to read on the measure device a value of 2.1+/–0.05 Volts

(control ABD value).– Note – mA and kV values :

these 2 values determine the reference rate of X–ray emission.

4.2 DOSE REFERENCE

– Place a 2 mm copper absorption at the outlet of the X–Ray head.– Connect an oscilloscop on 3A5.A82.6 operational amplifier– On the control console :– select MANUAL FLUORO mode– select HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC)– select mA and kV values corresponding to the X–ray emission reference (see 4.1)– Initiate FLUORO and adjust 3A5.R65 in order to read on the measure device an average value

of 0 +/–10 mV.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

DVM

edward r rogala

See note on previous page for easy scope placement



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 152



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 153

4.3 LOOP GAIN PREADJUSTMENT

– Preadjust the potentiometers :– 3A5.R67 fully CCW (zero hysteresis)– 3A5.R60 fully CW (min. phase adjustment)– 3A5.R66 mid range– Connect an oscilloscop– Probe A 3A5.a7– Trigger ext. DC + to 3A5b8– Select Automatic Fluoro, standard Fluoro– With an absorption requiring a VHV included between 105 and 110 kV; adjust 3A5.R66 in order to obtain

a rise time of VHV of 0.55 sec.

Observe the analog kV signal at the A7 output of 3A5 by taking only VHV build–up time into considerationand leaving stabilization problems to a later stage.

4.4 PHASE LEAD AND LOOP GAIN ADJUSTMENT

IMPORTANT remark concerning stability adjustments for the scope regulation loop :– Water and plastic are ideal (polyamide or polyethylene) for phantom absorption.

The regulation loop is less stable when a copper phantom is used. Variation in image signal output in response to a kV variation will be much ronger for copper thanfor an organic tissue equivalent material.

– If regulation loop adjustment is carried out under very strict conditions, a weaker loop gain is chosen toobtain a response with sufficient stability. This adjustment using copper obtains a slower response speed than that obtained using an organicsubstance.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

108

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

KVP



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 154

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Good

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

filtration set for 108 kvp

edward r rogala

filtraion set for 60 kvp

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

550 msec

edward r rogala



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 155

PHASE ADJUSTMENT

Connect an oscilloscop

– Probe 3A5.b9– Trigger ext. DC + to 3A5.b8

With the same absorption determined in § 4.3, adjust 3A5.R60 in order to obtain image without overshootof the control ABD signal.

Select absorption in order to obtain a HV regulation of about 60 kV.

Observe control ABD signal on 3A5.b9 and correct if necessary gain adjustment (R66) and phase adjustment(R60) in order to obtain an image without oscillation and with a maximum glare displayed by an overshootof 33% max.

Then check that high kV regulation takes place in a sufficiently short period : T2 = 1000 msec max.

Check that the value of control ABD signal is included between 95 and 105% of nominal value after1000 msec of the beginning of the X–ray exposure with different absorptions, in FLUORO andHIGH DEFINITION FLUORO mode and AUTOMATIC mode.

Check that low kV regulation occurs without oscillation. Only one positive overshoot of the ABD control signal corresponding to monitor glare is accepted.Maximum acceptable glare is characterized by a 50% overshoot of the ABD control signal for a regulation ( 45 +/–1 KV ).

4.5 HYSTERESIS ADJUSTMENT

Purpose of the Hysteresis circuit

The automatic control finds the kV/mA pair to which the ABD control signal (C.C.D. camera output), equalto the reference signal (i.e. zero signal error), corresponds. The kV/mA variations are discrete and in order to avoid continuous flutter around the equilibrium value, ahysteresis defining a zone without corrections of X–Rays intensity is needed.Hysteresis values must be limited to those that are truly useful in order to obtain an easily duplicatedoperating point. The results of an automatic control mechanism correction are greater at low kV because the increments areconstant over kV, due to the kV/mA linkage principle.

Hysteresis value adjustment :

3A5 R67 will be adjusted to obtain a potential difference of 1.75 Volt at the potentiometer terminals.

edward r rogala

Goal: ABC stable within 1 second for digital to capture image

edward r rogala

Turning R60 too far CCW will cause oscillation

edward r rogala

2.1 volts dc otherwise redo section 4.1 if necessary

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

At 60 kv

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Adj. R60 (oscillation/damping) and R66 (rise time) to get balance between 108 kv ABC response and 60 kv ABC response. Want fastest rise time without oscillation. May need to adjust section 4.5 (hysterisis) first. Image on monitor should get to proper brightness without oscillating. A good test is to select electronic radiography with zero FNR and see if the image is stable before the image is captured via last image hold.

edward r rogala

see waveforms previous page



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 156

4.6 OPERATION CHECK

Check the correct operation of the automatic control using different filters and varying amounts of water inthe tray, for different absorption values, characterized by :– appearance of image without abnormal glare (see § 4.4) and without apparent oscillation,– the constancy of radiologic stabilization date of the automatic control for successive scope operations

with identical absorption,– modification of radiologic date due to automatic control, for small variations in absorption.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 157

Blank page

Version No.: 00


Purpose: 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB (201 – 210B). Date: May 1993


3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G035

0.5 V/div

200 mS/div

��

��

3A1 E123R151

3A1 E124

Channel A

Channel B


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 158



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 159

1. TOOLS REQUIRED

– Oscilloscope


– All the potentiometers are FACTORY CALIBRATED.– This procedure will be performed only if accidental uncalibration occures.

3. CONDITIONS

The image system must be completely and correctely adjusted (see corresponding manual).

4. PROCEDURE

NOTE : The waveforms are given for your guidance.The parameters of the oscilloscope adjustment are different of the parameters given in the procedure.

– Switch OFF the unit– Install 3A1 PB on extender card– Connect ground of 3A1 to card rack ground– Power ON the unit.

4.1 T1 DELAY ADJUSTMENT

Connect the scope as follows :

Probe x10 3A1.E123V/div 0.5V/divSweep 200 mS/divTrigger Int. DC–Memory Memory ON

– On the control console, select E.R. (Electron Rad)– Initiate Fluoro sequence– Adjust 3A1R151 in order to obtain a delay of 1000 +/–20 ms.

4.2 T2 DELAY CHECK


channel A : Probe x10 3A1.E123channel B : Probe x10 3A1.E124

V/div 0.5V/divSweep 200 mS/divTrigger Int. DC– channel AMemory Memory ON

– On 3A1 connector, jump 3A1.a8 to 3A1.a20 ( STOP DSM signal maintains to 1 )– Initiate FLUORO– Verify that the delay, triggered on the rising edge of T1, is 880 +/–100 ms.


��

��

��

Channel A

0.5 V/div

10 mS/div

Channel A

0.5 V/div

100 mS/div

Channel A

0.5 V/div

200 mS/div


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 160



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 161

4.3 T3 DELAY CHECK


Probe x10 3A1.E122V/div 0.5V/divSweep 10 msec/divTrigger Ext. DC– on 3A1.a17 (OX)

– On 3A1 connector, jump 3A1.a8 to 3A1.a20– Select NORMAL FLUORO MODE– Initiate FLUORO and release RX control

T3 Delay is triggered by the falling edge of the RX control.– Verify that the delay is 62 +/-8 ms

4.4 T4 DELAY ADJUSTMENT


Probe x10 3A1.E126V/div 0.5V/divSweep 100 msec/divTrigger Int. DC– (channel A)

– Select PULSED FLUORO on the control console.– Initiate FLUORO sequence.

Delay T4 is generated after the first RX pulse.– Adjust 3A1.R152 in order to obtain a delay of 500 +/–10 ms.

4.5 T5 MINIMUM DELAY CHECK


Probe x10 3A1.E127V/div 0.5V/divSweep 200 msec/divTrigger Int. DC– (channel A)

– On 3A1 connector, jump 3A1.a8 to 3A1.a20.– Select PULSED FLUORO mode.– Initiate FLUORO sequence.– Verify that T5 delay is 880 +/–100 ms.


��

Channel A

0.5 V/div

200 mS/div

3A1 E121

R150


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 162



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 163

4.6 T6 PULSED FLUORO RATE ADJUSTMENT


Probe x10 3A1.E121V/div 0.5V/divSweep 200 msec/divTrigger Int. DC+ (channel A)

– Select PULSED FLUORO MODE

– Initiate FLUORO sequence

– Adjust 3A1.R150 in order to obtain a delay T6 of 1000 +/–50 ms.

With T4 = 500 ms, the pulse rate is 1 X–ray pulse / 1.5 second.

– Remove connection between 3A1.a8.a20.

4.7. ANODE COOLING PAUSE SAFETY ADJUSTMENT (not used)

This adjusment is valid only for the PWB INTERFACE DSM.Code number 828 988 G 035

Connect the probe to 3A1.E608

– Sweep 0.5 Sec/Div – Trigger DC–internal

– Position SW 602.2 (B) to ON

– Select ER mode (Election Radiography)

– Initiate exposure

– Adjust 3A1.R604 in order to obtain a delay of 2 sec +/–0.4 sec.

– Position SW 602.2 (B) to OFF


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 164

Blank page

Version No.: 00


Purpose: PWB SWITCHES PROGRAMMATION. Date: May 1993

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 165

No et Nom du CI Switch N o Switch Position FONCTION

EUR. USA

2A1PUPITRE MODULE G2

828 986 G015

S58 1–4 (A)2–3 (B)

S59 1–4 (A)2–3 (B)

S60 1–4 (A)2–3 (B)

ONONONOFFOFFOFF

ONONONOFFOFFOFF

The 3 switches determine the function of BP 2A1 Sm 35Stenoscop 2 (D6/D9)

HIGH QUALITY or STANDARD FLUORO mode selection

Stenoscop LEBLOCKING OF MEMORIZATION ( DR )

2A2PUPITRE MODULE D2

828 984 G025

S528 1–4 (A)2–3 (B)

OFFOFF

OFFOFF

ON = Possibility of camera sweeps inversionsOFF= No possibility of camera sweeps inversions

3A1 INTERFACE DSM

828 988 G035

S502 1–4 (A)

2–3 (B)

S602 1–4 (A)

2–3 (B)

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON = RX Hold in SP and ER mode ( SN )OFF= No RX Hold in SP and ER mode ( SN )ON = No RX Hold in SN modeOFF= RX Hold in SN modeON = RX Hold in SN mode during T1+T2 (if S502 B OFF)OFF= RX Hold in SN mode during T1 (if S502 B OFF)ON = ACP delay activated OFF= ACP delay not activated

3A3DIAPHRAGMES 2

832 502 G015

S133 1–8 (A)2–7 (B)3–6 (C)4–5 (D)

S501 1–4 (A)

2–3 (B)

OFFONONOFF

ON

ON

OFFONONOFF

ON

ON

ON = AGC Camera ONON = Reduced powerOFF= Beam standby modeOFF= Go to black function inactive

ON = Stenoccop 2 9” – 22cmOFF= Stenoscop 2 6” – 16cmOFF= Led PB II mode OFF

3A9 CONSIGNE kV / mA 2

828 980 G035 (D6/D9)OR

828 980 G045 (LE)

S140 1–4 (A)2–3 (B)

S246 1–4 (A)2–3 (B)

ON

ON

OFFOFF

ON

ON

OFFOFF

ON = 2A1 Sm35 bistable functionOFF= 2A1 Sm35 instable funcntion ON = Iris TV camera disconnected

ON = Buzzer ON in HIGHT QUALITY FL modeON = Buzzer ON in HIGHT QUALITY FL and ER mode

3A19COMMANDE SCR 2

828 982 G025

S76 1–8 (A)2–7 (B)3–6 (C)4–5 (D)

OFFOFFOFFOFF

OFFOFFOFFOFF

ON = Unit without memoryON = RAD Exposure not autorised from FootswitchON = RAD Exposure autorised from RAD?FL handswitchON = RAD Exposure not autorised from consol PB

3A26CHAUFFAGE FILA-MENTS 4 829357G035

S528 1–4 (A)2–3 (B)

OFFOFF

OFFOFF

ON = RAD Exposure at reduced powerON = Used only in calibration procedure (reduced ma)

X = position indifférente


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 166

xvi. 6 . 166

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 167

xvi. 6 . 167

6–5–5 DAP R/G SHEET

Version No.: 00


Purpose: CALIBRATION DOSE AREA PRODUCTMETER. Date: September 1996

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 168

SECTION 1PROCEDURE.

1.1 Calibration

The principle of Model 841–SO calibration is shown in Illustration 1 . A and 1 . C show the importanceof correct offset adjustment prior to calibration.

This can be confirmed after the warm up period by ensuring the display remains at zero for 30 minutesfollowing pressing the reset button. If this is not the case please refer to the positive offset adjustmentprocedure in the service section of this manual. The test for negative drift requires the test button to bepressed and the result noted. The display can then be reset. After 30 minutes press the test button again, thereading should be no lower than 5 digits compared with the recorded reading. If it is, refer to the negativeoffset adjustment procedure in the service section of this manual.

The process of calibration is illustrated in diagrams 1 . E and 1 . F. The transfer function between thereference measurement and the indication on the Model 841–SO will be a straight line as the instrument isinherently linear over a 400,000:1 dynamic range. Assuming the offset adjustment is correct, calibrationinvolves adjustment of a scaling factor within the Model 841–SO to obtain correspondence between thereference instrument and the DAP display. Therefore a single dose rate measurement is all that is required toachieve the correct calibration as indicated in diagram 1 . F.

1.1.1 Some Useful Information Related to Calibration.

Energy Response.

Inspection of the specification will confirm the Model 841–SO chamber has a flat energy response from50kVp to l50kVp to within 3 %. Calibration can therefore be carried out at any energy and 80kVp has beenselected. However, this is not the case when the energy response is modified by absorbing or scatteringmaterial within the beam path. In these circumstances it is recommended that calibration is carried out at themost frequently used energy or the average energy used. After completing a calibration it is wise to repeatthe measurement at several energies to ensure variation of DAP readings are within expected tolerances.

Dose Rate Used.

It has been stated that the Model 841–SO chamber has a linear response with dose rate, nevertheless it isadvisable to use a total dose and dose rate towards the upper limit of expected values for the calibration.


Actual

Display

Error due topositiveoffset

Actual

Display

Positive offsetcorrected followingadjustmentprocedure

Actual

Display


Actual

Display



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 169

Units.

This model displays mGycm2 only.cGycm2 can be obtained by10 dividing by 10. This is also the factor used for Rcm2

ILLUSTRATION 1calibration and offset graphs.

ILLUSTRATION 1 . A ILLUSTRATION 1 . B

ILLUSTRATION 1 . C ILLUSTRATION 1 . D


Actual

Display


Actual

Display



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 170

ILLUSTRATION 1 . E ILLUSTRATION 1 . F

1.2 Calibration Procedure.

The aim of calibration is to equalize the displayed DAP reading to that of a reference instrument located at atypical patient examination distance as illustrated in Illustration 2. The Model 841–SO is mounted on theface of the X–ray tube collimator unit. If a couch top or other radiation absorbing obstruction is normallybetween the collimator and patient, it should remain in situ during calibration.

A reference chamber must be placed in such a position that it is totally within the radiation beam. To evaluatethis, follow the procedure listed below:

Place a film cassette on the reference dosemeter as shown in Illustration 2. Expose with radiation and processthe film. An image similar to that in Illustration 3 should be visible. From this, confirmation can be obtainedthat the reference chamber is now within the radiation beam and the total field size may be measured from theimage on the film.

The collimator is set to give a defined field size at the patient plane (i.e. at the reference dosemeter). If thefield size is for example, 100 cm2) and the reference dosemeter gives a point source reading, (i.e. 1 cm2), theModel 841–SO DAP reading should be 100 times the reference dosemeter reading. That is to say; the Model841–SO should display the reference dosemeter reading multiplied by the field area. (Field size is 100 cm2).

Many reference dosemeters present the results in Roentgens (R). To convert to mGycm2 multiply by 8.7.

i.e. DOSE AREA PRODUCT = Reading on reference meter * field area * 8.7.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 171

ILLUSTRATION 2

Optional phantom to applyBackscatter correction (see text).

Typical patient /examination distance.

Set Field sizesmaller than DAPChamber, largerthan Ref. doseChamber.

Ref. dose meter with Chamber.

Couch top or other inbeam absorber (see text).

DAPChamber

Collimator

X–Ray Tube

All measurement equipmentsymmetric to central axis.

Casssette with Film to establishsize correction factor.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 172

ILLUSTRATION 3

FieldImagey

X–Ray Film

ChamberImage

x

R

1.3 Calibration Adjustment.

1. Set the X–ray machine to 80 kVp and the field size to 100 cm2 at the reference chamber.

2. Access to the calibration control is gained via hole A of the electronic enclosure cover,(see below).Illustration 4


RESET

TEST


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 173

ILLUSTRATION 4

B A

3. Reset the reference dosemeter and the Model 841–SO, then take an X–ray exposure. Record the result ofthe reference dosemeter and the Model 841–SO.

4. Calculate and record the DOSE AREA PRODUCT.

5. Compare the calculated dose area product with the displayed value on the Model 841–SO. Reset theModel 841–SO. Adjust calibration control using the precision screwdriver provided, anticlockwise toincrease or clockwise to decrease the displayed value. This change will be apparent after the next X–rayexposure.

6. Repeat sections C & D again until the displayed value on Model 841–SO is equal to, or within, 5 % of thecalculated value. The unit is now calibrated.

7. The unit is now ready for use.

8. Press the ’TEST’ button.

Record the new test number on the TEST RECORD sheet round in Appendix B.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 174

xvii. 6 . 174

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 175

xvii. 6 . 175

6–5–6 IMAGER R/G SHEETS

Version No.: 00


Purpose: INTERFACE CONTROLS ALIGNMENTCHECK. ( IMAGER ) Date: April 1995

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 176

SECTION 1NECESSARY REPLACEMENT

None.

SECTION 2EQUIPMENT REQUIRED




2. Read the safety precautions concerning x–ray systems.


TAKE ALL USUAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRONICBOARD MANIPULATION (I.E., MATS AND BRACELETS TOPROTECT AGAINST ELECTRONIC DISCHARGES).


1. Remove the II assembly rear cover.

2. Remove the rack cover.

3. Put the CCD Interface Board on an extension board.

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 177

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

Check that the interface signals coming from the Stenoscop reach the II assembly.

5.1 X–Ray ON

1. Connect the multimeter between TP7 (B X–RAY ON) and TP1 (ground).

2. Restore power to the Stenoscop.

3. Check the TP7 voltage: 0 V ±50 mV.

4. Run a fluoroscopy sequence. The voltage in TP7 should shift to +5 V ±50 mV, and the image shouldbe visible on the monitor.

5.2 CLTV ON

1. Connect the multimeter between TP8 (B CLTV) and TP1 (ground).

2. Check voltages:

– In Manual Mode: 0 V ±50 mV

– In Automatic Mode: +5 V±50 mV

5.3 PG

1. Connect the multimeter between TP9 (B PG1) and TP1 (ground).

2. Check voltages:

– When idle, or during a fluoroscopy sequence: 0 V ±50 mV

– Rad button pressed: +5 V ±50 mV

5.4

1. Remove power from the II assembly (S1/CCD power supply in OFF position)

2. Replace the CCD Interface Board in the rack.

3. Reset the S1/CCD power supply to the ON position.

SECTION 6IMAGEUR ALIGNMENT

1. The optical centering adjustments are preset at the factory. Any readjustment should be done only incase of abnormal functioning. If necessary see ASM Job Card RG 351.

2. Alignment of the Imageur with the longitudinal axis is preset at the factory. In case of a problem, seeJob Card RG 254 of this document.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 178

SECTION 7OPERATIONAL CHECK

7.1 Check of the Imageur Functional Features

1. Check the Dose 1/Dose 2 commutation on the CCD Interface Board by pressing the HLC pushbottonon the Stenoscop Control Console.

– Dose 1 = DS2 ON,

– Dose 2 = DS3 ON.

2. Check the field controls.

a. Normal.

b. Magnifier 1 (22 cm only).

3. Check the ABD window adjustment: 40% of the usable diameter of the image.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 179

Blank page

Version No.: 00


Purpose: DOSE ADJUSTMENT. Date: April 1995

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 180

SECTION 1NECESSARY REPLACEMENT

None.


� Electronics tool kit + miniature screwdriver (in Emergency Kit).

� Digital multimeter.

� RADCAL Dosimeter 2025AC.

� Ionization chamber 20 x 5 – 60.

� Two copper plates, 175 mm x 175 mm, 1 mm thickness.


Read the safety precautions concerning x–ray systems.




Set Jumper X5 on CCD Interface Board to the Q position.

WARNING


ImageIntensifier

GridIn front of the grid

Behind the grid


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 181

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 ABD Signal Offset Adjustment

1. Switch the Stenoscop to Normal Mode.

2. Connect the multimeter between TP1 and TP7, on the CCD Video Board.

3. Check the displayed voltage, without x–rays: 0 V +20/–20 mV.

4. If necessary, adjust to required value using R13/CCD Video Board.

5.2 Dose Adjustment

5.2.1 Preliminary Observations

� The Imageur 16/22 Stenoscop CCD can operate at two different dose rates (Dose 1 and Dose 2),corresponding to the two positions of the Iris (Iris 1 and Iris 2, respectively).

� The Imageur CCD is preset in the factory for the following dose rates:

TABLE 1

II input doseIn front of the grid

Nominal FOVÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

22 cmÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

16 cmÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

1.8 ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

3.4 ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

+/– 10 % mR/mnÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

Dose 1 ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ



+/– 10 % micro Gy/mnÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ“ low “ 29.6 56.3

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ+/– 10 % micro R/sÑÑÑÑÑ

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ0.3

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ0.5

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ+/– 10 % micro Gy/sÑÑÑÑÑ

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

3.5ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

6.8ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

+/– 10 % mR/mnÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

Dose 2 ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ



+/– 10 % micro Gy/mnÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

“ high “ 58.5 112.5ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ

+/– 10 % micro R/sÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ



ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ+/– 10 % micro Gy/s

5.2.2 Dose 2 Adjustment (high dose)

This adjustment is made by adjusting the aperture of Iris 2.

1. Select Dose 2 (high dose) on the Stenoscop.

REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 182

2. Place a 2 mm copper attenuation filter on the diaphragm.

3. Place the dosimeter ionization chamber on the Imageur entry window.

4. In Automatic Fluoroscopy, check the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board. Thisvoltage must be equal to 2.1 V. If necessary, readjust it. See Job Card RG 211 .

5. In Manual Fluoroscopy, adjust the fluoroscopy constants so as to obtain the specified Dose 2 doserate at the Imageur entry. The kV value must be as close to 75 kV as possible.

6. Check the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board. When the desiredDose 2 value has been reached, this voltage should be equal to 2.1 V ±50 mV.If not, Iris 2 (corresponding to Dose 2) must be readjusted.

7. Run a fluoroscopy sequence under conditions to obtain the specified Dose 2 dose rate.

8. Adjust the R11/CCD Interface Board so that the voltage between TP1 and TP7, on the CCD VideoBoard, is equal to 2.1 V ±50 mV.

5.2.3 Dose 1 Adjustment (low dose)

Select Dose 1 (low dose) on the Stenoscop.

1. In manual fluoroscopy, adjust the fluoroscopy constants so as to obtain the specified Dose 1 dose rateat the Imageur entry. The kV value must be as close to 75 kV as possible.

2. Check the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board. When the desired Dose 1 value has been reached, this voltage should be 2.1 V ±50 mV. If not, Iris 1 (corresponding toDose 1) must be readjusted.

3. Run a fluoroscopy sequence under conditions to obtain the specified Dose 1 dose rate.

4. Adjust the R10/CCD Interface Board so that the voltage between TP1 and TP7, on the CCD VideoBoard, is 2.1 V ±50 mV.

Note: Regardless of the values of the doses adjusted, the following must always be true: Dose 1 < Dose 2 (low dose < high dose).

5.2.4 Check

1. Select Dose 2 (high dose) on the Stenoscop.

2. Check the adjustment of Paragraph 5.2.2. (The Iris must make at least one round trip for the iris to beprecisely adjusted.)

Note: On the Imageur 16/22 CCD the third position of the Iris, for Graphic Mode, is never used.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 183

Blank page

Version No.: 00


Purpose: “X–RAY ON “ DELAY ADJUSTMENT. Date: April 1995

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 184

SECTION 1REPLACEMENT

None.



� Oscilloscope.






None.

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 185

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

Note: In order to avoid oscillations when starting the fluoroscopy sequence, the automatic mode beginsonly after an adjustable time delay has elapsed.

This delay is preset in the factory at 750 ms.

TP7/CCD Interface Board

TP10/CCD Video Interface Board

X–RAY ON DELAY (Adjusted by R12 / CCD Video Board ).

X–RAY ON

AGC VALID

Version No.: 00


Purpose: BLACK LEVEL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT. Date: April 1995

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 186


None.









None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

1. Switch the Stenoscop to Automatic Mode.

2. Place a 2–mm copper attenuation filter on the diaphragm.

3. Switch on the ABD window display by setting X8 to S on the CCD Video Board.

4. Run a fluoroscopy sequence in Automatic Mode (with a kV value as close to 75 kV as possible).

5. Close the collimator opaque blades to obtain the image in Illustration 1.

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 187

ILLUSTRATION 1

Opaque shutters

ABD Window

6. Adjust R11, on the CCD Video Board, to blank the shutters on the image.The image should become:

ILLUSTRATION 2

This adjustment must be made with great care: R11 must be set so that theshutters are on the limit of disappearing.

This adjustment must be made with the opaque blades.

7. Set X8 back to R on the CCD Video Board.

Note: Shutter correction is only active in Automatic Mode.

If the shutters do not disappear, check that the CLTV ON signal is correctly transmitted to theImageur (Job Card RG 250 Section 5).

CAUTION


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 188

Blank page

Version No.: 00

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A Job Card RG 254 1 of 1

Purpose: II ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT WITHLONGITUDINAL AXIS. Date: April 1995

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 189


None.


� Electronics tool kit.




None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

Note: This operation is normally done at the factory and should be redone only if an abnormallity isdetected.

1. Remove the cover from the optical unit.

2. Loosen the three attachment screws securing the lens support to the II tube.

3. Adjust the direction of the image by turning the lens support. At the same time, check that the imageis correctly centered in the circular blanking window.

4. Retighten the three attachment screws of the lens support.

5. Put the the cover back in place on the optical unit.

Version No.: 00

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. – M.D.A Job Card RG 255 1 of 3

Purpose: VIDEO SIGNAL LEVEL CHECK. Date: April 1995

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 190


None.




� Oscilloscope, 20 MHz minimum bandwidth.






None.

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

1. Connect an oscilloscope probe to TP3, on the CCD Video Board (video output).

2. Place a 2–mm copper attenuation filter on the diaphragm.

3. Run a fluoroscopy sequence in Automatic Mode under nominal conditions. Check the appearance ofthe video signal at TP3/CCD Video Board, in Automatic Mode and Manual Mode (see Ill. 1).

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 191

ILLUSTRATION 1

A = 300 ±20 mVB = 50 ±5 mVC = 250 ±20 mV

A

B

C

TP3CCD Video Board Black level

Blanking level

Under nominal conditions, the average video levels at various points in the Imageur are (see Ill. 2):

� TP2/CCD Video Board CCD module output D = 100 mV ±5 mV

� TP7/CCD Video Board ABD output = +2.1 V ±50 mV

ILLUSTRATION 2

DTP2CCD Video Board

Controls with test signal

5.1 The Imageur Steno CCD is equipped with a video test signal generator, which, if necessary, providesa standard signal that can be used to make all video adjustments.



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 192

ILLUSTRATION 3

C = 250 mV

B = 50 mV

A = 300 mV

TP3CCD Video Board C

B

A

To use the test signal generator:

1. Disconnect the plug at J2/CCD Video Board (video input).

2. On the CCD Video Board, set X1 in the B position.

– The test signal is injected at the CCD Video Board input. Test signal intensity can be adjusted with R10/CCD Video Board (100 mV nominal).

– Remember to reset X1 to A on CCD Video Board once the checks are completedand to reconnect the plug at J2/CCD Video Board.

5.2 Do not readjust the video settings (gain, offset, black level, gamma, etc.), except if there is a fault.These adjustments are made at the factory with specialized tooling.

5.3 The operating conditions which enable the gamma correction adjustments are:

Video in at TP2/CCD Video Board: 1 V ±20 mV (D according to Ill. 2)

Video out at TP3/CCD Video Board: 640 mV ±10 mV (C according to Ill. 1)

Version No.: 00


Purpose: PERIODIC DOSE CHECK. Date: April 1995

Time: Manpower:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 193


None.


� Standard Field Engineers toolcase.

� Two copper plates 175 x 175 mm, 1 mm thick.

� Dosimeter, Radcal 2025 AC.

� Ionization chamber 20 x 5 – 60.

� Digital multimeter.


Observe the safety precautions concerning x–ray systems.




None.

WARNING



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 194

SECTION 5PROCEDURE

5.1 Dose Check

Measure the dose in Automatic Mode under norminal conditions (75 kV, 2 mm copper).

If the dose measured is within the allowable tolerence (nominal dose +20%/–0%), the procedure is complete.

If the dose has increased to above 20%, the II tube conversion factor has decreased significantly since theprevious check. Modify the iris aperture as described below.

5.2 Procedure

Preliminary: Check the offset and the ABD gain, with the test signal:

1. On the CCD Video board, disconnect the plug at J2.

2. Check the offset between TPI and TP7 on the CCD Video board: 0 �20 mv. If not repeat the offsetadjustment (refer to job Card RG 250, para 5.1)

3. On the CCD Video board, set X1 in the B position check the level of the input test signal:

Connect a probe of oscilloscope between TP1 and TP2/CCD VIDEO. The level A must be:A = 100 �5 mv

If necessary, use R10/CCD VIDEO to adjust.

A

4. Check the ABD level between TPI and TP7 on the CCD Video board : 2.1 v �20 mv. If not repeat thegain adjustement using R6/CCD Video board, so as to obtain the required value.

5. Set X1/CCD Video in the A position and reconnect the plug at J2/CCD Video.

6. Connect a multimeter between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board.

7. Select Manual Mode on the generator.

8. Open Iris 2 to maximum by rotating R11 on the CCD Interface Board fully cw.

9. Without making an exposure, check that the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Boardis 0 V �20 mv. If not repeat the offset adjustment (refer to Job Card RG 250, Para 5.1).

10. Under nominal conditions (75 kV, 2–mm copper), adjust the mA value to obtain nominal Dose 2.


CCD ModuleReference

IC 301 Reference

2105601 2105601–2

2105603 2105601–3

The imager can work in Dose 2 (HighDose), but not in Dose 1 (Low Dose). Adjust R11 on CCD INTERFACE boardto get .1V between TP1 and TP7 on CCDVideo board. Turn R12 fully CW on CCD INTER-FACE board. Iris 1 (low dose) will be completelyopened. II tube exchange can be displayed butmust be forecasted.

Replace the CCD Tandem (CompactOptics). See ASM 2124131–100 DR004(*)

The imager can work in Dose 2 (HighDose), but not in Dose 1 (Low Dose). Adjust R11 on CCD INTERFACE boardto get 2.1V between TP1 and TP7 onCCD Video board. Turn R12 fully CW on CCD INTER-FACE board. Iris 1 (low dose) will be completelyopened. II tube exchange can be displayed butmust be forecasted.

N.A.CXD 1261 R

CXD 1261 AR


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 195

11. Read the voltage between TP1 and TP7 on the CCD Video Board under these conditions. Threesituations may arise:

a. Voltage exceeds 4.2 V

The value read shows by how much the conversion factor is above the minimum value (2.1 V) toprovide nominal illumination for the CCD sensor when the iris is open.

The value represents the iris aperture margin. For example, a voltage of 6.3 V indicates that theconversion factor could still decrease by a factor of 3 before the iris must be opened.

Adjust Iris 2 followed by Iris 1 (refer to Job Card RG 250).

b. Voltage between 2.1 V and 4.2 V

Remove the cover of the CCD lens assembly (see illustration 1)

Remove the label glued on the printed board IC 301 (PLCC 64 pins) of the Sony module and notethe reference written on this circuit.

Depending of the CCD module reference (label glued on the copper side), make the followingoperations:

(*) This CCD tandem exchange allows to retrieve a x2 factor on the light sensitivity as the spareparts are equipped with CCD module having a sensibility twice higher.


CCD ModuleReference

IC 301 Reference 21056012105601–221056032105601–3

Change II tube. See ASM 2124131–100 DR 002

– If the voltage is lower than 1.01V:Chanhe II tube (See ASM2124131–100 DR002) and the CCDTandem (Compact Optics – See ASMDR004)

Change II tube. See ASM 2124131–100 DR 002

N.A.CXD 1261 R

CXD 1261 AR – If the voltage is comprised between1.05V and 2.1V:Change the CCD Tandem (CompactOPtics – See ASM DR004) and forcastthe II replacement Status is like � bwhen the CCD Tandem has beenreplaced.(*)


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 196

c. Voltage less than 2.1 V

Remove the cover of the CCD lens assembly (see illustration 1)

Remove the label glued on the printed board IC 301 (PLCC 64 pins) of the Sony module and noteand record the reference written on this circuit.

Depending of the CCD module reference (label glued on the copper side), make the followingoperations:

(*) This CCD tandem exchange allows to retrieve a x2 factor on the light sensitivity as the spareparts are equipped with CCD module having a sensibility twice higher.


CCD Tandem Module CCD

NOTE: The module CCD reference(label glued copper side).

IC 301NOTE: IC 301 referenceremoving the label from the chip.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 197

ILLUSTRATION 1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 198

xx. 6 . 198

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 199

xviii– 6 . 199

6–5–7 MONITOR R/G SHEETS

Version No.: 00


Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 100 HZ. Date: June 1996


��

��

��

��

��

��

1 : B.T. Power supply2 : Deflection board3 : A.T. Power supply4 : Video board5 : Selection board6 : Light sensor board


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 200



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 201


Standard tool kit.

Oscilloscope – Multimeter.










Phisical handling.




WARNING

Job Card RG 290 3 of 6

��

��

��


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 202



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 203

SECTION 3PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS

Turn the unit off before removing the cover.

SECTION 4PROCEDURE

� Remove the plastic cover: two screws on the monitor back side.

� Unscrew and remove the metallic top cover (ten screws).

� Remove the screw holding the scanning board and put it in place as showed in illustration 3 forthe adjustment.

� Use a cross–hatch image.

� Set the selector placed on the rear part of the monitor to position 100 Hz. (See ill.2)

� Set the contrast and brightness controls to middle position.

� Darken the light sensor placed on the front part of the monitor.

� Switch on the monitor.

� Drive the monitor with a 100 Hz signal.


��

��

��

L4 : Horizontal linearityR24 : C Vertical linearity 100HzR36 : Vertical shiftR41 : Vertical focusR42 : Vertical frequency 100HzR43 : Vertical linearity 100HzR60 : Horizontal frequencyR62 : Vertical amplitude 100HzR64 : Vertical linearity 120HzR72 : BrightnessR73 : Horizontal focusR76 : Master focusR81 : Horizontal phaseR82 : Vertical amplitude 120HzR156 : Horizontal blankR163 : C Vertical linearity 120HzR167 : Vertical frequency 120Hz

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 204



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 205

3.1 Vertical Frequency Adjustment.

Connect a scope to TP9 and adjust trimmer R42to obtain a sawtooth of 4V amplitude.

3.2 Horizontal Frequency Adjustment.

Connect a multimeter betwen TP19 and TP20 of theintegrated circuit U2 on the deflection board and adjustR60 to measure 0mV +/-5 mV.

3.3 Vertical Size Adjustment 100 Hz.

Adjust trimmer R62 so that the vertical size measures 270 mm +/–1.5 mm.

3.4 Horizontal Size Adjustment.

Adjust R59 on the Power Supply Board so that the horizontal size measures 337 mm +/–1.5 mm.

3.5 Vertical Linearity Adjustment (100Hz).

Adjust R43 so that the height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottomhalf of the image ( +/– 1.5 mm ).

Adjust R24 so that the size of the rectangles in the center equals the size of the rectanglesin the top and bottom parts of the image.

If necessary set the vertical size to 270 mm with trimmer R62.

Correct the vertical linearity by adjusting trimmer R42.

Repeat the procedure for vertical linearity adjustment.

3.6 HORIZONTAL LINEARITY

With a non–magnetic tool adjust L4 so that the width of the right half of the image equals the width of the lefthalf of the image ( +/– 2 mm); if necessary set the horizontal size to 337 mm with R59 on the B.T.power supply board.

3.7 VERTICAL CENTERING

Adjust R36 so that the image is centered vertically inside the monitor bezel.

3.8 HORIZONTAL CENTERING

Adjust R81 so that the image is centered horizontally inside the monitor bezel.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 120 HZ. Date: June 1996


��

��

��

��

��

��

�� !�� !��

1 : B.T. Power supply2 : Deflection board3 : A.T. Power supply4 : Video board5 : Selection board6 : Light sensor board


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 206



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 207


Standard tool kit.











Phisical handling.




WARNING


��

��

��


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 208



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 209

SECTION 3 PROCEDURE

� Remove the plastic cover: two screws on the monitor back side.

� Unscrew and remove the metallic top cover (ten screws).

� Remove the screw holding the scanning board and put it in place as showed in illustration 2for the adjustment.

� Use a cross–hatch image.

� Set the selector placed on the rear part of the monitor to position 120 Hz. (See ill.3)

� Set the contrast and brightness controls to middle position.

� Darken the light sensor placed on the front part of the monitor.

� Switch on the monitor.

� Drive the monitor with a 120 Hz signal.


��

��

��

L4 : Horizontal linearityR24 : C Vertical linearity 100HzR36 : Vertical shiftR41 : Vertical focusR42 : Vertical frequency 100HzR43 : Vertical linearity 100HzR60 : Horizontal frequencyR62 : Vertical amplitude 100HzR64 : Vertical linearity 120HzR72 : BrightnessR73 : Horizontal focusR76 : Master focusR81 : Horizontal phaseR82 : Vertical amplitude 120HzR156 : Horizontal blankR163 : C Vertical linearity 120HzR167 : Vertical frequency 120Hz

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 210



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 211

3.1 Vertical Frequency Adjustment.

Connect a scope to TP9 and adjust R167 to obtain a sawtooth of 4V amplitude.

3.2 Vertical Size Adjustment.

Adjust trimmer R82 so that the vertical size measures 270 mm +/–1.5 mm.

3.3 Vertical Linearity Adjustment (120 Hz).

Adjust R64 so that the height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottomhalf of the image ( +/– 1.5 mm ).

If necessary, use R82 to adjust the vertical size to 270 mm.

Correct the vertical linearity by adjusting trimmer R167.

Repeat the procedure for vertical linearity adjustment.

Version No.: 00


Purpose: MONITOR BRIGHTNESS AND BLANKINKADJUSTMENT. Date: June 1996


��

��

��

��

�� !��

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Î

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÎÎÎÎ

1 : B.T. Power supply 4 : Video board2 : Deflection board 5 : Selection board3 : A.T. Power supply 6 : Light sensor board


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 212


��

R19 : ClampR29 : Cont.R54 : Horizontal blank

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎ


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 213


Standard tool kit.


SECTION 2 PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS

None.

SECTION 3 PROCEDURE

3.1 BLANKING

Use a cross–hatch image and make sure that the light sensor is not active. Connect a probe to TP109of the video board and adjust R54 to obtain a square wave with an ON time of about 30 �s.Adjust R156 on the Deflection Board to obtain the correct blanking on the left side of the monitor.Use R54 to adjust blanking on the right side if necessary.


ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ



ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÎÎ

R19 : ClampR29 : Cont.R54 : Horizontal blank

ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

��

��

��


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 214



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 215

3.2 BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST

The BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST controls are located under a door, on the back of the Monitor.

The controls have been preset when the monitor was installed and should not need to be changed : a lightsensor located on the front of the monitor adjusts the brightness and contrast of the image automatically,according to the ambient light.

Use a white image with an input level of 250 mV of video signal. Connect a probe to TP107 of the video board and adjust R19 so that the clamp pulse is 50 mV as the blacklevel of the video signal. Connect a probe to TP102 and use R19 to adjust the signal variation to 30 V.Verify that, when adjusting contrast, the black level does not change, otherwise use R19. Eliminate the white image and leave only the black level.Adjust R72 on the deflection board to obtain 9Cd/sqm in darkroom conditions with maximum externaladjustments.

3.3 FOCUS

Display an alphanumeric image with a video signal of 0.7 V and adjust the black part of the image to 0.3 Cdwith the external brightness adjustment; use the contrast control to adjust the white part of the image to about120 Cd/sqm.Use R76 to adjust the focus in the center of the image, R41 to adjust the vertical focus and R73 to adjust thehorizontal focus. Use these three adjustment controls to obtain the best possible focus.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 216

xxii. 6 . 216

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 217

xxiii. 6 . 217

6–6 LIST OF USED MEASURING EQUIPMENT.

NOTE : The hereunder given list is only for information.Measurement devices with equivalent caracteristics can be used.

6–6–1 RADIATION MEASUREMENTS

Manufacturer: Capintec Model 192Type: DosimeterIonization chamber: PM 30

Perform calibration before each measurement, by using the standard provided with the instrument.

6–6–2 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS

Type: milliamperemeterMfr: GlossenMod: PQM3Scale: 10 mAPrecision: 1.5%

Annual calibration in comparison with a DVM.

Type: Digital voltmeterMfr: NormaMod: D1216Scale: 1 kV and 20 VPrecision: 0.2% + 1 digit


OscilloscopeMfr: TektronixMod: 564Precision: 3%

ChronometerMfr: HuerScale: 30 min.Precision: 0.2 s

mAs meterMfr: FlukeMod: 8000AScale: 2 – 20 – 200 mAsPrecision: 1%

Annual calibration by the supplier.

MultimeterMfr: AVOMod: 9 MK11Scale: 1 mA and 10 mAPrecision: 1%



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

6 . 218

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . i

CHAPTER 7 – SCHEMATICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

7–1 IDENTIFICATION 7 – 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–2 SCHOTTKY DIODES 7 – 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3 LIST OF SYMBOLS 7 – 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3–1 DESIGNATION OF THE COMPONENTS 7 – 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–4 LIST OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE SCHEMATICS 7 – 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–5 USING THE SCHEMATICS 7 – 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . ii

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 1

7 SCHEMATICS

7 .

Module 1

Module 2

Module 3

Module 4

Module 5

Module 6

Module 7

Module 8

9TR1

Module 9


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 3

7–1 IDENTIFICATION

– The electronic circuits in the mobile intraoperative radiology system are grouped together in the modules identi-fied as follows:. module 1 : block (item 1),. module 2 : control console (item 2),. module 3 : card rack assembly (item 3),. module 4 : inverter (item 4),. module 5 : power supply (item 5),. module 6 : X–ray head (item 6),. module 7 : X–ray head, collimator (item 7),. module 8 : image intensifier and TV camera (item 8),. module 9 : interface installed on the rear side of the monitor cart (item 9).

Examples:– the ”kV/ma reference” board in module 3, position 9, is marked 3A9,– the HV divider board in module 6 is marked 6A1.– the supply transformer in module 5 is marked 5TR1.

7–2 SCHOTTKY DIODES

Schottky diodes (1N6263), commonly used in the mobile system electronic circuits, are in fact used as ordinarydiodes.

7–3 LIST OF SYMBOLS

7–3–1 DESIGNATION OF THE COMPONENTS

Examples :. 3A1 :– 3 is module number (give a location information),

– A means PCB (PL for plug, a and b for PCB connector).– 1 is order number.

. 3A1 R58 : – number 58 resistor which is on 3A1 PCB.

. 4R29 : – number 29 resistor which is in module 4 (not on a PCB).

BP= PushbuttonC = CapacitorD = CR = Diode, thyristor or rectifier bridgeDS= LightE = Test pointF = FuseG = Logic circuitK = RelayL = CoilM = MotorA = OP = Operational amplifier, FET switch voltage regulatorQ = TransistorR = ResistorS = SW = SwitchB = TB = Terminal boardT = TR = TransformerW = JumperPL = Plug


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 4

7–4 LIST OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE SCHEMATICS

ABBREVIATIONS PWB NAME COMMENTSLOCALISATION

AUTO 3A7–51A Automatic FLUORO mode selection

BP01 3A13–112B Upper blades of collimator : opening control

BP02 3A13–112B Lower blades of collimator : opening control

BPF1 3A13–112B Upper blades of collimator : closing control

BPF2 3A13–112C Lower blades of collimator : closing control

BPmA(s) Up 3A17–66C mA or mAs selection : increase control

BPmA(s) Down 3A7–66C mA or mAs selection : diminution control

BP OFF 3A3–116D Unit switching OFF Push–button

BPCL 2A1–102B Request of X–Ray emission – Fluoro and RAD2A3–102C

BUS kV/20 3A7–60C 8 bits coded information of kV/20 value

CAG ON/OFF 3A3–119A Gain automatic control switching

CAPA PREPO 3A19–35C Prepositioning of converter capacitors (C3/C4 discharge control)

Consigne mAs 3A7–78E Analog signal of mAs reference for RAD exposure (mAs integration).

Consigne mA SC 3A9–78B Analog signal of mA reference for the regulation of Fluoro filament heating.

Consigne kV/20 3A9–97A Analog signal of kV reference for kV regulation

CLIGN 3A12–106A Square wave signal for display lights and intermittent operation of the buzzer.

CLOCK 3A19–31E Pulse generated by the control oscillator of the mains thyristors

DEM X 3A12–28D Signal of kV regulation obtained by comparison of composite kV (actual kV and kV/20 reference)

DETECTION I 3A19–36B Detection of the presence of current through main thyristors.

ER 3A7–66B ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY mode selection

FC01 3A9–76C Minimum value of mA : 0,1 mA

FC0 3A9–76C Minimum value of mAs (RAD mode) : 0,16 mAs

FCGR 3A9–76C Maximum value of mAs (RAD mode) : 160 mAs

FCGR1 3A3–114B Upper collimator blades limit switch : RAD size

FCGR2 3A3–114B Lower collimator blades limit switch : RAD size

FCSC1 3A3–114B Upper collimator blades limit switch : FLUORO size


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 5

FCSC2 3A3–114C Lower collimator blades limit switch : FLUORO size

FC40 3A9–91A Minimum kV value (40 kV)

FC110 3A9–91A Maximum kV value

FL 3A7–66C FLUORO mode selection

Fmax 3A19–31D Maximum frequence operation of the converter. Not used

FS 31B X–Ray request from foot switch

GR 3A7–66B RAD mode selection

HLC 2A1–71A High definition fluoro selectionHLC does not refer to ”Hi levelcontrol” operation above 5 or 10 R/min. In both Hi definitionand low dose operation, the entrance exposure rate remains below 10R/min.

Hold kV 3A1–201E Latching of the kV regulation loop after T1 delay (delay of automatism kV stabilization)

INT 4 CLQ 3A12–28B Exposure interruption after 4 VHV leakages

kV C0 3A7–57C Counter locking when kV bus is at ”0”

kV 85% 3A12–28C Signal generated when kV reach 85% of selected kV value.

kV 120 3A12–28C Safety : stops the converter if kV value is 120 kV

kV/20 Auto 3A5–45D kV reference in automatic Fluoro mode

kV composite 3A12–23D Actual kV value (VA + VC)

Mesure mA Sc 3A12–20C FLUORO mA measure (1 mA = 1V)

Mesure mA GR 3A12–20C RAD mA measure (10 mA = 1V)

OX 3A19–31A Control the X–RAY emission bistable (through 3A1 PWB when a memory is used)

OX.HLC 3A3–119F Hold of HLC selection during pulsed Fluoro mode operation.

PRE 3A19–35A Control of mA reference in RAD mode (delayed signal)

PRI 3A19–40B Signal present when current is detected in one of main thyristors.

PRX 3A12–24A Signal present when X–Ray are emitted

PRX.CP 3A12–106B Synchronous signal (50 Hz) with X–Ray emission

RAD 3A19–40A RAD mode selection signal

RP 3A26–81A Reduced power signal in RAD mode when unit is used with the100, 108 or 120V mains

RX req. 3A12–28C Not used

Sa Th2 MOD 6–16E X–Ray head temperature detection (68[C)Switch ON thermaloverload display

SC 3A17–63A Signal (SC or SC) generated by the RAD or RAD selection.

SEC BELLOW MOD 6 – 16E Safety of X–Ray head temperature(6Sa1) Bellow compensation switch : inhibition of exposure


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 6

SEXP 3A19–35B Control signal of main thyristors oscillator

SP 3A7–66B PULSED FLUORO mode selection

STOP mAs 3A26–85D RAD exposure end signal (elapsed mAs = selected mAs)

SX 3A19–33A X–Ray emission safety (BPCL + PWB presence)

SYX SC 3A19–35A Control signal of heating in FLUORORelease Fluoro mA reference

SYX GR 3A19–35B Control signal in RAD mode : not used

TROU CLQ 3A12–28A Momentary stop of the control oscillator of the main thyristorwhen a VHV leakage occurs

Va 6A1–20C Actual anodic volts value

Vc 6A1–20C Actual cathodic volts value

Z(ZOOM) 3A3–111E ZOOM selection with II 22 cm (2 fields)

0 logic from 3A9–78C mas integrator selection : low or High mAs0,16 to 5 mAs mAs integrator

4’26” 3A12–103B Warning signal of 4’26” X–Ray emission time

4’57” 3A12–106B Stop signal of X–Ray emission after 4’ 57” of Fluoro sequence

12V CI 15F–18F Detection of the PWB presence Permit the operation of main thyristors


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 7

INTERFACE DSM 3A1 828988 G 035

ACP 201C Anode Cooling Pause : generate a delay between exposures in ER mode selection if SW602.B is in ON position

HYST 45C not used

MCH 202B Mode change : signal generated during the switching of an operating mode to an other

ON REST + MCH 203B Reset of the monostable when the unit is switching ON or during an operating mode switching

OX* 204C RX emission order generated through the adaptation operatinglogic network

OX* R1 204D Signal delayed according to the rising edge of the OX* signal butsynchronous with the falling edge of OX*

OX* R2 204D Signal synchronous with the rising edge of the OX* signal butdelayed according to the falling edge of OX*

RAZ ROTATION 206D Rotation to the start position of the monitor rotation coils when mode A/B is selected in the memory

SN 203F NORMAL FLUORO MODE selection generated by default ofother mode selections

STOP DSM 208D Signal generated by X PERM from the memory

T 114F Signal generated during the field change with a 22 cm (9”) imager

T1 to T5 Control delays of RX emission sequence in the different operating mode

T6 202A Control of RX pulses emission in PULSED FLUORO mode.

X PERM 207E Signal from memo unit : availability of the memory or end of the image processing


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 8

7–5 USING THE SCHEMATICS

– The schematics are in flow chart form.

– As much as possible, the relation between control and action has been respected.

– Each signal is indexed and adressed in the schematics.

Example : SEXP signal

The SEXP signal is generated on PCB 3A19 commande SCR2 – output a18 – schematic reference 35B.

The signal is used onPCB 3A12 – input a143A5 – input b83A3 – input a17

The index of the signal is marked in front of the use terminal

3A12.a14 – 21B

In front of 3A12.a14 terminal, SEXP signal has the index of the terminal where the signal is generated :3A19.a18–35B

– The wiring between terminal is respected and so permits an easier localization of interconnection default.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 9

SCHEMATICS

SEE AT THE END OF THIS MANUAL


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

7 . 10

Blank page


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . i

CHAPTER 9 – SPARE PARTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

9–1 STENOSCOP 9 . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CASSETTE HOLDER (OPTION) 9 . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STENOSCOP BASE ASM 9 . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WIRED FRAME ASM 9 . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6000 / 9000 KIT 9 . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MECHANICAL FRAME 9 . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME + C ARM ADAPTATION 9 . 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MOUNTED FRAME ASM 9 . 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTROL CONSOLE SUPPORT 9 . 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBILE COLUMN ASSEMBLY 9 . 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HORIZONTAL ARM ASM 9 . 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL CONSOLE ASM. 9 . 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL PANEL MODULE 1 9 . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A1 : ”C ARM” MOTOR PWB. 9 . 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINTED WIRED BOARDS 9 . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CARD RACK MODULE #3–2 9 . 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

L.V. POWER SUPPLY 9 . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INVERTER – MODULE #4 9 . 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POWER MODULE #5 9 . 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6” CCD IMAGER KIT+ COLLIMATOR. 9 . 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

”C ARM” SUPPORT ASM. ( 6” ) 9 . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6” COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 9 . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9” CCD IMAGER KIT + COLLIMATOR. 9 . 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

”C ARM” SUPPORT. ( 9” ) 9 . 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9” COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 9 . 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MONITOR CART ASSEMBLY / Basic version 9 . 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MONITOR CART WIRING 9 . 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STENO 2 INTERFACE MODULE 9 9 . 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X – RAY HAND SWITCH KIT 9 . 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 CCD–MDA COVERS 9 . 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MONITOR CART COVERS 9 . 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DR4 or MD10 CABLES INTERCONNECTIONS 9 . 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MDA CABLES INTERCONNECTIONS 9 . 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M Serie” PLUGS 9 . 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PLUG 62 POSITIONS 9 . 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

O.E.M. REFERENCE. 9 . 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . ii


9–2 LASER 9 . 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXTERNAL LASER AIMING SPARE PARTS 9 . 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INTEGRATED LASER AIMING SPARE PARTS 9 . 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–3 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER 9 . 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER 9 . 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–4 IMAGER 9 . 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IMAGEUR 16/22 FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 CCD–MDA 9 . 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IMAGEUR 16 CCD 9 . 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IMAGEUR 22 CCD 9 . 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED 9 . 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 9 . 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–5 MEMORIES 9 . 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MDA MEMORY 9 . 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DR4 MEMORY 9 . 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MD10 MEMORY 9 . 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–6 MONITORS 9 . 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–7 KITS (MONITOR CART) 9 . 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MDA MEMORY KIT 9 . 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VCR SONY KIT 9 . 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FILM REPRO KIT 9 . 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PAPER REPRO KIT 9 . 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CCM 620 VISIPLEX 9 . 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VISIPLEX SPARE LIST 9 . 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 1

8 . 8 9 .

9 SPARE PARTS

9–1 STENOSCOP

BASE 6000/9000KIT 6000/9000 CCD

KIT IMAGER 16 cm (6”)COLLIMATOR 16 cm (6”)

KIT IMAGER 22 cm (9”)COLLIMATOR 22 cm (9”)

IMAGER 16 cm (6”)50 Hz




CHASSIS

SERIES 6000 SERIES 9000

MONITORS CART

FFD MONITORS�DR4�MD10�MD10 with option key board�MDA 200 images storage

options : �2000 images�4 FPS�5000 images + 8 FPS�Soft Measure�Soft Vascular 1�Soft Vascular 2

FILM REPRO KIT

HARD COPY KIT

CCM620 Multiformat Camera 60 Hz / 525 L or 50 Hz / 625 L1 , 2 or 4 + 1 format

VCR KIT

VCR S–VHS SONY50Hz–625L–220V–CEI–RS232or60Hz–525L–110V–UL–RS232

See chapter 2 § 2–1 BASIC CONFIGURATION – OPTIONS

PRINTER SONY UP910CEI / 220V or UL / 110V

PRINTER SONY UP890CEI / 220VorPRINTER SONY UP880UL / 110V

CASSETTE HOLDER :24x30 or 9.5”x9.5” or 10”x12”

Rot. 00 with DR4 or MD10 No rot. with MDA

MEMORIES

OPTIONS


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 2

1

3 to 8

2

Assembly Name : CASSETTE HOLDER ( OPTION )

Componentnumber

Codenumber Description

FRU

Valid from serial : AVT :

See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 3

001 828 968 P015 Retaining rubber shoe 2

002 823 993 P015 Spring blade 2

003 830 534 G015 24 x 30 Cassette holder – D6 2

004 830 535 G015 9.5” x 9.5” Cassette holder – D6 2

005 830 539 G015 10” x 12” Cassette holder – D6 2

006 830 536 G015 24 x 30 Cassette holder – D9 2

007 830 537 G015 9.5” x 9.5” Cassette holder – D9 2

008 830 540 G015 10” x 12” Cassette holder – D9 2

Transportationlock bar (rod)

6


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 4

Assembly Name : STENOSCOP BASE ASM 828 490 G045Range : 0

Componentnumber


FRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 5

002 828 703 G015 WIRED FRAME ASM 9 . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

004 828 705 G025 COVERS KIT 9 . 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

006 823 697 P015 TRANSPORT LOCKING ROD 1

013 818 770 P243 FACTORY NAME LABEL

014 818 770 P253 WARNING EXPLOSION LABEL

015 829 540 P015 GUIDING POSITION LABEL

021 828 554 P095 FR / ENG. CLASSIFICATION LABEL

022 828 554 P135 FR / ENG. UNIT TRAVEL LABEL

030 829 431 P015 FUSES LABEL

032 828 554 P115 FR / ENG. MAINS LABEL

033 828 554 P125 ”I /O” LABEL

034 818 770 P213 WARNING EXPLOSION LABEL

042 854 030 P115 EQUIPOTENTIAL WIRE ( L= 5 m )

045 828 794 P015 ” C ARM ”ROTATION STOPS LABEL

047 828 795 P015 CAUTION ( VOLTS ) LABEL

048 853 575 P035 FERRITE 40 X 34

054 830 904 P025 WARNING LABEL

059 818 779 P683 CE LABEL

9

18

19

22

21

A

A

B

B

3

29

33

52

41

4231

32

30

828 794 P015

818 770 P213


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 6

Assembly Name : WIRED FRAME ASM 828 703 G015Range : 1

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 7

002 828 702 G015 FRAME+C–ARM ADAPTATION 9 . 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 003 828 520 G515 X–RAY HEAD ASSEMBLY004 851 212 P495 HSHC SCREW M 6X30 AC005 012 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6006 011 851 380 P125 WASHER M6 AC 007 851 258 P345 MSCPS SCREW M 6X12 AC ( DIN 913 )008 828 957 P014 PANEL 2 ST2 LABEL009 828 730 G025 CONTROL PANEL 9 . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 010 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M 6X20 AC 018 824 307 G125 FLAT CABLE 50 PINS 1019 824 305 G125 FLAT CABLE 34 PINS 1021 854 038 P095 FEMALE–FEMALE BNC PLUG 1022 825 374 G035 STENOSCOP 2 FLUORO FOOTSWITCH 1023 853 052 P225 CABLE CLAMP 024 853 063 P625 NUT PG 9 POLYAMIDE025 824 241 P024 TERMINAL PROTECTION028 850 703 P185 FLEXIBLE 4610026 PROTECTION029 828 964 P013 COLUMN HIGHT SCALE 2030 828 966 P015 LOCKING INDICATOR 2 031 828 966 P025 WIG–WAG MVT. INDICATOR 2032 828 966 P035 C–ARM ROTATION INDICATOR 2033 828 966 P045 FRONT–REAR MVT. INDICATOR 2035 828 965 P013 C–ARM ANGULATION SCALE 2036 820 357 P015 BRAKE INDICATOR 037 853 152 P025 ”RED POINT” STICKER041 829 380 P024 C–ARM HORIZONTAL MVT. INDICATOR 2042 829 380 P034 C–ARM HORIZONTAL MVT. INDICATOR 2043 853 062 P675 REUSABLE SELF–LOCKING COLLAR045 829 381 P015 HORIZONTAL C–ARM MVT. POINTER (GRAY) 2

046 829 381 P025 HORIZONTAL C–ARM MVT. POINTER (RED) 2048 851 230 P655 SELF TAPPING SCREW M 4X15 AC049 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER M 4050 818 770 P413 ”ELECTRICAL HAZARD” LABEL

051 818 770 P523 ”WARNING” LABEL052 860 207 P015 MECHANICAL STOP JENATZY 719.11 1055 851 201 P865 SELF BLOCKING SCREW HH M 6X20

xxiii. 9 . 7

MODULE 3

360

586

A

41

51

A

72

77 99( 3 versions )

80

101


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 8

Assembly Name : 6000 / 9000 KIT 830 045 G055Range : 0

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 9

03 see page 9 . 35 INTERFACE DSM PWB. 9 . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 006 see page 9 . 35 kV / mA 2 REFERENCE PWB. 9 . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 018 827 908 G065 MONITOR CART ASM / Basic version 9 . 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

033 831 003 GO15 ANTI GRADIENT ASSEMBLY041 832 548 P013 BRAKE SHOE 1046 831 235 P014 LOGO STENO049 830 942 P023 CONSOLE OVERLAY FR (option) 2050 830 942 P033 CONSOLE OVERLAY D (option) 2

051 830 942 P043 CONSOLE OVERLAY GB 2052 830 942 P053 CONSOLE OVERLAY SP (option) 2053 830 942 P063 CONSOLE OVERLAY IT (option) 2058 see page 9 . 35 CCD TIMER PWB 3A5 9 . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

060 see page 9 . 35 CCD COLLIMATOR 2 PWB 3A3 9 . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 061 831 037 P025 LABEL062 826 921 P615 STENO 2 6000/9000 CCD. – MDA SERVICE MANUAL GB063 826 931 P735 STENO OPERATOR MANUAL GB067 828 701 G025 FRAME ASSEMBLY 9 . 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

068 see page 9 . 62 PANEL COVER 9 . 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 069 830 998 G025 COVERS 6000/9000 CCD MDA KIT 9 . 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072 832 226 P023 DRIVING HANDEL 1073 832 227 P014 LEFT HANDEL FITTING

074 832 283 P014 RIGHT HANDEL FITTING075 832 284 P015 HANDEL PLATE FITTING

077 832 405 P023 BACK WHEELS TEERING HANDEL 1078 851 256 P235 MSCPS SCREW M8x8 AC080 828 626 P033 HANDEL 1081 851 222 P295 CSH SCREW M10x30 AC082 851 212 P535 HSHC SCREW M6x50 AC

083 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M6x20 AC084 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6085 832 333 P015 STEERING HANDEL SPACER086 851 539 P445 STOPGAP Ø 15/20098 829 585 P015 COLLIMATOR COVER RING WITH THREAD 2

099 827 082 P015 SPACER WITHOUT LASER AND DAP 12 185 090 SPACER FOR DAP AND INTEGRATED LASER (SHORT) 12 185 091 SPACER WITH INTEGRATED LASER WITHOUT DAP (LONG) 1

101 828 750 G035 CCD CONSOLE ASSEMBLY 9 . 29 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 832 414 G015 COLUMN COVER ASSEMBLY 9 . 62 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 832 478 G015 COUNTERWEIGHT KIT104 828 955 G615 MONITOR CART CABLE 9 . 62 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 832 137 P021 MONITOR CART REAR COVER 9 . 63 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39 – 40

39 – 40

2 38

29 – 30

32 – 33

32 – 33 32 – 3337

26

2320

24

20

25

707171

75 –76

21


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 10

Assembly Name : MECHANICAL FRAME 828 710 G035Range : 2

Componentnumber


FRU

Valid from serial : AVT 8102:


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 11

002 828 719 G045 WELDED FRAME004 832 182 G025 REAR WHEEL FORK005 023 851 784 P275 BEARING 2B 47/20x20.6006 024 851 835 P205 RETAINING RING 47 MM007 832 193 P015 LINKING FRAME SHAFT

008 027 851 830 P165 RETAINING RING 20 MM009 832 194 P015 PUSHING ROD 2010 800 555 P144 SPRING 15x22011 851 835 P075 RETAINING RING 19 MM012 052 93 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER FOR Ø 4 SCREW013 102 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8 x 16

014 851 389 P135 WASHER Ø 8 DIN 6798017 861 376 P014 WHEEL NERVIANI Ø 125 x 30 1018 832 336 P015 BUSHING019 832 204 P015 WHEEL SHAFT020 851 830 P105 RETAINING RING 12 MM021 832 566 G515 BACK PUSH CABLES 1

022 832 508 P015 CAPLUG025 832 017 P015 REAR SPROCKET026 832 554 G015 REAR SPROCKET SHAFT ASSEMBLY073 081 851 256 P045 MSCPS SCREW M 6X10 AC029 861 368 P015 RETURN SPROCKET 15 TEETH

030 851 830 P085 RETAINING RING 10 MM032 832 243 P025 CHAIN GUIDE033 851 212 P265 COUNTERSUNK SCREW M5 x 16 AC037 832 337 P015 CHAIN 3 / 8 ” 69 LINKS 2038 832 337 P025 CHAIN 3 / 8 ” 195 LINKS 2

039 832 338 P015 COUPLING LINK 3/8“ 2040 832 314 G015 CHAIN TIGHTENER ASM 1041 860 825 P015 SPRING STOP A303–12 NLM 1042 851 350 P555 M12 LOCK NUT045 831 081 G045 RIGHT SHAFT ASM

046 831 081 G035 LEFT SHAFT ASM047 831 015 P015 BUSHING 2048 861 379 P015 BRAKE CAM 2049 851 212 P045 MSCPS SCREW M 4X10 AC050 832 497 P015 WHEEL SHAFT BEARING

051 851 212 P065 HSHC SCREW M4 x 16052 93 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER FOR Ø 4 SCREW053 94 851 380 P105 WASHER FOR M4 SCREW054 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER FOR Ø 6 SCREW055 851 383 P315 WASHER Ø 6.4 / 18056 851 212 P445 HSHC SCREW M6 x 10 AC

7

6

8

5

19

18

11

41– 42

4

20

17

49

48

9–10

91–92–93–94

47 47 50–51–52–5355–56

6160

83–8462–63–64798081–82

46

57–58–59 57–58–59

45

83–84

102–103

97

100–101Front push cables ASM

832 565 G015


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 12


Componentnumber


FRU

Valid from serial : AVT 8102 :


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 13

057 831 014 P015 SHAFT 2058 063 068 851 352 P245 M8 SAFETY NUT

059 064 069076 851 380 P135 WASHER FOR M8 SCREW060 831 083 G025 WELDED PUSHING ROD

061 831 009 P044 PUSHING ROD062 831 016 P025 BRACKET067 831 006 G015 FOOT BRAKE WELDED PUSHING ROD 2070 832 351 G025 FOOT BRAKE PEDAL 2071 831 015 P015 BUSHING

072 080 851 650 P475 PARALLEL KEY 4X4X18074 082 851 256 P025 MSCPS SCREW M6X6 AC075 101 851 352 P035 M8 SAFETY NUT079 831 011 P014 SHAFT 2083 831 012 P015 COVER

084 851 221 P045 COUNTERSUNK SCREW M4 x 10 AC087 851 201 P515 HH SCREW M8X40 AC088 851 350 P535 M8 LOCK NUT091 861 369 P014 REAR WHEEL BRAKE 1092 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4 x 10

097 832 563 G015 FREE WHEEL 1100 851 201 P575 HH SCREW M8X75 AC103 851 390 P135 LOCK WASHER M8109 811 512 P084 SHAFT 1110 851 380 P155 WASHER M12

111 851 830 P105 RETAINING RING FOR 12MM SHAFT113 828 612 P014 DRIVING SHAFT 1114 828 614 P015 ROLLER SHAFT 1115 851 726 P055 BEARING RAT 17 1116 851 201 P265 HH SCREW M6X16 AC

117 125 142 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6118 143 851 380 P125 WASHER M6119 851 350 P125 SCREW M6 AC120 824 002 P015 PULLEY 14 TEETH 1121 851 650 P255 PARALLEL KEY 3X3X14

122 135 851 255 P235 MSCPS SCREW M4X6 AC123 861 381 P013 GEARMOTOR DOGA Ø 60 1124 851 201 P245 HH SCREW M6X10 AC126 829 564 P015 MOTOR FIXING PLATE127 851 367 P075 CAPTIVE NUT C–4844C

128 851 212 P065 HSHC SCREW M4X16 AC

xxiv. 9 . 13

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎÎÎÎÎ

Ï

114

133

113

115–116–117

125

114

136

127–128–129–130

87–88

131

127–128–129–130

123–124–125

67

68–69

72–73–74

134

135

115–116–117

115–116–117110111

120121122132

141142143144145


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 14


Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 15

130 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3X12X1131 832 020 P013 MOTOR SUPPORT132 832 437 P015 DOGA MOTOR BUSHING133 824 002 P025 PULLEY 16 TEETH 1134 851 655 P045 DISK KEY 3X3,7

136 851 677 P085 TIMING BELT 450H050 1140 853 152 P075 GROUND LABEL141 854 030 P125 EQUIPOTENTIAL WIRING PLUG144 851 355 P125 SCREW M6 LT145 829 378 G015 GROUNDING WIRE

16,22

3

5

4

11


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 16

Assembly Name : FRAME + C ARM ADAPTATION 828702 G015Range : 2

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 17

003 828 720 G055 BEARING SUPPORT 1004 828 720 G065 BEARING SUPPORT 1005 851 444 P025 SPRING PIN 5X12 AC006 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8X16 AC

007 851 213 P085 HSHC SCREW M8X25 AC008 851 380 P135 WASHER M8009 033 851 390 P135 LOCK WASHER M8011 828 953 G585 X–RAY HEAD CONTROL CABLE014 825 369 G035 DIVIDER CABLE UL 1

016 828 439 G025 C–ARM CABLE CLAMP KIT 1018 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M6X20 AC019 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6020 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC021 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER M4

022 828 453 P013 C–ARM JOINT 1023 829 872 P013 COLLIMATOR COVER JOINT 1026 829 367 G015 C–ARM GROUND WIRE028 854 006 P245 CONNECTOR ASM030 829 578 P015 SHAFT 2 034 851 213 P105 HSHC SCREW M8X35 AC038 851 255 P445 MSCPS SCREW M5X8 AC039 850 696 P015 POLYURETHANE FOAM 500X100X15 044 829 988 G015 EARTH BRAID046 831 020 P015 C–ARM ROTATION SCALE 2047 830 988 P014 C–ARM ROTATION DISK048 851 255 P235 MSCPS SCREW M4X6 AC

xxv. 9 . 17

ÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


Safety device detail

05

036

055

062

034

033035036

072073074075

075

041

060056057059059060

006007008009

020021022023

019

018

025

017

093094095096097098


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 18

Assembly Name : MOUNTED FRAME ASM 828 701 G025Range : 3

Componentnumber


FRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 19

002 828 710 G035 MECHANICAL FRAME ASM 9 . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 005 828 713 G025 FRAME ASM 9 . 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 006 851 213 P095 HSHC SCREW M8X30 AC007 051 851 380 P135 WASHER M8008 046 851 390 P135 LOCK WASHER M8009 851 367 P285 CAPTIVE NUT C4808–B–M8 017 851 440 P505 SPRING PIN Ø 3 x 36 AC 1018 832 287 P014 LOWER UNIVERSAL JOINT019 832 286 P015 UPPER UNIVERSAL JOINT020 832 290 P015 MALE PART021 832 291 P015 FEMALE PART 022 851 212 P455 HSHC SCREW M 6X12 AC023 851 390 P115 LOCK WASHER M5025 851 847 P145 STOP RING 12033 823 514 P015 ECCENTRIC SHAFT034 851 815 P015 ROLLER DIAM. 10/32X9

035 851 830 P085 CIRCLIP DIN 471 for 10 MM SHAFT036 851 255 P445 MSCPS CREW M5X8 AC041 832 524 G015 MOBILE COLUMN ASM 9 . 25 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042 823 876 P015 VERTICAL BUMPER SUPPORT 2043 831 528 P015 COLUMN MECHANICAL STOP

045 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8X16 AC049 823 870 P014 SAFETY DEVICE LEVER 2050 811 512 P164 SHAFT DIAM. 8H9 1052 851 830 P065 SPRING CIRCLIP DIN 471 for 8 MM SHAFT

055 823 872 P015 SAFETY DEVICE 1056 811 512 P084 SHAFT DIAM.12 1057 851 848 P575 STOP WASHER DIAM. 12 MM058 851 380 P155 WASHER M12059 851 382 P445 CALIBRATED SPRING WASHER 12,5/16/1

060 851 830 P105 CIRCLIP DIN 471 for 12 MM SHAFT061 811 502 P085 THREADED ROD M4062 851 370 P065 WELL NUT B832 M4063 817 170 P015 SPRING 1064 817 181 P016 FASTENER065 851 350 P135 NUT M8 AC

xxvi. 9 . 19

ÎÎÎ ÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

ÏÏ

061

069

070–071

049

050–051–052

086087088089090

042

043

044–045–046

064

063

062

087088089


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 20

Assembly Name : MOUNTED FRAME ASM 828701 G025Range : 3

Componentnumber


FRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 21

069 860 953 P014 GAS SPRING 1070 811 512 P164 SHAFT DIAM. 8H9 1071 851 830 P065 SPRING CIRCLIP DIN 471 for 8 MM SHAFT072 851 201 P525 HH SCREW M8X45 AC073 851 380 P135 WASHER M8

074 851 390 P135 LOCK WASHER M8075 851 352 P035 SAFETY NUT M8 AC081 832 423 G015 HORIZONTAL ARM ASSEMBLY 9 . 27 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 082 851 212 P325 HSHC SCREW M5X45 AC083 851 390 P115 LOCK WASHER M5

084 829 741 P015 HORIZONTAL ARM BUMPER 1085 832 238 P012 CHAIN COVER086 851 367 P045 CAPTIVE NUT C4844–M8087 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER M4088 851 383 P305 WASHER Ø 5,3/15/1,5

089 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10 AC090 829 376 P014 CABLES FITTING093 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M6X20 AC094 851 383 P065 WASHER Ø 6,5/27 AC095 851 380 P125 WASHER M6

096 851 350 P135 NUT M8 AC097 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6098 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC

017018

009

008

005

006

Respect the pinorientation.

007

004

A

B

View AB


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 22

Assembly Name : CONTROL CONSOLE SUPPORT 828 713 G025Range : 4

Componentnumber


FRU



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 23

004 824 260 P051 CONSOLE SUPPORT005 832 015 P014 STEERING HANDLE SHAFT006 832 288 P015 STEERING HANDLE BUSHING007 851 444 P165 SPRING PIN 6X28 AC008 851 444 P585 PIN 4X24 AC 009 851 256 P075 HSHC SCREW M6X20 AC017 851 258 P365 HSHC SCREW M6X35 AC018 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC

xxvii. 9 . 23

16

24

9

8

11

12

13

17

2

29

4

20 22

23

19


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 24

Assembly Name : MOBILE COLUMN ASSEMBLY 832 524 G015Range : 4

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 25

002 828 718 G025 WELDED MOBILE COLUMN 2

004 828 529 P014 SAFETY DEVICE PLATE

008 823 701 G035 WELDED WIG–WAG SHAFT 2

009 851 595 P325 BUSHING GLACIER 1

011 832 028 P013 COLLAR 2

012 832 040 P015 SETTING SCREW 1

013 851 350 P155 M12 NUT

016 823 515 P043 BEARING SUPPORT

017 851 222 P085 HSFH SCREW M8X25 AC

019 823 512 P015 HORIZONTAL ARM SHAFT 1

020 823 514 P015 ECCENTRIC SHAFT 1

022 851 815 P015 ROLLER DIAM.10/32X9 1

023 851 830 P085 SPRING CIRCLIP DIN 471 / 10 MM 1

024 851 255 P445 HSH SCREW M5X8 AC

029 828 739 P015 SHAFT

xxviii. 9 . 25

7

8

10

14

6

15

16

19

20

1718

21

29

13

11–12

4 3–5


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 26

Range : 4

Componentnumber


FRU


Assembly Name : HORIZONTAL ARM ASM 832 423 G515

See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 27

002 832 420 P012 HORIZONTAL ARM

003 851 222 P115 HSHC SCREW M 5X45 AC

004 829 741 P015 HORIZONTAL ARM BUMPER

005 851 390 P115 LOCK WASHER M5

006 832 028 P013 C–ARM LOCKING COLLAR

007 832 418 P015 ANGLE–IRON FOR COLLAR FIXATION

008 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M 8X16 AC

009 828 313 P035 STOP

010 832 424 G015 C–ARM SUPPORT SHAFT

011 851 211 P345 HSHC SCREW M6X10 AC

012 851 390 P125 LOCK WASHER M6

013 829 635 P015 STOP SCREW

014 851 830 P225 CIRCLIP DIN 471 / 50 MM RE

015 832 040 P015 THREADED ROD FOR COLLAR

016 851 448 P185 GROOVED PIN DIAM. 4X12 AC

017 828 422 P015 SPACER RING

018 828 423 G025 HORIZONTAL ARM LOCKING ROD

019 851 350 P155 M12 NUT

020 828 426 P022 COVER

021 851 448 P355 GROOVED PIN 5X16 AC

xxix. 9 . 27

4

2 3

44

24(2A3)

25(2A1)


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 28

Assembly Name : CONTROL CONSOLE ASM. 828 750 G035Range : 2

Componentnumber


FRU

Valid from serial : AVT : 8058

See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 29

002 829 583 P021 THERMO CONTROL CONSOLE 2

003 828 952 P012 CONTROL DESK INTERMEDIATE PLATE 2

004 824 485 P015 PANEL FIXING BRACKET

005 851 216 P075 CS SCREW M4X20 AC

006 851 384 P055 MACHINED WASHER 4,3X12X1 AC

007 016 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4

008 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC

009 851 350 P505 COUNTERNUT M4 AC

010 851 380 P105 WASHER M4 AC

011 851 352 P215 SAFETY NUT M4 AC TYPE BAS

012 832 463 P012 EMC METAL SHEET FOR CONSOLE

013 851 216 P045 CS SCREW M4X10 AC

014 851 214 P215 PHILLIPS SCREW M4X8 AC

015 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3X12X1 AC

019 851 212 P485 HSHC SCREW M6X25 AC

020 851 214 P445 PHILLIPS SCREW M6X25

024 832 440 G015 RIGHT CONTROL DESK PWB ( 2A3 ) 1

025 832 439 G015 LEFT CONTROL DESK PWB ( 2A1 ) 1

027 851 393 P045 SPRINGWASHER 8/4,2X0,4 ZINC–COATED

028 851 381 P105 INSULATING WASHER M4

9 . 29xxx.

Tb1

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E7 E10 E11 E13

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

PL5

PL6

A

AA

A

A

A

MODULE 3

MODULE 4

MODULE 5

MODULE 1

ALIM.B.T.

L.V. P. SUP

2

4

10

20 21 23 24 25 26

29

30

38

39

43

53

59 to 63

103

75

1R3

1R2

1R1

1R4

1C1

90 81

81

81


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 30

Assembly Name : CONTROL PANEL MODULE 1 828 730 G025Range : 2

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU

Valid from serial :

See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 31

002 824 833 P032 DALLE 3MM004 829 360 P024 C–ARM CABLE CLAMP010 825 026 P014 GROUND STRIP

018 824 918 G025 SCR CONTROL CABLE ( UL+CSA ) 2019 817 596 G015 EXTENDER CARD 1020 See page 9 . 35 3A3 COLLIMATOR PWB 9 . 35 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

021 See page 9 . 35 3A5 TIMER PWB 9 . 35 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 023 See page 9 . 35 3A7 AD KV PWB 9 . 35 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

See page 9 . 35 3A9 KV/mA REFERENCE PWB 9 . 35 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

024 See page 9 . 35 3A12 KV/mA –2 REF. PWB 9 . 35 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025 See page 9 . 35 3A19 SCR CONTROL PWB 9 . 35 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 026 See page 9 . 35 3A26 FIL. HEATING PWB 9 . 35 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 029 828 733 G015 CARDRACK MODULE 3/2 ASM 9 . 37 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 038 828 734 G015 PANEL 4 : POWER MODULE 9 . 41 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053 832 361 G015 PANEL 5: POWERMODULE 9 . 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

059 832 359 G015 1A1 C–ARM MOTOR PWB 9 . 33 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060 853 064 P405 GROMMET NUT PLSTC 212 /80402 29 101061 851 236 P495 SELFTAPPING SCREW 4,2X19 AC 063 829 720 P015 C–ARM DRIVE PWB SAFETY067 828 731 G015 SPARE FUSES BAG068 828 943 G015 CABLE BUNDLE CONTROL PANEL 2070 850 703 P185 RUBBER 4610026071 853 062 P015 SELF–LOCKING COLLAR 99X2,5 072 853 062 P025 SELF–LOCKING COLLAR 142X2,5073 853 062 P035 SELF–LOCKING COLLAR 188X4,8074 826 980 G025 GROUND EXTENDER CARD UL075 832 360 G015 UL LOW VOLTAGE P.S. 9 . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

080 853 062 P675 RE–USABLE SELF–LOCKING COLLAR081 853 465 P065 RESISTOR ALU 0E68 50W090 853 464 P225 ALU RESISTOR 50W 4K7 N.I. 095 853 054 P305 FLAT CABLE CLAMP096 851 352 P035 SAFETY NUT M8 AC098 860 799 P014 ANTISTATIC BRAID103 853 219 P225 CAPACITOR 470 KPF 630V

xxxi. 9 . 31

52

18

25 – 30


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 32

Assembly Name : 1A1 : ”C ARM” MOTOR PWB. 832 359 G015Range : 3

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 33

832 359 G015 C–ARM MOTOR PWB ( 1A1 ) 1

018 854 352 P425 SLO–BLO FUSE 3A 1

025 030 853 702 P085 OPTOCOUPLER H11A5100 1

052 854 251 P065 RELAY KUHNKE UA3 24VDC 1

xxxii. 9 . 33

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E7 E10 E11 E13

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

PL5

PL6

A

AA

A

A

APANEL 3

PANEL 1

L.V. P. SUP.


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 34

Assembly Name : PWB. Range :

PWBnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 35

3A1 828 988 G035 DSM INTERFACE PWB 1

3A3 832 502 G015 COLLIMATOR #2 PWB 1

3A5 832 501 G015 TIMER PWB 1

3A7 826 853 G045 AD / KV PWB 1

828 980 G035 kV / mA REFERENCE PWB 3A9 828 980 G535 PART NUMBER to be ORDERED for AFTER SALES SERVICE ( SAS ) 1

3A12 829 825 G025 kV / mA #2 PWB 1

3A19 828 982 G035 SCR CONTROL PWB #2 1

3A26 829 357 G055 FILAMENT HEATING PWB. #4 1

xxxiii. 9 . 35

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E7 E10 E11 E13

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

PL5

PL6

A

AA

A

A

A

MODULE 3


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 36

Assembly Name CARD RACK MODULE #3–2 828 733 G015Range : 3

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 37

002 818 225 G025 PWB GUIDE ASSEMBLY003 825 119 P012 CARDRACK ASSEMBLY004 851 207 P065 SHC SCREW M4X15 AC005 021 025 851 390 P105 LOCK WASHER M4006 024 851 380 P105 WASHER M4 AC 010 854 024 P505 PWB GUIDE 1011 854 024 P035 PWB CONNECTOR 36 POS. 1012 854 024 P045 DS PWB CONNECTOR 36 POS. 1013 854 024 P025 PWB KEYING LUG.014 851 206 P455 SHC SCREW M3X12 AC 015 851 380 P085 WASHER M3 AC016 030 851 390 P085 LOCK WASHER M3017 851 350 P085 NUT M3 AC018 817 860 P014 SHIELD019 854 011 P055 FAST ON 90–90 TERMINAL

020 023 851 207 P045 SHC SCREW M4X10 AC022 825 114 P014 M–SERIE BRACKET 1026 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC027 854 039 P055 26 POS WW MALE M–SERIE PLUG 1028 854 037 P215 SCREW 9 . 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

029 854 037 P225 NUT 9 . 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 031 854 037 P245 NUT 9 . 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032 854 039 P155 26 POS WW FEMALE M–SERIE PLUG 1033 854 008 P215 SHORT RING TERMINAL 2,6X4 SHORT034 853 319 P035 WIRE 0,56 MM UL+CSA AWG20/300V #Yellow 035 853 305 P035 TINNED CU WIRE DIAM 0,5MM 0,0018 KG/M038 853 319 P425 WIRE UL+CSA AWG 26 TEFZ #Red039 853 319 P445 WIRE UL + CSA AWG 22 TEFZ #Yellow043 853 054 P305 FLAT CABLE CLAMP044 851 246 P275 HI–LO BHM SCREW 4,2X9,5 045 826 862 P014 CARD RACK SAFETY PASTEBOARD046 851 216 P045 CS SCREW M4X10 AC047 851 400 P275 SKIFFY WASHER 10 MM049 850 703 P185 PROTECTION

xxxiv. 9 . 37

2

4

5, 6, 7, 83

3


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 38

Assembly Name : L.V. POWER SUPPLY 832 360 G015Range : 3

Componentnumber


FRU



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 39

002 831 912 P013 L.V. POWER SUPPLY SUPPORT

003 861 371 P015 PSU 90W – 5/+12/–12/24V 1

004 851 224 P155 CSFHM SCREW M4X5 AC

005 851 200 P465 HH SCREW M4X15 AC

006 851 380 P305 WASHER M4

007 851 380 P105 WASHER M4 AC

008 851 355 P105 M4 SCREW LT

010 832 325 G015 LP SUPPLY HARNESS

xxxv. 9 . 39

Tb1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 40

Assembly Name : INVERTER – MODULE #4 828 734 G015Range : 3

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 41

002 829 236 P012 POWER MODULE FRAME003 853 210 P065 CAPACITOR 4000MF / 450V 2004 853 210 P615 CAPACITOR COLLAR 77 2005 012 017 851 207 P045 SHC SCREW M4X10 AC

008 854 501 P015 PASTEBOARD INSULATOR Th.0,25 mm009 853 219 P195 CAPACITOR 2MF 800VDC PP 2010 853 219 P205 CAPACITOR 5MF 800VDC 2011 853 210 P635 CAPACITOR COLLAR 49X74015 853 456 P095 RESISTOR 50W 4E7 1016 853 454 P035 RESISTOR MOUNTING CLIP 4A 26020 031 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT C4844C021 853 757 P315 RECTIFIER BRIDGE SKB 60/08 1 026 854 004 P025 8 POS. TERMINAL STRIP027 808 200 P034 8 POS. T.S. NUMBERING PLATE032 854 405 P145 220 VAC INDICATOR LIGHT 1

033 853 410 P195 RESISTOR 1PC 0,25W / 237K034 853 001 P055 THERMOSHRINK SLEEVE dia 4.8mm #Yellow035 829 233 G015 SWITCHING CHOKE ASSEMBLY 1040 828 735 G015 SANDWICH RECTIFIERS (WITH A1 AND A2) 1041 851 350 P135 NUT M8 AC 042 851 380 P135 WASHER M8043 851 390 P135 LOCKWASHER M8044 853 219 P115 CAPACITOR PA 220KPF / 630VAC045 825 021 P015 CONNECTION BAR 170X15X1046 825 022 P015 CONNECTION BAR 140X15X1 047 825 023 P015 CONNECTION BAR 90X15X1048 825 024 P015 CONNECTION BAR049 853 001 P085 THERMOSHRINK SLEEVE dia 12.7mm #Red

053 853 402 P575 RESISTOR 470 KOHM / 1W / 10%055 870 115 P511 SUP.ACTI SOLDER TIN 60.18 SWG056 828 997 G015 INVERTER CABLE BUNDLE 057 829 235 G015 ANTI–SATURATION TRANSFORMER 1064 853 058 P185 RUBBER GROMMET HV2335A066 853 575 P055 FERRITE Ø 25 x 30067 832 285 P015 CONNECTION BAR068 853 001 P095 THERMOSHRINK SLEEVE dia 19mm #BLUE

xxxvi. 9 . 41

2 3

59

47

9

10

37 3132,33,34,35 26 25

21,22,62

23,24,62

36

o

o

10,11,12,13,14

9

38,39

27,28,29,30

48,49,50,51

42,43,41,COSSE41,42,43

38,39

40,42,43

58

58

4,5,6,7

37


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 42

Assembly Name : POWER MODULE #5 832 361 G015Range : 3

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 43

002 829 261 P012 POWER MODULE SUPPORT003 860 921 P054 P.S. TRANSFORMER 1004 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC005 851 380 P125 WASHER M6006 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6 007 047 851 367 P215 CAPTIVE NUT 4806–B009 853 210 P075 ELCO CAPACITOR 470MF / 250VDC010 853 210 P515 CAP BRACKET 4322 043 04270 D35P011 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10 AC012 028 033041 049 851 380 P105 WASHER M4

013 029 034042 050 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4014 851 367 P075 CAPTIVE NUT C4844C021 854 352 P045 FUSE SLO–BLO 3A 1022 024 854 351 P055 FUSE HOLDER 1

023 854 352 P075 FUSE SLO–BLO 8A 1025 854 004 P025 8 POS. FASTON TERMINAL STRIP026 808 200 P034 8 POS. NUMBERING PLATE027 851 212 P065 HSHC SCREW M4X16 AC030 035 043 051 851 350 P105 M4 NUT

031 853 757 P045 RECTIFIER BRIDGE 300V / 25A 1032 851 212 P075 HSHC SCREW M4X20 AC036 853 058 P065 PVC GROMMET dia 22,2mm037 829 355 G015 HEATING POWER PWB. 5A1 1038 818 365 P016 BAKELITE SPACER dia 12X6

039 818 364 P016 BAKELITE SPACER dia 6X12040 851 207 P115 SHC SCREW M4X40 AC046 829 263 G015 P.S. MODULE CABLE BUNDLE048 851 207 P095 SHC SCREW M4X30 AC058 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC 059 853 402 P455 RESISTOR 47K/1W060 854 008 P635 AMP 34148 TAP CABLE–SHOE 1,6X4062 854 351 P065 FUSE HOLDER HEAD 1

xxxvii. 9 . 43

2

3

4


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 44

Assembly Name : 6” CCD IMAGER KIT+ COLLIMATOR. 832 406 G015Range : 1

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 45

002 828 723 G015 6” IMAGER COMPLETE ”C ARM” ASSEMBLY

003 828 725 G015 6” IMAGER ”C ARM” SUPPORT 9 . 47 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

004 828 751 G 025 6” WIRED COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 9 . 47 1

006 021 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC

007 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6

010 851 224 P695 CSFHM SELFBLOCKING M4X30 AC

011 851 542 P015 SKIFFY WASHER FOR NYLON CAP

012 851 542 P025 NYLON CAP 06–6–5

013 832 395 P013 MOULDED COUNTERWEIGHT

014 851 212 P515 HSHC SCREW M6X40 AC

015 851 380 P125 WASHER M6

016 024 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6

017 851 224 P665 CSFHM SELFBLOCKING SCREW M4X15 AC

018 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT C4844C

022 851 383 P315 WASHER 6,4/18X1,5 AC

023 851 383 P335 WASHER 8,4/25X2 AC

025 832 410 P013 16B CONTROL DESK SCREEN PLATE 1

027 830 997G035 COVERS KIT (Column right and left covers + Collimator cover + Wig–Wag 9 . 62. . . . . . . . .

covers kit + C Arm support left and right covers + Horizontal arm cover.)

828 725 G015

828 751 G025

26

8884

39,6732

861 205 P015


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 46

Assembly Name : ”C ARM” SUPPORT ASM. ( 6” ) 828 725 G015Range : 2

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


Assembly Name : 6” COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 828 751 G025Range : 2

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 47

002 832 630 G015 WELDED ”C ARM” SUPPORT. ( 6” version)

003 851 256 P245 HSCPS SCREW M8X10 AC

004 828 488 G035 6” MODIFIED BRAKE ASSEMBLY 1

005 828 696 P015 CLAMP 45X5X6

006 851 212 P265 HSHC SCREW M5X16 AC

007 851 383 P305 WASHER 5,3/15X1,5 AC


009 851 630 P325 TRACTION SPRING DIN 17223C 10,9/60,8

010 851 847 P085 RETAINING WASHER DIA 6–8 MM 1

xxxviii.xxxix. 9 . 47

026 861 400 P014 GEARMOTOR 1

032 851 674 P075 DRIVING–BELT 2

039 067 854 306 P215 SUB MSW 1

084 860 927 P014 GEARMOTOR 1

088 829 797 G035 MICROMOTOR ASSEMBLY 1

4

2

3


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 48

Assembly Name : 9” CCD IMAGER KIT + COLLIMATOR. 832 407 G015Range : 1

Componentnumber


FRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 49

002 828 724 G015 9” IMAGER COMPLETE ”C ARM” ASSEMBLY

003 828 726 G015 9” IMAGER ”C ARM” SUPPORT 9 . 51 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

004 828 752 G025 9” WIRED COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 9 . 51 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

006 021 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC

007 017 024 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6

010 851 224 P095 CSFHM SELFBLOCKING SCREW M4X30 AC

011 851 542 P015 SKIFFY WASHER FOR NYLON CAP

012 851 542 P025 NYLON CAP TYPE 06–6–5

018 851 350 P115 NUT M5 AC

019 851 383 P305 WASHER 5,3/15X1,5 AC


022 851 383 P315 WASHER 6,4/18X1,5 AC

023 851 383 P335 WASHER 8,4/25X2 AC

025 832 411 P013 CONTROL DESK SCREEN PLATE /9”B 1

027 830 997 G045 COVERS KIT. (Column right and left covers + Collimator cover + Wig–Wag 9 . 62. . . . . . . . covers kit + C Arm support left and right covers + Horizontal arm cover.)

5

861 205 P015

828 726 G015

828 752 G025

26

84

113

39,67

32


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 50

Assembly Name : ”C ARM” SUPPORT. ( 9” ) 828 726 G015Range : 2

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


Assembly Name : 9” COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY 828 752 G025Range : 2

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 51

002 832 630 G025 WELDED ”C ARM” SUPPORT. ( 9” version)

003 851 256 P245 HSCPS SCREW M8X10 AC

004 828 488 G045 9” MODIFIED BRAKE ASM 1

005 828 696 P015 CLAMP 45X5X6

006 851 212 P265 HSHC SCREW M5X16 AC

007 851 383 P305 WASHER 5,3/15X1,5 AC


009 851 630 P325 TRACTION SPRING DIN 17223C 10,9/60,8

010 851 847 P085 RETAINING WASHER dia 6–8 mm 1

9 . 51 xl.

026 861 400 P014 GEARMOTOR 1

032 851 674 P075 DRIVING–BELT 2

039 067 854 306 P215 SUB MSW 1

084 860 927 P014 GEARMOTOR 1

113 829 797 G035 MICROMOTOR ASSEMBLY 1

A

A

19

22

29

27, 28

23

24


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 52

Assembly Name : MONITOR CART ASSEMBLY / Basic version 827 908 G065Range : 1

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 53

002 827 944 G035 WELDED FRAME ASM (Modular Monitor Cart)003 832 402 P012 FRONT UPPER SHELF004 830 763 P012 SEPARATION PLATE ( Mod.Mon.Cart )005 831 220 P013 WELDED LEFT FOOT ( Mod.Mon.Cart )006 831 220 P023 WELDED RIGHT FOOT (Mod.Mon.Cart ) 007 830 781 G015 WELDED LOWER BIN (Mod.Mon.Cart )008 076 851 213 P055 HSHC SCREW M8X12 AC009 832 403 P012 REAR UPPER SHELF010 077 127 851 380 P135 WASHER M8011 078 128 851 390 P135 LOCKWASHER M8

012 118 851 212 P455 HSHC SCREW M6X12 AC013 031 119134 143 851 380 P125 WASHER M6014 032 120135 144 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6

015 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC017 830 871 P012 DOOR 3 OEM ( Mod.Mon.Cart )019 861 323 P014 IDLE WHEEL WITH INDEX 1020 851 443 P705 PIN Ø 4 x 8 AC022 860 893 P044 IDLE WHEEL ( Mod.Mon.Cart ) 1 023 830 853 P015 M.C. WHEEL FIXING NUT PLATE 2024 851 350 P555 COUNTER–NUT M12 AC 2026 827 922 P034 SHAFT SUPPORT 2027 827 919 P015 CENTERING RING 1028 827 921 P015 ROTATION SHAFT 2

029 827 920 P015 BRAKE WASHER 1030 851 212 P475 HSHC SCREW M6X20 AC034 851 221 P515 HSFH SCREW M6X40 AC035 851 221 P565 HSFH SCREW M6X70 AC036 851 256 P315 HSHS SCREW M8X40 AC NON GALVANIZED

037 851 350 P135 NUT M8 AC039 851 224 P035 CSFHM SCREW M4X8 AC041 851 221 P065 HSFH SCREW M4X16 AC042 137 851 380 P105 WASHER M4

043 104 110116 131 138 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4044 105 117 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC053 107 851 367 P065 CAGED NUT C4844B

xli. 9 . 53

A

A

58

75

57


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 54

Assembly Name : MONITOR CART ASSEMBLY / Basic version 827 908 G065Range : 1

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 55

056 851 224 P665 CSFHM SCREW M4X15 AC057 851 870 P115 FOOT STOPGAP 1058 850 703 P185 RUBBER SAFETY 4610026 1059 851 350 P145 NUT M10 AC

061 851 400 P275 SKIFFY WASHER 10MM074 121 851 367 P215 CAGED NUT C4806–B075 832 523 P014 LATERAL HANDLE 2097 851 501 P075 RAPID TYE C4402.6.32102 851 214 P235 PHILLIPS SCREW M4X16 AC

103 109 115 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC108 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10 AC111 851 541 P065 STOPGAP Dia 12,7 1113 830 807 P014 STANDARD COVER ( Modular Monitor Cart ) 9 . 63 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 830 873 P014 GRND PLATE ( Mod.Mon.Cart )

125 851 367 P285 CAGED NUT M8 C4808–B126 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8X16 AC129 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT C4844C130 136 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC133 142 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC141 830 761 P013 INTERMEDIATE PLATE ( Mod.Mon.Cart )

A

29

9TR1

9Tb3

43

42 , 45

A

37 36


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 56

Assembly Name : MONITOR CART WIRING 828 804 G055Range : 1

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 57

004 012 038 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC005 013 040 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3 x12014 026 039 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4007 851 212 P465 HSHC SCREW M6X16 AC 008 041 851 383 P315 WASHER 6,4/18X1,5 AC009 017 851 390 P125 LOCKWASHER M6

010 833 040 G015 MDA MEMORY KIT 9 . 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

011 828 950 P045 MONITOR CART LABEL015 851 212 P455 HSHC SCREW M6X12 AC016 851 380 P125 WASHER M6

020 854 026 P135 DIN SUPPORT 35X50021 854 026 P335 WEIDMULLER TERMINAL 16 MM2022 854 026 P345 WEIDMULLER TERMINAL 16 MM2023 854 026 P375 TERMINAL END PLATE024 851 201 P045 HH SCREW M5X10 AC 025 851 380 P105 WASHER M4027 851 350 P115 NUT M5 AC028 818 770 P413 WARNING LABEL ”ELECTRIC DANGER”029 860 920 P024 ISOLATION TRANSFORMER 2030 851 213 P065 HSHC SCREW M8X16 AC

031 851 380 P135 WASHER M8032 851 390 P135 LOCKWASHER M8033 851 367 P275 RAPID CAGED NUT C4808A034 853 152 P075 Green/Yellow LABEL ”UL GRND”

036 831 256 G025 MAINS CABLE (MONITOR) 2

037 853 313 P075 ” BNC–BNC” CABLE L=1,5M (MONITOR)

042 854 414 P045 X–RAY WARNING LIGHT 1043 832 434 P015 WARNING LIGHT SUPPORT 1

045 854 405 P045 BULB 40V 10W 1046 854 414 P055 SOCKET FOR BULB BA15D047 853 575 P045 FERRITE CLIP DIA 10 MM

048 828 756 G035 MONITOR CART INTERFACE 9 . 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MODULE 9

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

5

46

28 or 49 39 38

353637


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 58

Assembly Name : STENO 2 INTERFACE MODULE 9 828 756 G035Range : 2

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU

Valid from serial : AVT : 8063


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 59

002 832 918 P012 INTERFACE PANEL ( Modular Monitor Cart )003 832 944 G015 WELDED SUPPORT004 851 367 P065 CAGED NUT C4844B005 827 932 P015 KEY 1006 832 848 G015 PANEL 9 HARNESS

008 2 172 555 9A1 TRANSPANEL for MDA memory 1( see schematics A3 p.A–38 )

009 851 206 P455 SHC M3X12 AC SCREW010, 014 851 207 P045 SHC M4X10 AC SCREW011 851 207 P065 SHC M4X15 AC SCREW013 851 207 P095 SHC M4X30 AC SCREW

015 851 207 P065 SHC M4X16 AC SCREW016 851 212 P445 SHC M6X10 AC SCREW017 851 249 P055 SHC N* 6–32 UNC AC SCREW018 851 350 P085 M3 AC NUT019 851 350 P105 M4 AC NUT

020 851 355 P105 M4 LT NUT021 851 380 P085 WASHER M3 AC022 851 390 P105 WASHER M4 AC025 851 383 P275 WASHER 32/9X08026 851 383 P295 WASHER 43/12X1A

027 851 390 P085 SCHNORR WASHER VIS M3028 851 390 P105 SCHNORR WASHER VIS M4029 851 390 P125 SCHNORR WASHER VIS M6030 851 400 P275 SKIFFY WASHER 10MM031 853 062 P015 SELF LOCKING COLLAR1

032 853 152 P075 UL GROUND LABEL033 853 219 P225 COND 470K 630V034 853 454 P015 RESISTOR FIXING CLIP–2A 15035 853 455 P015 1E 25W RESISTOR036 853 455 P055 2E2 25W RESISTOR 1

037 854 004 P115 FASTON 12X6 TERRMINAL STRIP 2038 854 273 P225 AUX. RELAY 3NO–3NF 105V 1039 854 273 P645 TIMER 01SEC–3SEC 2040 854 351 P015 FUSE HOLDER041 854 351 P045 FUSE HOLDER 103X349 2

042 854 351 P065 FUSE HOLDER HEAD 1043 854 352 P025 LONG FUSE 1A 1044 854 352 P055 LONG FUSE 5A 1045 854 362 P315 FUSE 500V 1A 10KA 1046 854 365 P045 CIRCUIT BREAKER 30A 250V 1047 853 065 P025 METAL COLLAR DIA 4.8

049 2 172 563 9A1 TRANSPANEL for DR4 / MD10 memories 1( see schematics A3 p.A–38 )

xlii. 9 . 59

3

2

4

5

6


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 60

Assembly Name : X – RAY HAND SWITCH KIT 829 866 G015Range : 1

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 61

002 46–270 800 G5 HAND SWITCH 1

003 46–279 005 P1 HANGER 1

004 46–315 241 P1 COIL CORD 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

005 829 827 P015 X–RAY HAND SWITCH PWB. SUPPORT 2

006 829 785 G015 X–RAY HANDSWITCH PWB. 2A4 2

007 851 215 P415 CS SCREW M3X5 AC

008 851 380 P085 WASHER M3


010 851 350 P055 NUT M2

011 851 200 P465 HH SCREW M4X15 AC

012 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC


014 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC

015 829 867 G025 X–RAY HANDSWITCH CABLE

018 851 202 P295 HH SCREW M12X30 AC

019 829 871 P015 X–RAY HS. PWB SUPPORT TEMPLATE

Panel cover

829 285 P042 (2)

Back wheel cover

830 964 P023 (1)Front wheel cover

830 963 P013 (1)

Column cover

832 414 G015 (2)

Horizontal arm cover

832 457 P011 (2)

Wig–Wag cover kit

826 955 G035 (1)

Column cover ( left + right )

831 227 G515 (2)

831 229 G525 (2) û 6” 831 230 G525 (2) û 9”

Power supply cable drum

830 966 G015

Monitor cart cable

828 955 G615 (1)

832 466 G045 (MDA)(1)832 466 G025 (DR4)(1)832 466 G035 (MD10)(1)

829 562 P042 (1) (without DAP and Laser)

829 562 P052 (1) (with display for DAP)

829 562 P062 (1) (for Laser without display)

Collimator cover

“C Arm” support thermo cover (Left + right )

IR Remote control

2 185 094 (2) (without IC *)2 185 092 (2) (with IC *)2 185 093 (2) (white model

with IC *)

Laser cap

Sealant

2 172 793 (2)

* IC : Ion Chamber


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 62

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 CCD–MDA COVERS ( FRU )

xliii. 9 . 62

Rear cover (all versions)

832 137 P021 (2)

2 Monitors support kit – ( 1 Monitor support kit )

829 334 G025 (N) – ( 832 442 G015 (N) )

Film repro kit (Visiplex) Monitor Cart Cover

830 806 P013 (2)

Sony UP910 Monitor Cart Cover

830 805 P013 (2)

Sony 9500 MDP Monitor Cart Cover

830 804 P013 (2)

Sony UP890 Monitor Cart Cover

833 128 P014 (2)

Standard Cover ( use two parts for Visiplex if this option is not used )

830 807 P014 (2)


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 63

MONITOR CART COVERS ( FRU ).

xliv. 9 . 63

829 971 G025

HARD COPYVIDEO

SCREEN BOUT

SCREEN AOUT

CAMERAIN

R.X. CONTROLDSM

R.X. CONTROLDR

DB 15 Male DB 15 Female BNC BNC BNC BNC

FRONT PANEL

HARD COPYCONTROL

I.R. REMOTEPOWER

REAR PANEL

BNC DB 9 MaleDB 9 Male

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉMD10 Option

DR4 / MD10 DR4 / MD10

A or B

C or D

or

A BC D

Monitors

Only in DR(EMULATION)

853 313 P075

853 313 P065

830 062 G015


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 64

DR4 or MD10 CABLES INTERCONNECTIONS (FRU : 1 ).

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉ

��

RS232 IR receiver cable

833 050 P015

833 012 P015

IR – PC cable

833 065 P015

853 313 P015

861 435 P015RS232 Interface cable

833 055 P015

833 137 P015

833 054 P015

833 053 P015

830 062 G015

853 313 P015

��


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 65

MDA CABLES INTERCONNECTIONS (FRU : 1 ).

Female 14 pos. Male 14 pos.



FRONTview

ÇÇ

ÇÇ

GUIDE SOCKET46 854 037 P845

GUIDE PIN46 854 037 P855

ÇÇ

ÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

FEMALE

MALE46 854 037 P245

46 854 037 P035 14 pos.46 854 037 P055 26pos.46 854 037 P065 34pos.

46 854 037 P235

46 854 037 P335

46 854 037 P345

46 854 037 P355

46 854 037 P135 14 pos.46 854 037 P155 26pos.46 854 037 P165 34pos.

46 854 037 P315

46 854 037 P225

46 854 037 P325

46 854 037 P215

M Serie” PLUGS BACKview


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 66

PIN AMP ”M SERIE”

MALE for wireSection mm2 ø ext. mm Gold Tinned

0,2 à 0,56 1,1 à 1,8 854 037 P615 854 037 P6850,2 à 0,56 2 á 2,5 854 037 P6350,75 á 1,5 2 á 2,5 854 037 P655 854 037 P705

SOCKET ”M SERIE”

FEMALE for wireSection mm2 ø ext. mm Gold Tinned0,2 à 0,56 1,1 à 1,8 854 037 P625 854 037 P6750,2 à 0,56 2 á 2,5 854 037 P645 854 037 P6950,75 á 1,5 2 á 2,5 854 037 P665 854 037 P715

xlv. 9 . 66

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

PLUG 62 POSITIONS

MALE

FEMALE

854 039 P495

829 734 P015

KIT 829 733 G 015

824 024 P016

854 039 P955

KIT 829 732 G 015


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 67


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 68

O.E.M. REFERENCE.

O.E.M. REFERENCE MODEL PART NUMBER

VCR S–VHS SONY625L/220V/CEI

SVO–9500MPD 45 067 461

VCR S–VHS SONY525L/110V/UL

SVO–9500MD 45 067 462

PAPER PRINTER N / B SONYCEI/220V

UP 910–EK4 861 190 P 015

PAPER PRINTER N / B SONYUL/110V

UP 910–U / C 861 190 P 025

PAPER PRINTER SONYCEI/220V

UP 890 CE 861 190 P 035

PAPER PRINTER SONYUL/110V

UP 880 UL 861 190 P 045

REPRO VISIPLEX625L/220V/50/60Hz

CCM 620 A2V 521

45 067 445

REPRO VISIPLEX525L/220V/50/60Hz

CCM 620A2VS 522

45 067 444

MONITEUR DISTAR525L/625L/50/60Hz

FFD–ROT 36 004 047


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 69

Blank page

Assembly Name : EXTERNAL LASER AIMING SPARE PARTSRange :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 70

9–2 LASER

832 343 G015 LASER SUPPORT ASM IMAGER 22CM 2

832 346 G015 LASER SUPPORT ASM IMAGER 16CM 2

861 365 P055 TARGET RETICULE 2

861 365 P025 LASER (external) 2

861 365 P035 LASER SUPPORT 2

Assembly Name : INTEGRATED LASER AIMING SPARE PARTSRange :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 71

005 861 438 P015 LASER DIODE (ASM)

006 861 438 P025 LASER DIODE + CARBON FIBRE ARM ASM 2

007 861 438 P035 ROTATION AND MOTOR BLOCK 2

008 861 438 P045 LASER DIODE CONTROL MODULE 2

009 2 170 728 RED OUTPUT WINDOW 1

Assembly Name : DOSE AREA PRODUCT METERRange :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 72

9–3 DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER

861 370 P025 ION CHAMBER ASM 2

861 370 P055 ELECTRONICS MODULE * 2

861 370 P065 DISPLAY MODULE * 2

861 370 P075 OVERLAY * 2

861 370 P085 SET CABLES AND CONNECTORS 2

861 370 P095 SPACER 2

* : with DR4 and MD10 memories.

861 439 P025 ELECTRONIC MODULE 2

861 439 P035 SINGLE CHANNEL BOARD 2

833 137 P015 DAP–TRANSPANEL CABLE 2

833 054 P015 PC–DAP CABLE 2

861 370 P135 SGNL COAX CABLE 2

861 370 P145 H.T. COAX CABLE 2

861 370 P155 SGNL FLAT CABLE 2

861 370 P165 P.S. FLAT CABLE 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 73

Blank page

�

�

�

�


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 74

9–4 IMAGER

IMAGEUR 16/22 FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000

Assembly Name : IMAGEUR 16/22 FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 CCD–MDA

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 75

001 2 123 013 IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO 525–LINE 9 . 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

002 2 123 012 – 2 IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO 625–LINE 9 . 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

003 2 122 357 – 2 IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO 525–LINE 9 . 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

004 2 111 958 IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO 625–LINE 9 . 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

A


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 76

IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO 525–LINE 2 123 013IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO 625–LINE 2 123 012 – 2

Assembly Name : IMAGEUR 16 CCD 525 LINE 2 123 013 IMAGEUR 16 CCD 625 LINE 2 123 012 – 2 Range :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 77

001 2 120 442 II TUBE TH9449 HP H506 1

002 45 312 902 COVER, CENTER, PAINTED 2

003 2 134 681 – 2 CCD COMPACT CAMERA 525–LINE 16 CM EQUIPPED 1


005 58 079 229 POWER SUPPLY, II SYSTEM, STENO/RF TUBE HP 1

006 2 111 966 BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED 9 . 81 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

007 45 312 654 UPPER COVER EQUIPPED 2

– 45 066 738 ANTISCATING GRID 1

008 91 694 905 BLANKING CAP, WHITE, D=10.5 H=4 2

009 45 312 903 COVER PAINTED LOWER 2

010 2 124 242 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 9 . 83 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xlvi. 9 . 77

A

A

3

1

56

2

8

3

7

8

7

4


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 78

IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO 525–LINE 2 122 357 – 2IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO 625–LINE 2 111 958

Assembly Name : IMAGEUR 22 CCD 525 LINE 2 122 357 – 2

IMAGEUR 22 CCD 625 LINE 2 111 958 Range :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 79

001 2 105 607 II TUBE 1

002 58079229 POWER SUPPLY, II SYSTEM, STENO/RF TUBE HP 1

003 2 193 568 COVER, LOWER, EQUIPPED 2

– 45 067 387 ANTISCATING GRID 1

004 2 111 966 BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED 9 . 81 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



007 2 122 713 COVER, UPPER, WITH SEAL 2

008 91633383 BLANKING CAP, WHITE, D=20/15 H=4 2

009 2 112 048 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 9 . 85 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xlvii. 9 . 79

IMAGEUR 16

IMAGEUR 22

1

2119076

C191987

2119077

2119075

A6 J8 J1

2107144

A3 J2 HV

2A1

3A2

4A3

5

W30

W31


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 80

BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED 2111966

Assembly Name : BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, EQUIPPED 2111966Range :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 81

001 2111964 BOARD CAGE, CCD STENO, ASSEMBLY 1

002 36003627 POWER SUPPLY BOARD, CCD (A1) 1

003 2103697–2 VIDEO BOARD, CCD (A2) 1

004 2120439 INTERFACE BOARD, CCD (A3) 1

005 2111967 SET OF CABLES, BOARD CAGE, CCD 1

– 2107144 CABLE W30

– 2119075 CABLE W31

– 2119077 VIDEO CABLE

– C191987 PROTECTIVE CONNECTION

– 2119076 GROUND CABLE

xlviii. 9 . 81


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 82

EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2124242(IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO)

Assembly Name : EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2124242(IMAGEUR 16 CCD STENO) Range :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 83

– 91694905 BLANKING CAP, WHITE, D=10.5 H=4

– 58079540 SLOW–BLOW FUSE, 5X20 2.0A 250V V 100A ULL

– 99052109 SCREW, HEX SKT HD CAP, M3X8/8, PASS SST

– 91455241 WASHER, M3, STL

– 2109925 SCREWDRIVER, MICRO–TECH

– 45559962 BAG OF LANGUAGE STICK–ON LABELS

– 45474344 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, GERMAN PRODUCT

– 45474343 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, ITALIAN PRODUCT

– 45474041 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, SPANISH PRODUCT

– 45474039 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, FRENCH PRODUCT

– 45474346 SPECIFICATION LABEL, GERMAN PRODUCT

– 45474345 SPECIFICATION LABEL, ITALIAN PRODUCT

– 45474040 SPECIFICATION LABEL, SPANISH PRODUCT

– 45474038 SPECIFICATION LABEL, FRENCH PRODUCT

– 45474336 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

– 2106275 EXTENDER BOARD 1

xlix. 9 . 83


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 84

EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2112048(IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO)

Assembly Name : EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 2112048( IMAGEUR 22 CCD STENO ) Range :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 85

– 91633383 BLANKING CAP, WHITE, D=10.5 H=4

– 58079540 SLOW–BLOW FUSE, 5X20 2.0A 250V V 100A ULL

– 99052109 SCREW, HEX SKT HD CAP, M3X8/8, PASS SST

– 91455241 WASHER, M3, STL

– 2109925 SCREWDRIVER, MICRO–TECH

– 45559962 BAG OF LANGUAGE STICK–ON LABELS

– 45474344 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, GERMAN PRODUCT

– 45474343 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, ITALIAN PRODUCT

– 45474041 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, SPANISH PRODUCT

– 45474039 IDENTIFICATION LABEL, FRENCH PRODUCT

– 45474346 SPECIFICATION LABEL, GERMAN PRODUCT

– 45474345 SPECIFICATION LABEL, ITALIAN PRODUCT

– 45474040 SPECIFICATION LABEL, SPANISH PRODUCT

– 45474038 SPECIFICATION LABEL, FRENCH PRODUCT

– 45474336 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

– 2106275 EXTENDER BOARD 1

l. 9 . 85

2

5

Loaded SCSI disk

3 7

6

SCSI Controlerboard + cable

8Infrared receiver

board


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 86

9–5 MEMORIES

MDA MEMORY

Assembly Name : MDA MEMORY 832 983 G015Range : 0

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 87

002 861 420 P015 EQUIPED PC 1

003 861 424 P015 RS 232 BOARD 1

005 861 426 P015 AVIAS BOARD 1

006 861 427 P015 MIDAS BOARD 1

007 861 429 P015 VGA BOARD 1

008 833 049 G015 TOUCH SCREEN FRONT ASM 1833 076 G515 TOUCH SCREEN + ELECTROLUMINESCENT ASM 1

833 074 G515 LOADED IDE DISK 1

833 075 G515 LOADED SCSI DISK (ILLUSTRATED) 1

861 423 P015 SCSI CONTROLER BOARD + CABLE 2

832 466 G045 IR REMOTE CONTROL 9 . 62 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

861 440 P015 INFRARED RECEIVER BOARD 1

Assembly Name : DR4 MEMORYRange :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 88

861 360 P025 BOXED DR4 MOTHER BOARD SERIAL 1

861 360 P035 INFRA RED RECEIVER SERIAL 2

2175577 DR4 / MD10 REMOTE CONTROL CABLE 2

832 466 G025 I.R. REMOTE CONTROL 9 . 62 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

832 455 G015 POWER SUPPLY CABLE 2

2175685 BOXED DR4 MOTHER BOARD PARALLEL 1

2175687 INFRA RED RECEIVER PARALLEL 2

Assembly Name : MD10 MEMORYRange :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 89

861 361 P065 MD10 MEMORY SERIAL 1

861 361 P035 INFRA RED RECEIVER SERIAL 2

2 175 577 DR4 / MD10 REMOTE CONTROL CABLE 2

832 466 G035 I.R. REMOTE CONTROL 9 . 62 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

832 455 G015 POWER SUPPLY CABLE 2

2 175 688 BOXED MD10 MOTHER BOARD PARALLEL 1

2 175 690 INFRA RED RECEIVER KP ( KEYBOARD PARALLEL ) 2

2 169 586 FLAT KEYBOARD MD10 2

Assembly Name : MAGNETEK MONITORRange :

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 90

9–6 MONITORS

2 153 979 TV MONITOR NOT ROT. 1

2 153 980 TV MONITOR ROT. 1


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 91

Blank page

Assembly Name : MDA MEMORY KIT 833 040 G015Range : 2

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 92

9–7 KITS (MONITOR CART)

003 827 681 G015 CEI MAIN CABLED 1

004 833 012 P015 TRANSPANEL–AVIAS CABLE 1

005 853 313 P035 COAX CABLE 75 OHM LG = 2M 2

006 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10QC

007 851 383 P295 WASHER 43/12X1A

008 851 390 P105 SCHNORR WASHER M4

009 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT C4844C

010 833 031 P014 PC CLAMPING RAIL

012 018 853 313 P065 BNC COAX CABLE

013 017 829 736 P015 FLEXIBLE MAGNET

019 851 250 P115 UNC Nb 10 SCREW

020 851 400 P285 SKIFFY WASHER FOR M 12MM SCREW 1

021 833 136 P014 SUPPORT

022 833 135 P014 CONNECTOR SUPPORT

023 851 350 P085 NUT M3 AC

024 851 380 P085 WASHER M3 AC

025 851 383 P275 WASHER 32/9X08

026 851 390 P085 SCHNORR WASHER M3

027 851 206 P435 HSHC SCREW M3X8 AC

029 2 192 808 PC IRON SHEET SUPPORT

li.lii.liii. 9 . 92

Assembly Name : VCR SONY KIT 830 117 G025Range : 0

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 93

002 853 313 P015 ”BNC–BNC” CABLE L=1.5M 1

003 827 681 G015 MAIN VOLTAGE SUPPLY CABLE CEI

004 830 952 G015 MAGNETO SONY REMOTE CONTROL CABLE

005 830 770 G015 WELDED SHELF ( Mod.Mon.Cart )

006 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC

007 851 380 P105 WASHER M4

008 019 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4

010 851 206 P445 SHC SCREW M3X10 AC


012 851 383 P275 WASHER 3,2/9X0,8 AC

013 830 933 P015 SHELF SUPPORT ROD (Modular Monitor Cart)

014 851 374 P085 RIVET TUBTARA M6 SHEET 3–5,5 AC

015 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC

017 830 804 P013 SONY 9500 MDP COVER ( Mod.Mon.Cart ) 9 . 63 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

018 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC

020 851 355 P105 BRASS NUT M4

025 830 883 P013 VCR REMOTE CONTROL BIN (Mod.Mon.Cart)

026 850 750 P335 TAPE *RUBAN TESALIX 4970

Assembly Name : FILM REPRO KIT 830 043 G075Range : 0

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 94

006 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC

007 029 851 380 P105 WASHER M4

008 017 028 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4

016 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC

018 851 355 P105 BRASS NUT M4

021 830 766 P013 MATRIX SHELF

023 830 777 P013 REPRO FILM CASSETTE BIN

024 851 367 P075 CAGED NUT

025 851 221 P065 HSFHM SCREW M4X16 AC

026 830 046 P015 REPRO CASSETTE BIN SKATE

027 851 350 P105 NUT M4 AC

030 851 212 P045 HSHC SCREW M4X10

031 823 993 P015 SPRING BLADE

032 830 806 P013 MATRIX COVER 9 . 63 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assembly Name : PAPER REPRO KIT 830 043 G065Range : 0

Componentnumber

Codenumber

DescriptionFRU


See alsopage


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 95

002 853 313 P015 ” BNC–BNC ” CABLE L=1.5M

003 827 681 G015 MAIN VOLTAGE P.S. CABLE CEI

004 830 062 G015 REPRO REMOTE CONTROL CABLE

005 830 770 G015 WELDED SHELF ( Mod.Mon.Cart )

006 851 212 P055 HSHC SCREW M4X12 AC

007 851 380 P105 WASHER M4

008 017 851 390 P105 LOCKWASHER M4

009 851 206 P445 SHC SCREW M3X10 AC


011 851 383 P275 WASHER 3,2/9X0,8 AC

012 830 933 P015 SHELF SUPPORT ROD (Mod.Mon.Cart )

013 851 374 P085 RIVET TUBTARA M6 SHEET 3–5,5 AC

014 851 350 P125 NUT M6 AC

015 830 805 P013 SONY UP910 COVER (Mod.Mon.Cart ) 9 . 63 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

016 851 383 P295 WASHER 4,3/12X1 AC

018 851 355 P105 BRASS NUT M4

Assembly Name : CCM 620 VISIPLEX

Componentnumber

GEMS-number

DescriptionFRU



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 96

861 227 P055 VISIPLEX CCM620 – 1 HARDCOPY IMAG. 50 HZ




861 227 P095 VISIPLEX CCM620 – 1 & 4 HARDCOPY IMAG. 50 HZ

861 227 P105 VISIPLEX CCM620 – 1 & 4 HARDCOPY IMAG. 60 HZ

Assembly Name : VISIPLEX SPARE LISTRange : 0

Componentnumber

GEMS-number

Description Visiplexreference

FRU



REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 97

861 372 P015 HIGH VOLTAGE Board 22–20–3799–01861 372 P025 REGULATOR Board 22–29–10118–01 1861 372 P035 RECTIFIER BOARD 22–29–10125 1

861 372 P045 COMPUTER INTERCONNECT Bd 22–29–11383 2861 372 P055 COMPUTER INTERCONNECT (SPS) 22–29–11686 2861 372 P065 MAIN Board (SPS) 22–29–11680 2861 372 P075 MAIN Board SINGLE FORMAT 22–29–9791–01 2861 372 P085 MAIN Board 1+4 ,OLD MOTOR 22–29–9791–03 2861 372 P095 MAIN Board 1+4 ,NEW MOTOR 22–29–9791–05 2

861 372 P105 HV POWER SUPPLY 34–29–10271 1861 372 P115 HV POWER SUPPLY (SPS) 15–01–11654 1861 372 P125 TOROIDAL TRANSFORMER 34–29–10781 2861 372 P135 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 34–29–10978 2861 372 P145 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY(SPS) 15–01–059 1

861 372 P155 POWER CORD–220V 01–04–017 2861 372 P165 POWER CORD–120V 01–04–018 2861 372 P175 POWER SWITCH 08–04–061 2861 372 P185 SHUTTER SOLENOID RIGH HAND 10–04–001861 372 P195 SHUTTER SOLENOID LEFT HAND 10–04–003 2861 372 P205 KEY BOARD INTERCONNECT ASSBLY 32–29–11212 2

861 372 P215 DARK SLIDE SENSOR ASSBLY 32–29–11326 1861 372 P225 CRT ASSBLY 32–29–10153–07 2861 372 P235 BEEPER ASSBLY 34–29–10782 2

861 372 P245 MOTOR 34–29–10788 2861 372 P255 MOTOR SUPPORT ASSBLY 34–29–11346 2

861 372 P265 FRONT PANEL MEMBRANE SWITCH 34–29–11426 2

861 372 P275 HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION BOARD (LLR) 22–12–0840–5861 372 P285 OUTPUT BOARD 22–12–1531–1 1861 372 P295 VERTICAL DEFLECTION BOARD 22–15–11006–2 1861 372 P305 VIDEO AMPLIFIER 22–15–3636–1 1861 372 P315 VIDEO AMPLIFIER 22–15–4047 1861 372 P325 CRT BOARD (LLR) 22–15–4406–1 1861 372 P335 LINE SMOOTHING BOARD (LLR) 22–15–7433–1 2861 372 P345 MONITOR MOTHER BOARD 22–29–11314 2


REV 2 sm 826 921 P615

9 . 98

Blank page

A–

A–i

�,$%&)"� ��

��$!# � � � � �� '�$(&�$!# &+� ��

��$!# � ��%� ��%� ��% 76=-8 9;773? ��

��$!# �� %��)"%$ � � &+� ��

�% *#! �65<-8:-8 ��% *#! � ' !)? 0-), � �� 1<1,-8

�8-9-5+- 9).-:? � �-336=9 � #0-84)3 9).-:? ��

�� &+� ��

�� %�% 8-/;3):165 ��

�� &+� ��

�� "�! �65:863 ��

�� &+� ��

�� -:-+:165 � !�� 91/5)3 ��

�� &+� ��

�� 3;686 :14-8 ,1973)? � �� 0?9:-8-919 ��

� � �� &+� ��

� ��$�!� 2% 9-3-+:165 � !�� 2% 9-3-+:165 ��

� � �� &+� ��

� �6,- 67-8):165 9-3-+:165 ��

�� &+� ��

�� $�!� ��# $��#( 9-3-+:165

��$�!�4� 8-.-8-5+- /-5-8):165

4�9 8-.-8-5+- /-5-8):165 ��

�� &+� ��

�� 13)4-5:9 0-):15/ 8-.-8-5+- /-5-8):165 ��

4�9 15:-/8):68

�� &+� ��

�� 13)4-5:9 0-):15/ 9-8<6 ��

�13)4-5:9 0-):15/ 9;773?

�� &+� ��

�� 2%� 8-.-8-5+- /-5-8):165 ��

�� 2% ,1973)?

4�4�9 ,1973)?

� � �� &+� ��

�� >769;8- ��

�� 415;:-9 �3;686 :14-8

� &+� ��

� �63314):68 +65:863 � �63314):68 36/1+ ��

�� 63314):68

� &+� ��

� �4)/-8 +65:863 � �3)79-, :14- +6;5:-8 ��

�� "=1:+015/ ��

�� &+� ��

�� 84 $��&�46:6819):165

�% *#! ��% *#! ��% *#! � ��

�� &+� ��

�� "=--7 15<-89165 ��651:68 +613 86:):165 ��

��$!# �)8, 8)+2 � ��$!# � �5:-8.)+- ��

�� &+� ��

��-4681-9 �5:-8.)+- ��

Schematics

Edition June 1997

TABLE OF CONTENTS

��

�4)/-8 �� "#�� 3 ��19 �)*3-9� ��

�4)/-8 �� "#�� 3 ��19 �)*3-9� ��

�5:-8.)+- �� 7=* ��

�5:-8.)+- �� 68 � �@ ��

�� 6=-8 ";773? 7=* ��

�� 6=-8 ";773? ��

�� 5:-8.)+- 7=* ��

�� 5:-8.)+- � � � ��

�� 5:-8.)+- � � � ��

�� 5:-8.)+- � � ��

%1,-6 �� 7=* ��

%1,-6 ��

%1,-6 ��

%1,-6 ��

%1,-6 ��

%1,-6 ��

%1,-6 ��

%1,-6 ��

�� ":-569+67 �5:-8+655-+: 7=* ��

�� ":-569+67 �5:-8+655-+: � ��

�� ":-569+67 �5:-8+655-+: � ��

��

�-.3-+:165 7=* ��

�-.3-+:165 � ��

�-.3-+:165 � ��

%1,-6 7=* ��

%1,-6 ��

�� #� �6=-8 9;773? 7=* ��

��#� �6=-8 9;773? ��

�� #� �6=-8 9;773? 7=* ��

��#� �6=-8 9;773? ��

A–ii

Blank page

A–1

HOLD KV

Counter

Counter

SC

SC

G48G31

G138G125

4516

4516

Magnitude comparator

BCD to Decimal Decoder

BCD to 7 Segments Decoder

G138G172

G22

7447

4028

DAC

G68G20G21

G18G19

4585

4585

Lim. 110

Lim. 40

DAC

G94

DAC

G133

SCSC

EPROM

EPROM

EPROM

EPROM

EPROM

mA(S) UP

Clock

EPROM

FC 110

FC 40

G108G126

4585

G90

ADC

Digital / AnalogicConversion


2 x 4 Bit latch

2 x 4 Bit latch

Logic BP

A

B

A > B

A < B

KV

Clock

UP / Down

G66

G120

G121

G137G136

G132G119

G134G135

G118

G87G88

G65

G89G90

4516

4516

4585

4508 4508

7447

FC0

FC1FCGR

FC1FC0 FCGR

ER HLC TH

ER HLC TH

5R500W

F KV/mA

mA / mAs

Bin. Dec.

Cons. mAs

Counter


mA(S) UP

A= BLogic BPmA–mAs

3A9 CONSIGNE KV / mA

Analogic / Digital Conversion

Reference voltage KV / 20

Reference voltage

Reference voltage

Reference voltage mAs

BCD to 7 Segments Decoder

Counter mA – mAs

2 x 4 Bit latch2 x 4 Bit latch

U

D

C

2A1MODULE G

2A1MODULE G

KV

mA – mAs

3A12KV / mA

3A19SCR

CONTROL

3A26FilamentsHeating

5A1HeatingPower

Converter

2A1MODULE G

3A7 AD / KV

AB

MODULE 4

ÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇ

IMAGE INTENSIFIERTV CAMERA

Hysteresis ABC

MemorySystem

TV MONITOR

REPROGRAPH

mA

mA

KV

+

–

+–

mA

mA

G694508

G974508

MODULE 6

X Ray Head

3A19 Minuterie(Option)

BUS KV/20 Code C0 – C7

MODULE 5

Alimentation

Power supply

MODULE 9

Interface

5TR1 9TR1

Mains

MODULE 8IMAGER

mA

mAMeasure

Measure

Stop mAs Sec. GRG67

Dis. KV

Digital / AnalogicConversion

SYNOPTIC

9A1Transpanel

D.A.P.Electronic Module MODULE 7

COLLIMATOR

IonChamber

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

MDA

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Monitor cart

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Iris

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A2TP3 250mV Flat field

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A2TP2 100mV flat field video preamp

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A2TP7 = 2.1vdc

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

-2.1vdc

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Pin 6 =ov when satified

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

6

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

KV manual

edward r rogala

mA manual

edward r rogala

Fluoro

edward r rogala

Maintains kvp in pulsed fluoro so it doesn't start each pulse at 40 kvp demand

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Dem x

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

120KV

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Trou Clk

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Main Scr

edward r rogala

Int4Clk

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Rad

edward r rogala

1v =20kvp

edward r rogala

Selected

edward r rogala

Selected not actual

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Main Scr

edward r rogala

capa prepo

edward r rogala

Select capa aux

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

fixed grid

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

ratemeter

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

2mm copper = 3/32"

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

110 kv Limit

edward r rogala

40 kv Limit

edward r rogala

Kv Demand

edward r rogala

mA Demand

edward r rogala

Foot switch, exp switch, and interlocks half way test points

edward r rogala

+ pulse for Rad - pulse for Fluoro

edward r rogala

Stop mAs terminates exposure when actual mAs = selected mAs

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A–2

9TR1

9Tb3

PL1

F2

F4 F3

MALE FEMELLE – FEMALEMODULE 91

MODULE 5

ÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉ

o

o

LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

1PS1

C1

D.A.P.Interface

9PL1

LV SUPPLY

See configuration page A–38

9Tb19K1

9R1 – 2E2

9R2 – 1E

A–3

240V

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

228V 200V 120V 108V 100V

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

220V 208V

�

�

�

��

��

�

� �

��

��

�

� �

��

��

�

� �

��

��

+

R29

15K4R28100E

R30

1K5C32470MF

D25

K26

9A1 TRANSPANEL

K27 D24

PL4

5

2

PL11

1

2

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

9TR1

��

��

��

9Tb1.5

�

�

�

�

9Tb1.6

9Tb1.

4

3

2

9

1011

81

K1

��

9E3

��!

��

��

��

�

9K1

��

��

�

�

��

�

9R21E 25W

9R12E2 25W

�

�

�

�

�

9Tb39Sm1

�

2

3

1

K1

��

See chapter 3,§ 3.2.1.1

MAINS228V

26

27

484950

61

555453

605958

33

32

LOAD1

LOAD2

AUX. COIL

LINE1

LINE2

1E82425

26

40

39

4E102021

22

4Tb1.

17

1819

4Tb1.623

A

B +12V

3A3.

a36

3PL5

MODULE 3

cbd

a a

d

7 8

5F23A

��

5E20

5TR12

1

7

6

19

20

21

23

16

17

22

CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTSFILAMENTS HEATING

5E20

Tb2.

Tb3.

2

2

1

1

1A1 MOTEURARCEAU

MODULE 5

DALLE 1LOW VOLTAGE PS

5Tb1.

3

5

7

4

2

1

1A1.PL1.1

1–4

1–2

��

011B

122A

090D

121/130

122C

007B

119D

MODULE 4 – CONVERTER

4CR7

002B

��

��

3 C

3 B

L

J

3PL3

M

K

3A3. a1b1

3A5

a1b1

3A7 a1b1

3A9

a1b1

3A12

a1 3A19a1

3A26

a1

3PL5.B3PL3.X

3A1.a3 3A7.b35 3PL1.B004C

031B

121B

201B

016D

3A5

a3b3

114F

201B3PL1.F

3A1.a35

3A3. a3b3

3A7

a3b3

3A9

a3b3

3A12

a3

3A19

a3

3A26

a3

3A5

a4b4

3A1.a13

3A3. a4b4

3A7

a4b4

3A9

a4b4

3A12

a4

3A19

a4

3A26

a4

3A5

a2b2

3A3.

a2

3A7

a2b2

3A9

a2b2

3A12

a2

3A19

a2

3A26

a2

+12 V

0 V

–12 V

+5 V

1E5

CARD RACK GROUND

MODULE 3 – CARDS RACK

9PL1

220V120V

Gnd

+ 12V

A

B

C

D

��

1

2

7

15

16

5

1–2

E2

SENSE

SENSE

10

9E2

1E2

E2

8

13

+ 12V

+ 12,1V

SENSE +

SENSE –

0V

1E2

E2

1A1.Tb3

122C

0V

+ 24V

OUT 212,1V/2A

OUT 15,05V/10A

OUT 312V/1A

OUT 424V/2A

X 902

X 901

3

5

11E1

4Tb1.5

0V

0V

0V

+ 5,05V+ 5,05V

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

10

2–2

1E1

12

11

9PL1–24

3

��

��

36

5Tb1.324

299Tb1.12

9Tb1.7

��

��

37

12

7

��

��

DR4DR7

1–5

1–1

3–11

2

ALIM. 90W861371P015

007B

004C

��

��

��

��

5

2

PL441

Rev. Date Serial N o Avt. Mod.

Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000C.C.D. – M.D.A.

A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

W

3PL1.S0 V

3PL1.M017A

3PL1.H 017A

456

1A1.PL1.2

122A

��

MAINS AND LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIESMODULE 9 – INTERFACE

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

541A

541A

102D

140

150

210

150

��

��

��

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

9R1,9R2 surge resistors

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Time delay

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

remove jumper for "demo mode"

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Opens after time delay. If cable plug 9PL1 is disconnected it closes and trips breaker by energizing K26

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Carm plug or jumper plug for monitor stand alone

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Keeps k26 from energizing until time delay is reached and K1 opens

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Emergency off buttons on console

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Monitor and accesories

edward r rogala

to inverter

edward r rogala

230 v

edward r rogala

trip coil

A–4

Tb1

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E7 E10 E11 E13

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

PL5

PL6

A

AA

A

A

A

MODULE 3

MODULE 4

MODULE 5

MODULE 1

ALIM.B.T.

L.V. P. SUP

1R3

1R2

1R1

1R4

1C1

ÇÇÇÇÇ


R5

C3

R6

R8 R9

R10

R11

C4

R5 R6

R7

R8

C3 C4

PANELS 1 – 3 – 4 – 5

edward r rogala

.

A–5

3 4

G166.B

E5

005B

PL11

2

16

15

7

6

11

10

SELECT. CAPAAUX.

CAPA PREPO

MAIN SCR

MAIN SCR

R43K65

R5100E0

R73K65

R83K65

R103K65

C6100K

W33

C34 1K

C9

130–450pF

C27 2K2

R17

10K

R12100K

C112200pF

R15100K

R18

10K

R14200K

R13200K

C16

130–450pF

C28 2K2

C35 1K

C192200pF

2x100M

2x100M

2500pF

2500pF

2500pF

2500pF

CR4

CR3

CR2

CR1

CR7SKT12F10DS

R10 R1122E 22E

4R34E750W

4CR5

4CR2

4C3

4C2

4C4

4C1

4CR3

4CR4

4R4

2MF

5MF

2MF

5MF

470K

1R3

4K750W

4R2237K

4DS1

4C54000MF

+4C6220K 4CR7

+

–

~

~

1

2

1 2

005A4E10

4Tb1–8

4A2PL2

56

PL11

2

4A1

PL2

8

64

2

97

5

31

H

FD

B

GEC

AL

6PL1

6PL1

PL1 PL2 PL1P

R

S

N

M

3

2

4

1

6

7

8

5

9

3

4

8

7

8

9

10

10

7

6

4

6

9 2 2

10 1 5

5 1

3

E3

E1

E4

E6 E2

VAIN

VAOUT

Tb242

1

1 K

2 J

3 X30S6

1.8

0.5

HD281

3PL1–S 3PL3–W

a22

3PL1 3A19A

B

V

6Sa1

3A9.b7

a12a11

6SaTh2

3

2

11

TH

3A26.a1 a23a22 b18b17 a22a21

a19a20a32

a28a29R506100K

R507

47K

R509

2K2

R504

470EC50810K

b15 b16 3A7.a16

TH

+ 12 V

+ 12 V

008C

008B

054F

031F12 V CI

3A3 3A5 3A7 3A9

3A19 3A26

3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2

C50510K832 502 G015

SECURITE PRESENCE CIPB PRESENT SAFETY

071A

C

a16

3PL33A19

4Tb11 2

a17

B

mesure kv

021D

mesure mA SC

mesuremA Gr

021E

021F

VA

VC

3/5

VCOUT

OUTIN

4

MODULE 4ONDULEUR – CONVERTER

MODULE 6CUVE RX – X RAY HEAD

3A19COMMANDE SCR

5A1PUISSANCECHAUFFAGE

3A12

6A1 CI DIVISEUR

MODULE 8IMAGEUR IMAGER

SEC. BELLOWS 031C

4C7220K

035B–E

081–090

1R4

1R2

1R13 x0E6850W

4 x470E7W

2 x 22K

1C1 0MF47

4 x470E7W

2 x 22K

4CR1

4CR6

C365N

C365N

4A2PL2

4A2

1

2

4A1PL1

5

6

4A1

7

6

2

1

E1

L3

L1

4TR1

4TR2

5Tb2–1

FA

AA

AC

FC

VCIN

kV/mA

4

5

1E4

A

B

C

D

��

036B



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

3PL1

7A2 LASER

CONTROL

Y 1

H 2

M

LASER P.B. 3PL3

+12V

PL3PL1

2A4

X

X RAYHand Switch

+12V

0V

007B 007C

008B

031B

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Stepped down inverter current for scr safety

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

275v

edward r rogala

380v

edward r rogala

dicharges 4C3 and 4C4

edward r rogala

Adds 4C4 for Rad

edward r rogala

4CR1

edward r rogala

4CR6

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

voltage doubler caps

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Insert mA meter here

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Inhibits exposure

edward r rogala

Thermal switch >50 degrees C.

edward r rogala

Bellows switch >70degrees C.

edward r rogala

Lights warning light and disables High Dose Fluoro

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

All boards plugged in before HV inverter can fire (exception 3A1 digital interface) Enable for main scr

edward r rogala

Caution measure voltage before servicing

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A–6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4011 VCC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

401061 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

Q12

VCC

GND

4040

Q6 Q5 Q7 Q4 Q3 Q2

Q11 Q10 Q8 Q9 Reset Clock Q1

12 Bit Binary counter

3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025

A–7

+12V

–12V

C17710MF

C17910MF

C176100K

C178100K

C56100K

C57100K

C130100K

C129100K

C204100K

C205100K

+12V

–12V

A314

2

3

6

A192

2

3

6A152.C

9

10

8

A313

2

3

6

A312

2

3

6

A315

2

3

6

A180

2

3

6

A203

2

3

6A152.D

13

12

14

A152.A

2

3

1

A132

2

3

6A138

2

3

6

A102

2

3

6 6

7

5

8

1312

G34.F

A97

2

3

6

3

2

4

1

G33.A

2

1

3

G33.B6

5

4C7710MF8

7

2

6

4

5

3

Q79555

1

9 8

G34.D

5 6

G32.C

+12V

16

11

6

G314040

8

10

Q3

B

C

5 6

G30.C

G33.C

8

9

10 3 4

G32.B

+12V

1 2G30.A

11 10

G32.E

13 12

G32.F

+12V+12V

A46

2

3

6

+12V A55

2

3

6

+12V

1 2

G32.A

G33.D12

13

11

A152.B

6

5

7

3 4

G30.B

A114.C

9

10

8

A114.B

6

5

7

A114.A

2

3

1

A122

2

3

6

A114.D

13

12

14

A160

2

3

6

12

G34.A

9 8

G32.D

C1310K

R10100K

R11

2K2

R12

2K2

C810K

R5220K

R6

10K

R7

2K2

R9220K

R141220K

R140

4K7

D139

C303100pF

R189

46K4

R302

953K0

C301100pF

R186

46K4

R185

953K0

R3051M

R304

121K0

R184

121K0

R3001M

LF356

LF356

R31623K7

R31811K0

R31911K0

R31723K7

R197

95K3

R96

95K3

R202

95K3

R201

95K3

R210

95K3

R209

95K3

R215

95K3

R214

95K3

R200187K0

R213187K0

C199100K

C198100K

C2114K7

C2124K7

D207 D206

D194 D193

R208

187K0

R195

187K0

R321

1M

LF356

LM324

LF356

LM324

C323

1K

D325 D507

D324

R320

1M

C322

1K R170

4K7

R508

1K

LF356

LF356

LF356

R306

10K

R307

10K

R310

10K0

R308

10K0

R309

10K0

R2162K

R31110K

R2324M7

R1314K87

R18110K

R133

6K8

R4133K

R40

4K7

C42

10K D43

R61

1M

R581K87

R5942K2

R15220K

R60

100KR62

4K7

R64

4K7

D65

D49

D48

R47

33K

R50

2K2

R445K62

R4540K2

R636K8

LF356

LF356R1410K

R52100K

R5147K

C54

470K

D53

R135

1K

R136

2K2

R104

15K4

R101

301K

R100

30K1

R98

31K6

R105301K

LF356

LF356

R103

15K4

R110

10K0

D134

D83

D99

D88R87

2K2

R80

220E

R84

2K2

D224R86

100K

R7610E

R8112K1

C821K

C7810K

R9371K5

R113

11K0

R111121K

R11220K5

R1716K8

R17310K

R172

2K2

D174

R153

10K0R151

10K0

LM324

R156

5K36

R15730K1

R158

10K0

R161

15K

R163

2K2

R155

100K

R124

100K

R120

10KR121

10K

R115

10K0R123

100KR126

4K7

R128

2K2

R16247K

R1276K8

R118100K

R11795K3

R116

10K0LM324

D119D125

D159 D164

R96

2K2

R91

22K

R8971K5

C95

1K

R500

10K

R33K3

D45082H

C501100K

C500100K

–12V

+12V

–12V

+12V+12V

+12V

+12V

+12V–12V

+12V

+12V

R1610K

56

G34.C

34

G34.B

a35

018D

3A19.a34

Mesure mA Gr

All unmarked diodes are 1N6263

3A12 CI kV / mA – 2829 825 G025

15

36

47

610

108

94

83

79

Mesure mA Sc

018D

Mesure kV

Va

Vc

Gnd

E7

E8

a113A19.a29

a63A19.a5

a123A19.b5

a4

a3

a1

a143A19.a18

E6

CLOCK

PRI

OX

CONSIGNE kV/20

SEXP

0V

CONSIGNE kV/20

E5

E4

018B

031E

040B

031A

098A

035B

028E025D

103Ba13 3A3.b12

PRX

116C

a5 3A19.a25

031D

a9 3A19.a26INT 4 CLQ

031C

a18

3A19.a19DEM X

031D

a15RX REQ

a16 A26.a24kV 85 o/o

081D

a27 3A19.a28120 kV

031C

a8

a10

3A19.a23

081E

3A26.a32Mesure mA Gr

081C

a7

(Mesure mA Gr)

Mesure mA Sc

TROU CLQ

CONSIGNE kV/20

kV COMPOSITE

CONSIGNE kV/20

kV COMPOSITE

023B

024D

022B

027E

LM324

LM324

LF356

LM324

PL16A1PL2

Card rack

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

E1

C85

1K

Q92.A

E2

Q92.B

C1374K7

LF356



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Presence of xray

edward r rogala

Tube arc interupts exposure up to four times

edward r rogala

Goes low on forth tube arc to terminate exposure for good

edward r rogala

Pulse stream to fire inverters

edward r rogala

1v =1mA

edward r rogala

1v = 10mA

edward r rogala

exceeded max kv of 110 (kvp reached 120kvp)

edward r rogala

Rad mA

edward r rogala

Fluoro mA

edward r rogala

Real time kv feedback

edward r rogala

1v =1kv

edward r rogala

1v = 1kv

edward r rogala

1v = 20kv

edward r rogala

Tube arc counter

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

kv drops below 30 kv = tube arc

edward r rogala

start exposure

edward r rogala

kv command 1v =20kv

edward r rogala

Presence of current in inverter

edward r rogala

Order xray starts in steno goes to digital and back to here

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

8 KHZ

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

anode

edward r rogala

cathode

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Actual Kvp

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Desired Kvp

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A–8


PL1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4012

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4023

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4093

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516Vcc

GND

C R/C CD +TR –TR Q Q


4538

Dual MONOSTABLE

T =RX X CX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

VccQ Q C R D S

Q Q C R D S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4013

Dual D Flip Flop

1

0

Q

1

0X X 0 1 1

CL D R S Q Q

X X 1

00

0

0

1 : High level

1

X 0

0

0

0

0

1

Q

0

0 : Low level X : Don’t care

1X X 1 1 1

A–9

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

��

��

C29922KR296

220E

R295220E

R294

10ED2921N5061

D293C297

220K

C28710K

R288100E

R28615E4

D2901N5061

D289

R2791K5

R280

220E

R2833K3

R284

4K7

R28510K

TR291IT235

E282

4CR1

��

��

��

C27722K

R274220E

R273220E

R272

10ED2701N5061

D271BZX83C3V3

C275220K

C26510K

R266100E

R26415E4

D2681N5061

D267

R2571K5

R258

220E

R262

4K7

R26310K

TR269IT235

E260

��

��

��

C32122K

R318220E

R317220E

R316

D3141N5061

D315BZX83C3V3

C319220K

C30910K

R310100E

R30815E4

D3121N5061

D311

R3011K5

R302

220E

R3053K3

R306

4K7

R30710K

TR313IT235

E304

��

��

��

C25522K

R252220E

R251

10ED2491N5061

D250BZX83C3V3

C253220K

C24410K

R245100E

R24315E4

D2471N5061

D246BZX85C12

R2361K5R237

220E

R2403K3

R241

4K7R175

6K8TR248

IT235

4CR6

4CR4

4CR7

R106

1K

R105

10K

C108100pF

D107

G122.A2

1

3

G122.D13

12

11

9 8

G161.D

11 10G161.E

G122.B5

6

4 5 6

G161.C

R242

1K

E239

– 12 V

R1876K8

R188

1K5

R261

4K7

C198

10K

C176

22K

C153

100K

R154100K

D186

G112.C9

8

10

G114.D13

12

11

D31

G114.C8

9

10

5 6

G113.C

R159330K

G118.B5

6

4

R7047K

G119.C13

12

11

10

5 6

G115.C

G114.A2

1

3

G117.B

9

1112

1310

3 4

G115.BC86

10K

3 4

G113.B

G112.D

12

13

11

1 2

G113.AG118.A1

2

3

C60

10K

C222K2

G112.B6

5

4

G118.C8

9

10

G112.A1

2

3

G116.A1

2

8

9

13 12

G113.F

G117.A

2

45

13

� ��

��

R12710E

R218

619E0

R219

R221

3K65R163

G114.B5

6

4 9 8

G113.DR140

13 12

G161.F

G120.B

G119.B3

4

5

6

11 10

G115.EG118.D13

12

11

G120.C8

9

R33

R32G120.A

1

2

3

R92

R41G119.A

2

1

8

9G120.D

12

13

11

R53

G122.C8

9

10

� ��

��

A204

2

3

6

12

G161.A

98

G216.D1110

G216.E

� ��

��

11 10

G113.E

1 2

G216.A

� ��

��

C21110K

R215

470E

C1041K

R52

330E R68

47E

R72

47EC674K7

C19610MF

C19310MF

C209100K

R45

2K2

R98

4K7

R201

2M2

R207

220E

R205

22K R208

4K7

R446K8

D97

R19910K0

R20021K5

LF356

R20646K4

3K3

100K

10K

100K

R184

10K

2K2

D54R110

1K

R11110K

C109

2K2

+12V

+12V

+12V+12V

+12V

+12V

+12V +12V

a32

a21

a34

a36

a35

a27

a25

a19

a28

a26

a23

a22

a9

a20

a12

a7

a6

a5

a30

a13

D8

R6310K

C14100K

C66

C6

D10 D9

R80100K

R16

47K

R15

2K2

+12V

S76.B

R6510K 100K

R77100K

R11

47K

R69

2K2

+12V

S76.C

R6410K 100K

R78100K

R7

47K

R5

2K2

+12V

S76.D

R621K

R21

22K

R24

47K

R4

1K

R61

2K2

R56

220E

R58

2K2

R25100K

R3220K

R5510K

+12V

+12V

C7410K

R79

1K

S76.A1

8C5910K

R35

4K7

R3410K

R88

2K2

D87

C8910K

R37

4K7

R36100K

R90

2K2

C9310K

R40

4K7

R39100K

R91

2K2

C9410K

R43

4K7

R42100K

R96

2K2

C9910K

R47

2K2

R46100K

R100

2K2

R101

220K

R95

220K

R38

220K

+12V

+12V

10K

C12610MF

C16210K

C12910K

D220470K

2K058

7

2

6

4

5

3

3

14

5

4 6 7

2

1

D

R S

QC

Q

+12V

R194

220K

R195

47E

R217

4K7C19710MF

R51 R102

10KC10310K

R50220K

R190

4K7

R1812K26

R1774K7

R179

1K

R19210K

R1834K7

D182

D191

BZX83C6V2

D180

D139

BZX83C6V2

10K

7

6

10

11

1

2

15

16

D174

SEC BELLOWS

3A19 CI COMMANDE SCR2828 982 G035

3PL3

+12V

PL3PL1

+12V

5Tb1

–1

–8

5E21

X RAYHand switch 2A4

3PL6–L

PL1–A

3A12.a27

3A12.a9

3A26.a21

3A7.a34

021C

016E

085D

030B

030E

007C

007B102C

3A7.b8

066A

3A3.b28

116F

3A1.a17

201C

3A12.a6

021B

3A7.a7

051A

3A1.a15

201E

3A12.a26

106B

STOP mAs

INT 4 CLQ

120 kV

3A12.a18

030DDEM X

3A12.a5

030BTROU CLQ

Clock3A12.a35

018D12 V CI

3A26.a20

f max

BPCL

4’ 57’’

OX

OX

DEM X

032E

032D

Clock

033C

Clock

E166

E164

033C

Clock039B

PRI

TROU CLQ

032D 033D

DEM X

032D

TROU CLQ

SEXP

031D

035A

033EQ1

033EQ1

033C

Clock

SX

032A

031E

Q1

033D Clock 34

G161.B

R13010K

E124

032D

032C Clock031E

+12V

D143R144

220E

R145

220K

R146

2K2

C14710KSX

032F

RAD

038A

RAD

038A

RAD

038A

+12V

+12V

+12V

+12V

038A

RAD

038ARAD

+12V

R48

10K

R49100K

C2131KR214

2K2

R212

4K7

C160

2MF2 21

48

5

36

D158

D156

D157

SYX SC3A26.a28

3A3.b18

3A26.a31

3A12.a14SEXP

PRE

SYX GR

3A3.a17

3A5.b8

081D

021A 116A

041D

PREPOSITIONNEMENTCAPA

SELECTION CAPAAUXILIAIRE

MAIN SCR

MAIN SCR

R27

470E

R71

470E

R84

330E

R17

470E

C2810K

C1910K

C8510K

C1810K

G155.A4538

+TR

–TR

R

QT2T1

Q

SEXP 032D

031D

TROU CLQ

+12V

G128555

038A

RAD

+12V

G155.B4538

T1B

Q

T2BQ

031E

Q1

+12V(A)

–12V(C)

+12V(A)

–12V(C)

+12V(A)

–12V(C)

+12V(A)

–12V(C)

PL1

a15

a10

a18

a11

45

36

27

D57

7

10

6

5

4

W165

G121.A –12V

12

11

135 14

9

D329BZX83C6V2

R331220E

1

2

3

10E

D341BZX83C6V2

R343220E

1

2

3

D335BZX83C6V2

R337220E

1

2

3

Q3202N5064

C328

C327100NF

100NF

C340

C339100NF

100NF

Q3302N5064

BZX83C3V3

Q2982N5064

C328

C333100NF

10034

2

R325220E

13

Q3242N5064

D323BZX83C6V2

C322

C344100NF

100NF

3 4

G216.B

5 6

G216.C

13 12

G216.F

98

11

10

12

13D

R

Q

C Q

G121.B

S

BZX85C12

BZX85C12

BZX85C12

+12V

PEDALE DE SCOPIEFLUORO FOOT SWITCH

X

V

��

012C

012C

116C

081F

A

012C

012C



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Inhibit exposure

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

If closed then fluoro disabled from hand switch when Rad selectecd

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

If closed then Fluoro only No RAd

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Presence of Inverter current to prevent cross firing of scrs

edward r rogala

Pulse stream to regulate inverter firing rate via closed loop kv control

edward r rogala

12 volt daisy chain interlock thru all boards

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

off if mising 12v

edward r rogala

On if missing 12 volts

edward r rogala

Alternately fires main scrs

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

One pulse at exposure start

edward r rogala

Rad filament enable

edward r rogala

Start exposure

edward r rogala

RAD

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Fluoro filament enable goes high at 5 minute fluoro time out

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Fluoro five minute time shut off

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Do not hang scope in this area. It may trigger scr unintentionally

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

OX from digital via 3a1

edward r rogala

Half way test point: flip S76a closed, pull 3A1 and fluoro. you should be able to make xray but will not get any monitor video. This seperates mda/generator problems.

edward r rogala

tube spits upto 4

EDWARD R ROGALA

EDWARD R ROGALA

EDWARD R ROGALA

A–10


PL1

A–11

A

B

C

D

1 2

G115.A

13 12

G115.F

A135

2

3

6

G115.DA137

2

3

6

C232

+ 12 V

– 12 V

0 V

C231

C230

C229

C203

C202

R228

R226

C224 C222

C225 C223

100K

100K

100K

100K

10MF

10MF

10MF 100K

10MF 100K

10E

10E

L227

100�H

E234E233

a1

a3

a4

a17

a16

a14

R81

10K

R83

10KR301E2W

D29

– 12 VR141

10K0R142237K0

R148

1M

R149

4K7

LF356

3

1

D82R152

2K26

R1506K8

R12350K

R13110K0

R1322K15

R167

R16810K0

R138

10K0

C136

22pF

R171

4K7

R173

2K2

R1696K8

C1341K

10K0

D133

E125

D170

R26

1K

R20100K

R73

3K3

C7510K

R12

470EC1310K

E172

PRI

PRI

3A26.a36

RAD

RAD

a8

a29

3A12.a32 3A3.a8 3A1.a22

3A12.a11

RAD

032B 032A

3A7.a29GR

C

B

2b

1b4A1

E1

4L1

4L3

4TR1

PL34Tb1

MASSE CARD RACK


3A 19 COMMANDE SCR2828982G035

DETECTION I

4

2

+12V

+12V

+12V

+12V

+12V(A)

–12V(C)

–12V

–12V

+12V

+12V

��

C342100K

C326100K

C332100K

C338100K

D151

9 8

013A

066C

033C032B034B

031D

021C

103D 111D D

081E

3

+12V

–12V

W350

W351

W354

W352

W353



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Current sense from inverter

edward r rogala

R123- refer to Job card rg 203

edward r rogala

A–12

PL2

PL1

B A

3A5 MINUTERIE832 501 G015

B A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4093

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

g f a b c d e

B C LTBI/

RBO RBI D A

VCC

GND

7447

A B C D a b c d e f g0

1

2

34

5

6

7

8

9

L L L L L L L L L L

L L L

L L

L

L

L L L

L L

L L

L

L L L

L L

L L

L L L L L

L L L L LL L L L

L L L L L

L L L L L

L L L L

L L L L L L L

L L L L L

H

H

H HH

H H

H H

H H H

H

H H

H

HHHHH

HH

HHH H H

H H

H H

H H H

H H

L

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

74LS100

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

DP

1

2

3

6

7

14

13

11

10

9

8

MAN 71APIN

1

2

3

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

14

Cathode a

Cathode f

Cathode e

Cathode d

Cathode DP

Cathode c

Cathode g

Cathode b

Commun Anode

Commun Anode

NC

BCD COUNT SEQUENCE

Count OUTPUT

Q0 / 12 Q1 / 9 Q2 / 8 Q3 / 11

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

OUTPUT

Count

CountCount

Count

H

H

H

H

H H H H

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

LL

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

XX

X

X

X

RESET / SET INPUTS

MR 1 / 2 MR 2 / 3 MS 1 / 6 MS 2 / 7 Q0 / 12 Q1 / 9 Q2 / 8 Q3 / 11

MODE SELECTION

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

CPO Q0 Q3 Q1 Q2

CP1 MR1 MR2 MS1 MS2

VCC

GND7490

COUNTER 7490

A–13

A

B

C

D

��

R241R240R239R238R237R243R242

R233R232R231R230R229R235R234

R226R225R224R223R222R228R227

R219R218R217R216R215R221R220

G142.C9

10

8

G142.A1

2

3

G142.D13

12

11

G142.B4

5

6

A73

2

3

6

IH5020CPA

75

3

2 4

1

6 8

A121.B

6

5

7 G141.D12

13

11

A121.C

9

10

8G141.B

5

6

4

G141.A5

6

4

G141.C8

9

10

A121.A

2

3

1A82

2

3

6

A71

2

3

6

��

��1K

680E

�

100E

��

330E

��

47K

��

4MF7

��

100K

��

��

4K7

��

10MF

��

10MF

��

10MF��

100K

��

100K

��

100K

��

100K

��

100K

��

4K7

��

22K

�

20K

– 12V

+ 12V

– 12V

+ 12V

+ 5V

– 12V

+ 12V

+ 5V

0V

��

10K

��

10K

��

15K

��470K

��6K8

�10K

�

4K7

��

2K2

��

100K

��

2K2

��

1M

��

10K

��

100K

– 12V

+ 12V

��10K0

��5K

� 10K0

��

10K��

10K��

1M

��

10K��

10K��

1M

��

1M

��

��

��10K

��10K

��

��

�� 22K

��

100K0

+ 12V

+ 12V

��100K��

4K7

��

2K2��

100K

��

4K7

��

��

��1M

��1K69

��9K09

��

680K

��

1K

��

��

470E ��1K

+ 5V

+ 5V + 5V + 5V

+ 5V

+ 5V+ 5V

+ 5V

+ 5V

+ 5V+ 5V

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

PL1 PL1

��

PRX CP

2A1MODULE G

3A7AD / kV

3A5 MINUTERIE832 501G015

PRESENCE CI

Cde RX

HOLD kV

SEXP

00.01

00.10

01.00

10.00

+ 5V

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

7 x 150E

7 x 150E

��220E

7 x 150E

7 x 150E

PL1 PL2+ 5V

��

��

��

�

��

E214

��kV/20 AUTO

��

�

��

��

��

HOLD kV��

120D

035B

E

017D

111A

045A

131A

131E

051F

051C

106B

051A

058B

051A 101B

2A1MODULE G

824 607 G015

HYSTERESIS ABC�� %! �#�� "��$ �#� ��

– 12V

LF356

LF356

111A

120D

058B

E



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

12 volt interlock

edward r rogala

Pulsed fluoro Selected

edward r rogala

Start exposure

edward r rogala

2.1 vdc at proper brightness (250mV flat field video at monitor

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

With 2.1vdc at CdeRX adjust R65 for 0 volts out at A82 pin 6

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

+.87v

edward r rogala

-.87v

edward r rogala

Goes low when kv is satisfied and pulsed fluoro is selected

edward r rogala

Analog 1v =20 kv

edward r rogala

Abc "deadband" adjusted for 1.75 volts accross R67. mA is a function of kvp (via eproms). This circuit prevents oscillation if on the edge of eprom step.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

High if error >.87 volts

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

high if error more negative than -.87 volts

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

r66 gain

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

sample and hold integrator

edward r rogala

R60 response

edward r rogala

divide by ten

edward r rogala

divide by 6- 60 sec/min

edward r rogala

divide by 10

edward r rogala

50 HZ free running oscillator

edward r rogala

reset total time

edward r rogala

Fluoro time totalizer

A–14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

A3 B3 A > B A B A B AB

INPUTSOUTPUTSCOMPARING CASCADING

A3>B3

A3<B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A2>B2

A2<B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A1>B1

A1<B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A0>B0

A0<B0

A0=B0

A0=B0

A0=B0

X X X X X

X X X X

X X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

VccQ Q C R D S

Q Q C R D S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4013

Dual D Flip Flop

1

0

Q

1

0X X 0 1 1

CL D R S Q Q

X X 1

00

0

0

1 : High level

1

X 0

0

0

0

0

1

Q

0


1X X 1 1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

VCC

GND

CLOCK Q3 P3 P2 Q2 UP /Down

ResetPresetenable Q4 P4 P1

CarryIN Q1 Carry OUT

4516 No Count

Count UP

Count DOWN

Preset

Reset

CL CI U / D PE R ACTION

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

1

1

1 : High level

0

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


Binary UP / DOWN Counter

A–15

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

� ��

G124.C12

13

11

10

G30.A1

2

3

G30.D12

13

11

��

��

G89.A2

1

3

G89.B5

6

4

��

��

+5V

+5V

G124.B3

4

5

6

G107.A1

2

3

G107.B5

6

4

G124.A1

2

8

9

G149.B5

6

4

56

G68.C G107.C8

9

10

G149.D

12

13

11

G107.D12

13

11

G5.A

8

2

1

9

G30.C

8

9

10

G5.B

3

5

4

6

G149.C

8

9

10

G149.A1

2

3

11 10

G68.F

5

6

G56.C

G65.B9

1112

1310

G5.C11

12

13

10

G65.A2

35

14 G30.B5

6

4

+5V+5V+5V

+5V

+5V+5V+5V

+5V

12

G148.A

+5V

+5V

+5V

0V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V +5V

��

1N6263

��

1K

��10K

��22K

��22K

34

G148.B

��

3K01

��8K66

��10K

��10MF

��470pF

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��100K

��100MF

+5V+5V

2K2

��

��

��

470E �1K

��100K

+5V

��

470E �1K

��100K

��

��

��470K

3 4

G56.B

1 2

G56.A

11 10

G6.E13 12

G6.F

9 8

G6.D

��68K

��10K

��470K

��10K

��10K

11 10

G56.E

13 12

G56.F

��

4K7

��

100K

��

10K

��

4K7

��

150E

��1MF

��

�

470pF

�47K

��4K7

��4K7

��

100pF

�220K

10MF

�

��

��

��

��

150E

��10K

��100K

��47K

��

4K7

��

68K

��

4K7

��

2K2 ��10K

��100K

��10MF

��100K

��10MF

��

150E

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

5 x 150E

+12 V+12 V

0V

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��470K

��

22K

��

220E

��4K7

��220K

��470K

��

22K

��

220E

3 4

G68.B

��

100K

�

2K2 1MF

�

1 2

G6.A

3 4

G6.B

5 6

G148.C

��

2K2��100K

��10MF

��

5 6

G6.D

+5V

��100K

��10K

��

2K2

��10K

��

10K

��

150E

+5V

��

4K7

98

G68.D

��

10K

��

1K��6K8

��100K

��

10K

��

1K��6K8

��100K ��

470K

1 2

G68.A

��

470K

��

��

��

��

�

��

PL1 PL1

2A1MODULE G

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

PL1

PL5 PL2��

��

��

PL1

��

2A3 MODULE D 3A5 CI MINUTERIE

AD kV 3A7826 853 G 045

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

+5V

30Hz

1K Hz

CLIGN

TH

AUTO

HOLD kV

OX

AUTO

GR

��

��

��

��

��

FC110

PRESENCE CI

SC

SC

AUTO

kV CO

FC 40

AUTO

SC

SC

kV CO

FC 110

FC 40

FC 110

FC 40

C6

kV C7

C5C4C3C2C1

kV C0

+5V

+5V

300K Hz

kV / 20AUTO

BUS kV/20


031A

045D

116B

071B

057D

057E

1N6263

��

052A

057C017D

063A

056C071B

116A

+5V +5V

+5V +5V1N6263

3Hz

��

��

2A1 MODULE G

017F

E4

106A

SC

056E

052D

054C

��

��

��

��

+5V

+5V

��

��

��

A>B

A<B

053D

071C

091C

091A

116B

��

064A

��

045A

053D 053C

062A

052A

041B

045A

131A

042C

045A

053B

AUTO

054B



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

��

��

��

��

edward r rogala

low = Abc satisfied

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

"on" = manual mode

edward r rogala

desired kvp from abc circuit

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

gnd

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Abc needs more kvp

edward r rogala

Abc needs less kvp

edward r rogala

30hz to drive kv quickly after holding down kv up/down switch fo> 2 seconds

edward r rogala

3 hz to drive kvp slowly for first two seconds kvp up/down switch depressed

edward r rogala

2 hz square wave

edward r rogala

>50 degrees C

edward r rogala

Rad = 5v

edward r rogala

Fluoro = 0v

edward r rogala

ready light on = 5v ok

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A–16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

A–17

A

B

C

D

��

3 4

G137.B

1312

G139.F

9 8

G56.D

��47K

��10K

��220K

11 10

G47.E

13 12

G47.F

��470K

��10K

��220K

3 4

G47.B

1 2

G47.A

9 8

G47.D

5 6

G47.C

98

G47 G8912

13

11

��100K

�470pF Gr

AUTO

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

470E

��

470E

��470pF

��

470E

��

470E

��470pF

��

470E

��

470E

��470pF

��

470E

��

470E

��

150E

�

150E

��

150E

��470pF

��

470E

��

470E

��470pF

��

470E

��

470E

��

150E

��

42K2

��

150E

��

150E

��10K

��

4K7

��

100K

1110

G139.E

98

G139.D

56

G139.C

34

G139.B

12

G139.A

SC

+5V

+5V

��

100K

��10MF

��

1N6263

+5V

��

6K8

��100K

56

G47��

10K

��

6K8 ��

1K ��10K

+12V

5 6

G137.C

9 8

G137.D

11 10

G137.E

13 12

G137.F

1 2

G137.A

��

6K8

��

1K ��10k

+12V

��

6K8

��

1K ��10k

+12V

��

6K8

��

1K ��10K+12V

��

6K8

��

1K ��10k

+12V

��

6K8

��

1K ��10K

+12V

��

1K ��10K

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

OX

032A

BLM

��

116B

071A

ER

SP

FL

BP mA (s)

036A

Gr

UP

BP mA (s)Down

Clock 1

Clock 2

071D

071E

071F

071F

300K Hz

058B

3A7 AD / kV826 853 G045

045A

+5V

76B

053A 052D

��

2A1 MODULE G

PL1PL1

��

D



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

pulsed fluoro

edward r rogala

normal fluoro dose

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

"S" led in maS display

edward r rogala

Hlc = High level fluoro

edward r rogala

Extended radiography = single pulsed fluoro snapshot

edward r rogala

Rad

edward r rogala

1.2 HZ slow change mA/mAS

edward r rogala

12 HZ fast change mA/mAS

A–18

828 980 G0353A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 2

PL1

B A

Voir tableauSee chart


G65

G66

G121Voir tableauSee chart


G120


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

A3 B3 A > B A B A B3

A3<B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A2>B2

A2<B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A1>B1

A1<B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A0>B0

A0<B0

A0=B0

A0=B0

A0=B0

X X X X X

X X X X

X X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


4585

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

VCC

GND


ResetPresetenable Q4 P4 P1


4516 No Count

Count UP

Count DOWN

Preset

Reset


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

1

1

1 : High level

0

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0



VccQ Q C R D S

Q Q C R D S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4013

Dual D Flip Flop

1

0

Q

1

0X X 0 1 1

CL D R S Q Q

X X 1

00

0

0

1 : High level

1

X 0

0

0

0

0

1

Q

0


1X X 1 1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Vcc

9 10 11 12

GND

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 13141516

Q3B D3B Q2B D2B Q1B D1B Q0B D0B Out.disaB

Stro.B

ResetB

Out.disaA

Stro.A

ResetA D0A Q0A D1A Q1A D2A Q2A D3A Q3A

4508

DUAL 4 BIT LATCHTRUTH TABLE

Reset Disa-ble

Strobe D input Q output

1

0

Latched

0

Z

0

0

0

1

X

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

X

X

1

0

X

X

X

1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care

1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care Z : H. Impedance

A–19

��

A

B

C

D

E

F

+ 5V

+ 5V

SC

SC

+ 5V

+ 5V

+ 5V

+ 5V

+ 5V

+ 5V

SC

34

G127.B

G86.C8

9

10

1312

G127.F

5 6

G84.CG125.B5

64

G85.B3

5

4

6

G125.A2

1

3

G125.C8

9

10

G85.C11

12

13

10

1 2

G83.AR103

2K2

R102

220K

D104

5 6G83.G

R110

2K2

R109

100K

D108

+ 5V

SC

+ 5V

+ 5V

R464K7

R592K2

R61100K

C454K7

R444K7

R602K2

R58100K

C434K7

C10710MF

3 4

G83.GG86.D13

12

11

R574K7

C99100pF

13 12

G83.F

11 10

G83.E

+ 5V

D117

R11447K

R11647K

C115470K

C113470pf

R11247K D111

G128.D

12

13

11

G128.C8

9

10

R15222K

C15110K

G128.B

5

6

4

G128.A1

2

3

R15322K

C15010KG139.B

5

3

4

6

G129.B6

5

4

R146220K

G129.D12

13

11

G129.C8

9

10

G139.A8

1

2

9

R53100K R52

2K2

R414K7

C404K7

R394K7

R542K2

R51100K

C3810K

+ 5V

R1492220K

mA(s) UP

mA(s) DOWN

FC01

SCFC0

A167

2

3

6R1654K99

R1664K7

C171100K

G133

+ 5V

+ 5V

+ 5V + 5V

+ 5V

+ 5V

R1644K99

A69

2

3

6

R1954K22

+ 5V

3 4

G84.BG86.B5

64

G139.C13

11

12

10D154

R147100K

+ 5V

C784K7

G129.A1

2

3

+ 5V

D148

R208100K

+ 5V

D210

98

G83.DR207

2K2

+ 5V

a36

b30

a33

a26

3A26

9 8

G127.D

C21110MF

C9710K

R962K2

a11

a35

C169100KC170100K

C91100K

C100100KR79

4K99

R984K7

ER

TH *

HLC

SC

FC GR

AUTO

mA(s) UP

SC

Clock

FC 01FC 0FC GR

To mA / mAs DISPLAYS

To mA / mAs DISPLAYS

R710K

R92K2

R86K8

C610K

R62100K

R162K2

R1568K

C1710K

G123.D13

12

11

1 2

G124.A

13 12

G124.F

RESET

TH *

ER

ER

R47

4K7

R63

2K2

+ 5V

D75

+ 5V

D48

R55100K R42

4K7

R56

2K2

+ 5V

D76

+ 5V

D77

1 2

G127.A

G86.A1

2

3

11 10

G127.E

13 12

G127.C

AUTO

SC

SCb31

b7

b8

b34

a29

a30

a34

a33

+ 12V

mA(s) UP

mA(s) DOWN

mA(s) UP

Clock

SC

G94

C71100K

C1061MF

a25

a27

a18

a7

a17

a6

a9

a13

a20

a19

b7

b24

b27

b28

a23

a24

b23

b24

3A7

C7

C0

C0

C7

C7

b31

a8

a10

a21

a25

a14

a15

TH6saTh2

ER

AUTO

SC

mA(s) UP

mA(s) DOWN

Clock1

Clock2

BUS kV/20

CONSIGNE mA SCOPIE

CONSIGNE mAs

0 logic from 0,16 to 5mAs

G66 G90

G89

G65G87

G1184508

G132

G120

G121

mA / mA s

BIN DEC

CONS. mA s

5R–500W300W LE

F kV mA 2F kV mA LE

+ 12V

A168AD584

1

8

2

3

4

3A9 CONSIGNE kV mA 2 (1)828980G035

066B

R14

100K

075F

TH

078B

078C

072B

078C

072A

AUTO073D

073C

071E 073C

071E 071D074A 074C

074E

051A

051D

C0

093E

066C

66C

072B

074C

SC

075C

072B

072B

075C

066D

066D

072D

072E

071F

074E071E 073C

073B075E093A

072D

072B

073F

072B

AUTO072B

072B SC072B

072C

072D

+ 5V

72BSC

RESET071A

081D

073A

094D

071E

081C

071D

071E

094F

081E

G88

072B

072B

060D



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

G1194508

G1354516

G1344516

edward r rogala

Fluoro mA demand based on kvp selected/currently using

edward r rogala

Selects maS integration scale range

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

FC 01 min fl mA =0.1mA FC 0 min Rad mAS =0.16 FC GR max Rad mAS =160

edward r rogala

Digital desired kvp signal

A–20

828 980 G035 / G0453A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 2

PL1

B A



G65

G66



G120


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

A3 B3 A > B A B A B3

A3<B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A2>B2

A2<B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A1>B1

A1<B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A0>B0

A0<B0

A0=B0

A0=B0

A0=B0

X X X X X

X X X X

X X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


4585

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

VCC

GND


Reset

Presetenable Q4 P4 P1


4516 No Count

Count UP

Count DOWN

Preset

Reset


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

1

1

1 : High level

0

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0



VccQ Q C R D S

Q Q C R D S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4013

Dual D Flip Flop

1

0

Q

1

0X X 0 1 1

CL D R S Q Q

X X 1

00

0

0

1 : High level

1

X 0

0

0

0

0

1

Q

0


1X X 1 1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Vcc

9 10 11 12

GND

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 13141516

Q3B D3B Q2B D2B Q1B D1B Q0B D0B Out.disaB

Stro.B

ResetB

Out.disaA

Stro.A

ResetA D0A Q0A D1A Q1A D2A Q2A D3A Q3A

4508

DUAL 4 BIT LATCHTRUTH TABLE

Reset Disa-ble

Strobe D input Q output

1

0

Latched

0

Z

0

0

0

1

X

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

X

X

1

0

X

X

X

1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care

1 : High level 0 : Low level X : Don’t care Z : H. Impedance

3A9 CI Consigne kV / mA3A9 Consigne kV / mA PCB

Eprom828 980 G035

G65

5R – 500W

828 230 P605

G66F kV / mA2

828 232 P605

G67

G120

G121

G132

Dis. kV

828 229 P305

mA / mAs

828 234 P305

BIN DEC

828 233 P305

Cons. mAs

828 231 P305

PROGAMMATION CI 2A1 PUPITRE MODULE G

Sm59. 1–4 (A) ON ON2–3 (B) OFF OFF

Sm58. 1–4 (A) ON ON2–3 (B) ON ON

Sm60. 1–4 (A) OFF OFF2–3 (B) OFF OFF

Fonction de Sm35Sm35 function

A–21

��

A

B

C

D

E

F

3A9 CONSIGNE kV mA 2 (2)828980G035

1 2

G126.A

3 4

G126.B

5 6

G126.C

13 12

G126.F

��

��

G130.B5

6

4

G130.D13

12

11

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

G123.C9

8

10

G123.A2

1

3

9 8

G124.D+ 5 V

G123.B6

5

4

5 6

G124.C

3 4

G124.B

11 10

G124.E��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

S140.B

S246.A

S140.A

S246.B

��

��

��

��

��

��

98

G126.D G130.A1

2

3

��

��HLC

HLC

OX HLC

OX HLC

+24V

0V (24V)

MODULE 8IMAGER

IRIS

XJ114

b6

b20

b22

b21

��

��

��

��

��

��

+ 5 V+ 5 V

A

S60 S60

1

4

2

3

2

3

1

4

S59

S59

PL3 PL1

b17 a7PL1

Sm35

S58

+ 5 V��

��

2A1MODULE G2

See programming

OX HLC

3A3.a29

��

079C1

2

4

3

2 4

078A

TH*072A

+ 5 V

��

��

TH

ER4 1

077D

072B

HLC 077B

��

H11A51003 2

b35

b33

b32

072A

072A

120F



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

125D

125D

3PL2

R

edward r rogala

Order xray and High level dose selected

edward r rogala

Closed for U.S.A.

edward r rogala

Iris controls dose. Normal and HLC

edward r rogala

In U.S. when 50 degrees C is hit system stays in HLC. In Europe system drops to Normal Dose.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A–22


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4011 VCC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4023

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

A–23

+5V

C5310K

R10

4K7

R52

2K2+5V

C5510K

R12

4K7

R54

2K2

10K

+5V

10K

R14

4K7

R56

C5710K

+5V

10K

R16

4K7

R58

2K2C5910K

+5V

10K

R18

4K7

R60

1

C6110K

+5V

C6310K

R20

4K7

R62

2K2

+12V

C84

R35

4K7

R86

2K2

10K

+12V

C66100K

R27

22E

C67100K

R23

10K

R65

2K2R241K

R11100K

R13100K

R15100K

R17100K

R19100K

R21100K

R102

4K7

��

��

R49

6K81R5019K6

C104220K

+12V

R52982E5

R106

10K

A105

2

3

6

R107

LF356R11353K6

R11448K7

R10990K9

R11561K9

R11671K5

R117100K0

R39

2K15R4033K2

C912K2

47K

R90

100K0 A284

2

3

6

R252

R286

+12V

R41

33KR42100K

C9510K

R94

33K

R37

4K7R38100K

C8910K

R33

4K7

100K

C8510K

R82

2K2

R32

+12V

R47

4K7

100K

C10110K

R100

2K2

R48

R87

46K4R251100K0

C2231MF

R9100K

R36

100K0

R199

2K2 A105

2

3

6

R218

100K0

C219

100K

R221

220K A222

2

3

6

R224

33K

C260

4MF7

R225

100K

R258100K

A257

2

3

6R256

2K2

R253

2K2

R254

10E

A138

2

3

6

C147

4MF7

R140

100K

A134

2

3

6R93

1K

R144

22E

C135

4K7 R151100K

R150

2K2 A105

2

3

6

R111

44K2

C148

4K7

R55K

R245

4K02

R6100K

R246

154K0

C198

4MF7

R139

2K2��

��

R31

22KR8110K

R1422K2

A180

2

3

6R145

33K

R181

2K2

R29510K

R190100K

R241

100K

G186.D

12

13

11

R288

2K2

R291

4K7

A292

2

3

6

R293

47K

R112

44K2

R244

100K

R5271K0

A214

2

3

6

R215

105K

a17

a13

a5

a6

a7

a8

a9

a10

a32

a25

a26

a33

a31

a23

a27

a28

a21

R88

2K2

a36

a24

R305

150K

a19

a20

R6822E

5 6

G185.C

9 8

G185.D

R5119K6

S528–B

Q108.AIH5020CPA

2

43

8

Q108.B

7

56

8

Q110.BIH5012CDE

7

569

Q110.C

10

121116

Q110.D

15

13141

Q110.AIH5012CDE

2

43

S528–A

R24333K

R45K

LF356

100K0

AD741KH

R80100K

Q217.AIH5019CPA

Q217.BIH5019CPA

1

24

3

8

75

6

9 8

G184.D

13 12

G185.F

1 2

G185.A

13 12

G184.F3 4

G185.B

D146

LF356

LF356

11 10

G185.E

D1891N914

LF356

D255

LF356

R34100K

AD741KH

D259

AD741KH

G188.A1

2

8

9

R294100K

R143100K

LF356

G186.B

5

6

4

G186.A1

2

3

Q216.AIH5019CPA

1

24

3

Q287.AIH5019CPA

1

24

3R149

4K7

R2896K8

D290

R242

R3

33K

5K

Q216.BIH5019CPA

Q287.BIH5019CPA

8

75

6

8

75

6

–12V

RP 083C

+12V

085B

2K2

kV 85%

kV 85%

084C

83E

082D

PRE 082D 084C

RAD

RAD

088C

085D087B

082E

086E

088D

RAD082D

CONSIGNE mAs

087B

kV85%

082D

+12V

+12V

–12V

RAD082D

PRECHAUFFAGE SCOPIEFLUORO PREHEATING

PRECHAUFFAGE GRAPHIERAD PREHEATING

FILAMENT HEATINGREFERENCE VOLTAGE

CONSIGNE CHAUFFAGEFILAMENTS

031C

3A19.a23STOP mAs

kV 85%

PRE

082D

087E

082D

CONSIGNE mAs

081D

028C

3A12.a16

035A

3A19.a10

040A

3A19.a8

3A12.a8

075A

3A9.a35

035A

3A19.a15

075E

3A9.a36

075E

3A9.b30

075C

3A9.a11

030F

3A12.a7

3A9.a16

3A9.a8

3A9.a12

098B

3A9.b36

3A9.a10

098A

3A9.a14

018F

SYX SC

RAD

Consigne mA SC

1V/mA

kV 85%

PRE

Consigne mAs

Mesure mA SC

Mesure mA Gr

0 logic from 0.16mAs to 5 mAs

PRESENCE CI

30 mA / 100–110kV

41 mA / 70–79kV

47 mA / 60–69kV

33 mA / 80–99kV

60 mA / 40–49kV

55 mA / 50–59kV

3A3 DIAPHRAGMES

S133–B

117E

7

2

RP

�

�


3A26 CI CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS 4 829 357 G055

R7100K

R24722K

R8100K

R249100K

1 2

G184.A

1 2

G187.A

LF356

C203100MF

D248 D250

3 4

G184.B

5 6

G184.C

3 4

G187.B

G188.B3

4

5

6

RPPRE

082A R76

1K

R30

1K

G188.C11

12

13

10 11 10

G184.E

C7810K

R590

2K2

R591

2K2C59310K

C285

100K

10K

10K

1K

1KC5861K

C5821K

C5701K

1KC5741K

C5711K

C5991K

1KC5981K

1KC5771K

1K

C5641K

C5801K

2K2

2

3

C5611K

C5601K

–12V

2

1

4

R576 R563

RAD

LF356

R597

G186.C

8

9

10

+12V

56

G187.C

98

G187.D

13 12

G187.F11 10

G187.E

D592+12V

+12VR595

R596

R5753

12

R581R585

+12V G589

D141

082D

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

087B

098A

098A

098A

098B

030E

083C

Not used



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

edward r rogala

reduced power switch derates mA at selected kv's

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

selected rad mA based on selected kvp

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

exposure start

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Prevents filament boost (rad) until kvp reaches 85%

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Rad

edward r rogala

Fluoro

edward r rogala

220 volt power backup set for 7sec

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

reduced power 120 volt backup timer set for 15 seconds

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

FL mA adjust

edward r rogala

Selected Rad mA based kvp

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Rad mA feedback 1v = 10mA

edward r rogala

Controls mAS integrator gain

edward r rogala

selected/desired mAS

edward r rogala

Fluoro exp start

edward r rogala

desired fl mA eprom based

edward r rogala

actual Fl mA feedback

edward r rogala

Presence of x-ray

edward r rogala

stop Rad exposure at selected maS. No photo timing

edward r rogala

Rad 1v = 10mA FL 1v = 1mA

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

If closed allows fluoro on large focal spot for tube alignment

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

mAS integrator

A–24

ÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ













ÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
























ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ





1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4011 VCC

A–25

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

Q213.BIH5019CPA

8

7 5

6

RAD

082D

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

R511R510

R512

R517

R515

R131 R132

R77

R133

R174

R168

R169

R513

R179

R130 R25

R74C92

C75

C175

C172

D509

D170

D173 D79

3K32

8K66

68K1

1K

10E

4K7

1K

15K

4K7

10E 1W

10E1W

330E

22E1W

10MF470E

2K2

470E470pF

1K21

22E1W

22K

R514

4K7

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

R524R525

R522

R518

R519

R119 R118

R70

R166

R523

R160

R120

R26

R72 C73

C71

C163

C171

D526

D164D69

3K22

8K66

68K1

1K

10E

4K7

4K710E1W

330E

47E1W

10MF470E

2K2

470E 470pF

487E

47E1W

22K

R521

4K7

��

��

��

��

BZX83C3V3

BZX83C3V3

R5204K7

R516

4K7

BZX83C6V2

R16733K

��

��

R1262K2

R127

10K

D165

BZX83C9V1

R161680E

G1835

6

4

G1831

2

3

G1838

9

10

G1825

6

4

G1821

2

3

G18312

13

11

G18212

13

11

G1828

9

102K2

R207

R229

R230R233

D208

��

��

R204

R205

Q213.AIH5019CPA

3

42

1

RAD082D

R64

56K2

R22

21K5

A282

2

3

6

R283

100K0

C280

10pF

R28110K

C27410K

A234

2

3

6

4K7

C209

2K2

R272��

��D

S

G

��

��

D270

R2691M

R27110K

R26710K

A237

2

3

6

R158

R157

R153� �

��

��

RAD

082D


3A26 CI CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS 4 829 357 G055

+12V

+12V

+12V

+12V

33K2

18K7

100K

100E

C159C156100K

10MFC154

G155555

1

2

6

7

4 8

3

5

C232

D231

R22810K

3K3

33K

100E220K

2K2

100K

1N914

D

C

D

A

B

CB

A

+12V

+12V

R178680E

a18

a14

a15

a16

a11

a12

–12V

–12V

+12V

C27510K

13

4

610

9

8

7

5

R273

22K6

+12V

+12V

–12V

–12V

LF356

LF356

R235

100K

R236

100K

LF356

R212

10K

R268

33K

D211

D210

R240

100K

R239

1M

C238

470K

C296

470K D279

+12V

–12V

C26110MF

C26310MF

C226100K

C227100K

C136100K

C137100K

C277100K

C276100K

C262100K

C264100K

+5V

+12V

–12V

+5V

RAD

082D

RAD

082D

RAD

082D

CONSIGNE CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTFILAMENT HEATING REFERENCE VOLTAGE

085B

5A1 CI PUISSANCECHAUFFAGE 4829 355 G015

PL33PL4

R

M

N

P

6

2

3

5

4

R2710E

D25

D17

D18R121E2W D5

D14

��

��

C26470K

1N5061

1N5406

PL1

3

2

4

1

6

C4470MF

C3

470MF

R6547K

+

–

~~

5F3

8A

17

16

5TR1

V+

V–

V+

V–

Primary

004F

MODULE 6X RAY HEAD

1K

1K

100K

100K1K

1K

C

C555

R193

1K10

R194

1K69

C5521K

C1951K

C5531K

R557

R556

C559

C558

a2

a1

a3

a4

E192

� �

��

��

��

��

D10

D9

D24

R22100E0

R2348E7

R80E187W

R7

R161E2W

R13100E0

0E157W

R19100E0

D6

D3

C410K

C431K

1N5061

2x1N5406

PL2 6PL1

PL1

1

4

2

3

K

J

Masse cuve

X–RAY

TUBE

VHV C

5–2

5–1

A278AD534

5CR3



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Filament drive to achieve disired mA

edward r rogala

Pulse width modulated

edward r rogala

If actual current feedback > desired current then comparator goes high and interrupts 180 HZ inverter

edward r rogala

180 degree phase shift

edward r rogala

free running 180 HZ

edward r rogala

180 degree phase shift

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Rad

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Fluoro

edward r rogala

Current safety

edward r rogala

Rad current feedback

edward r rogala

Fluoro current feedback

edward r rogala

Rad

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Fluoro

A–26

ÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇ

828 980 G0353A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 2

DIS kV

828229 P305

PL1

B Aa

b

c

d

e

f

g

DP

1

2

3

6

7

14

13

11

10

9

8

MAN 71APIN

1

2

3

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

14

Cathode a

Cathode f

Cathode e

Cathode d

Cathode DP

Cathode c

Cathode g

Cathode b

Commun Anode

Commun Anode

NC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

A3 B3 A > B A B A B3

A3<B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A3=B3

A2>B2

A2<B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A2=B2

A1>B1

A1<B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A1=B1

A0>B0

A0<B0

A0=B0

A0=B0

A0=B0

X X X X X

X X X X

X X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

g f a b c d e

B C LTBI/

RBO RBI D A

VCC

GND

7447 A B C D a b c d e f g0

1

2

34

5

6

7

8

9

L L L L L L L L L L

L L L

L L

L

L

L L L

L L

L L

L

L L L

L L

L L

L L L L L

L L L L LL L L L

L L L L L

L L L L L

L L L L

L L L L L L L

L L L L L

H

H

H HH

H H

H H

H H H

H

H H

H

HHHHH

HH

HHH H H

H H

H H

H H H

H H

L

A–27

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

� ��

R177R176R174R173R179R175R178

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

R45R46R44R47R42R43

b24

R184R183R181R180R209R188R186

+ 5 V��

��

R20010K

��

��

R20210K

R20110K

��

��

R19710K

��

��

R19910K

R19810K

��

��

R19410K

��

��

R19610K

R19510K

��

��

R19110K

��

��

R19310K

R19210K

��

��

R20310K

��

��

R20610K

R20410K

R187

R189

R190

R182

+ 5 V

R214R216R215R212R217R213R218

+ 5 V

R185R220R221R219R224R222R223

R225

R226

a20a21

a18a13a14a12a19a15a17

a11a6a5a2a7a3a10

b15b14b12b11b16b23b17

b8b7b3b1b10b5b9

b25

b18

b13

3 4

G36.BR32

1K C3310K

1 2

G36.AR37

1K C5010K

13 12

G36.FR35

1K C3410K

9 8

G36.DR31

1K C7210K

11 10

G36.ER30

1K C7310K

5 6

G36.CR29

1K C7410K

a1b2

+ 5 V+ 5 V

30 mA 100 / 110 kV

3A26

a10

a6

a5

a8

a9

a7

60 mA 40 / 49 kV

55 mA 50 / 59 kV

47 mA 60 / 69 kV

41 mA 70 / 79 kV

33 mA 80 / 99 kV

3A12a12 CONSIGNE kV / 20

a16

a10

a14

a12

a8

b36

b5

D26

D25D24

D23

D28D27

R20510K

A69

2

3

6

R1052K87

C70100K

C92100K

R8110K0

R8010K0

G94

C93100K

R825K62

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

+ 5 V

1110

G84.E

+ 5 V

1312

G84.F

G138

G172

G121

G136

G120

G67

G22

G18

G19

G21

G20

+ 5 V

E3

E4

E5

a23

a24

C0

C7

C0 C7

BUS kV / 20

C7

C0

C7

C0

C7

C0

DIS kV

2 x 150E

7 x 150E

7 x 150E

2 x 22E

22E

22E

7 x 150E

7 x 150E

G137

DS25

DS24

DS23

DS41

DS40

DS39

DISPLAY mA / mAs

DISPLAY kV

100

010

001

2A1 MODULE G2

3A9 CONSIGNE kV / mA 2 828980G035

C161100K

a/b1

C16210MF

a/b4

a/b3

C15810MF

C157100K

C16010MF

a/b2

C159100K+ 12 V

+ 5 V

0 V

– 12 V

+ 12 V

– 12 V

+ 5 V

a21

a22

PWB Presence

PL1 PL3

FC110

FC403A7.b6

3A7.b5

+ 5 V

058E

072A

058D

W245

105K

110kV

071C

074B

074C

081A

081B

6 x 100E018D

021B



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

12v interlock

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Eprom

edward r rogala

Eprom

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Eprom

edward r rogala

desire/selected kvp 1v = 20kv

edward r rogala

220 volt Full power mA values

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

minimum kv value (40)

A–28

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4012

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4023

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516

Q12

VCC

GND

4040

Q6 Q5 Q7 Q4 Q3 Q2

Q11 Q10 Q8 Q9 Reset Clock Q1

12 Bit Binary counter

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516Vcc

GND



4538

Dual MONOSTABLE

T =RX X CX

3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025

A–29

A

B

C

D

��

� ��

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

��

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

+12V

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

+12V

�

� �

� ��

��

��

+12V+12V

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

��

� ��

+12V

� ��

� ��

+12V

+12V

��

� �

��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

�

E3

�

� �

+12V

��

+12V

��

��

� � ��

��

��

� ��

��

� �

�

�

�

�

� �

�

�

�

�

�

��

� ��

��

�

��

� �

��

�

��

�

�

�

� �

� �

��

��

��

+12V+12V

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� +12V

��

+12V

��

W109

W107

W230

W231

+12V

PRX026A

W220

��

�

� ��

� ��

��

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

��

2A3 MODULE D

+5 V

+12V

+5 V

+12V

+12V

045A

2A1 MODULE G 3A7 AD kV

3A5 CI MINUTERIE

3A12 kV mA – 2829825G025

PL1

PL1

PL5

PL1

BP Cl

RAD

4’26”

��

+12V

�

PL11

3

9A1 TRANSPANEL

9PL1

3PL6

Y

22

9Tb1.12

X–RAYON

�"�

�"

�"��

��!

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

� ��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

�

�

� ��

+12V�

��

��

��

4’57”

PRX.CP (50Hz)

��

��

� � ��

054F

� � ��

��

��

RAZ MINUTERIE SCOPIEFLUORO TIMER RESET

BP COMMANDE CLICHEX RAY CONTROL BP

CLIGN

PL2

045A

051C

131A

042B

003C

003C

031B

040A

111C

031A

041A

��

��

PL4

8

7

��

��10

9

9PL1

29

9Tb1.7240 VAC

1 27 +12V

003C

27 VAC



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

002C

140

150

210

MODULE 9 – INTERFACE

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

console X-ray switches

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Monitor Cart

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

See job card RG 206 5 minute timer accuracy

edward r rogala

2 HZ Oscillator

edward r rogala

for thermal display lights and intermittant operation of buzzer

edward r rogala

Low = stop high voltage inverter

edward r rogala

x-ray on indicator

edward r rogala

PRX present when xrays are emitted

edward r rogala

Sonalert

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

2 HZ

VccQ Q C R D S

Q Q C R D S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4013

Dual D Flip Flop

1

0

Q

1

0X X 0 1 1

CL D R S Q Q

X X 1

00

0

0

1 : High level

1

X 0

0

0

0

0

1

Q

0


1X X 1 1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4023

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4093

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4016

1

2

34

In

Out

Contr.Contr.

Contr.Contr.

In

In

InOut

Out

Out

PL 1M 1.1

7A1 FROTTEURS

E2E3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516Vcc

GND



4538

Dual MONOSTABLE

T =RX X CX

PL2

PL1

B A


B A


A–30

A–31

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

+12V

R8

4K7

100K

C5510K

R56

2K2

R79 8

G156.D11 10

G156.E

+12V

R4

4K7

100K

C5110K

R52

2K2

R33 4

G158.B11 10

G166.E

+12V

R122

4K7

100K

C1244MF7

R123

2K2

R121

13 12

G167.F

+12V

R18

4K7

100K

C6510K

R66

2K2

R1713 12

G164.F1 2

G164.A

+12V

R20

4K7

100K

C6710K

R68

2K2

R1913 12

G158.F13 12

G166.F

+12V

R14

4K7

100K

C6110K

R62

2K2

R13

+12V

R10

4K7

100K

C5710K

R58

2K2

R93 4

G164.B

5 6

G164.C

+12V

R34

4K7

100K

C8310K

R84

2K2

R33

9 8

G167.D1 2

G167

+12V

+12V

R5

4K7

100K

C5310K

R54

2K2

R612

G158.A12

G156.E

+12V

R11

4K7

100K

C5910K

R60

2K2

R121110

G158.E56

G156.C

+12V

R23

4K7

100K

C7110K

R72

2K2

R241312

G156.F34

G156.B

+12V

R29

4K7

100K

C7810K

R80

2K2

R3034

G162.B12

G162.A

��

��

��

��

+12V

–12V

A175.A

2

3

1

G176.C8

9

10

G176.A2

1

3

G176.B6

5

4

3 4

G172.B

11 10

G172.E–12V

+12V

5 6

G167.C

G178.B5

6

4

+12V +12V

��

��

��

��

+12V

–12V

A175.B

6

5

7

G177.B5

6

4

G177.A2

1

3

G177.C8

9

10

5 6

G172.C

9 8

G172.D–12V

+12V

G178.D12

13

11 13 12

G172.F

1 2

G172.A

G178.A2

1

3

+12V +12V

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

�

�

�

�

��

13

12

10

9

8

�

�

�

�

��

1

2

4

5

6

3

7

14

G178.C9

8

109 8

G164

11 10

G167.E

R126

100K

R127

1K

3 4

G167.B

+12V

C128220K

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

G159.C12

11

13

10

G168.A2

1

3

G159.A8

2

1

9

G160.C11

12

13

10

G159.B3

5

4

6

G160.A2

8

1

9

G169.B3

5

4

6

G169.C11

12

13

10

G160.B

3

4

5

6

G169.A1

2

8

9G168.B

5

6

4

G157.C8

9

XX

��

��

��

��

G179.C12

11

13

10

G168.C8

9

10

G179.A8

2

1

9

G180.C11

12

13

10

G179.B4

3

2

6

G181.A8

2

1

9

G181.B3

4

5

6

G181.C12

11

13

10

G180.B

5

4

3

6

G180.A8

2

1

9 G163.B5

6

4

G163.A

2

1

3

��

��

��

��

G157.B5

6

4G168.D12

13

11

11 10

G164.E

��

��

��

��

G161.B6

5

XX

+12V

100K

R86 G157.A 2

1

3

R35

150E R144

4K7

R138

4K7

R36

150E

G163.C9

8

10

G165.A

D1251N914

C120

10K

R115100K

R119100K

C116

10KD117

D1181N914

1N914

C113

10K

R108100K

R112100K

C109

10KD110

D1111N914

1N914

R106220K D50

1N5061C109

10MF

+12V +12V

G155.A

R105220K D49

1N5061

C104

10MF

+12V +12V

G155.B

R232

4K7

D194

R208

40K2

R207

13K3

R20620K5

R205

10K

R22747E

LM324

R22847E

R231

4K7

D193

R204

40K2

R203

13K3

R20220K5

R201

10K

R19647E

R19547E

LM324

R245

33K

R252

4K7

R2421K

R240680E

R253100E

R247680E

R2484K7

R250

4K7

R24420K5

R243

4K7

C254100K

D255BZX83C2V7

D256BZX83C2V7

R215

33K

R221

4K7

R2121K

R210680E

R223100E

R217680E

R2194K7

R220

4K7

R21410K

R213

4K7

C224100K

D225BZX83C2V7

D226BZX83C2V7

R39100E

C92100K

D89BZX83C6V2

D90BZX83C6V2

W85

R135

150E

47KR500

��

��R137

4K7

1KR502+12V

S501.B

+12V

S501.A4 1

3

2MONO OFFMONO OFF

C741K

R76

470E

R229100E

C230100K

R198100E

C199100K

+12V

10KR114

G165.B

M.1.2

M.1.1

6 3

12 9

9 6

8 5

10 7

5 2

11 8

7 4

4 1

PL1

3

VOLETS INFERIEURSLOWERS BLADES

Xa18

8Za20

5Wa16

4Ua9

1Ta6

7Ja21

10D

b30

2Ea23

6Ca24

9F

b19

7M2– +

UNIQUEMENT ENBICHAMPSONLY WITH 2FIELDS II

7M5– +

CHAMP/FIELD 161 FIELD IICHAMP/FIELD 222 FIELDS II

7M4– +

VOLETS SUPERIEURSUPPER BLADES

7M3– +

ROTATION

7M1–+

CHAMP/FIELD 16

FC Sc1

FC Sc2

FC GR2

FC GR1

3PL1

7Sa1

7Sa3

7Sa2

7Sa4

3A1.a19

0V(12V)

007C

115F

BPF1

–12V

–12V

+12V

+12V

+12VBP01

FC Sc1

Z

FC Sc1

Z

BP01

RAD

FC GR1

BPF1

BP01

FC Sc1

RAD

FC GR1

RAD

RAD + Z

Z

FC GR1

BPF1

BPF1

BP01

BP01

BPF2

BPF2

BP02

BP02

RAD

CLIGN

FC GR2

BPF2

BP02

FC Sc2

RAD

FC GR2

RAD

RAD

RAD

RAD

RAD

CLIGN

Z1

Z

RAD

RAD

RAD

FC Sc2

BPF2

BP02

Z

Z

FC GR2RAD + Z

BP02

RAD

FC Sc2

b33

3A12–a23

a7a8

b35 a5a1

a35 a22a14

b36 a13b7

b34 a14a3

a33 a28a16

b31

b5

b9R245

47E7W

R8

47E7W

b31

a4

b6

+12V

+5V

a21

a2a30

b2

+5V

3A19–a8RAD

CLIGNa10

a8

b27

b26

Sm17

Sm14

Sm13

Sm16

Sm15

Sm12

Sm11

832 501 G015

78F

832 440 G015

2A3 PUPITREMODULE D 2

3A5 MINUTERIE

3A3 CI DIAPHRAGMES 2 832 502 G015PL12PL5

7A1 CIFROTTEURS

7A2 CIDISQUE

112B 113A113D

112B

112E

11 10

G164.EG157.B5

6

4

Z

RAD

RAD

112E

131A

121A

+12V

–12V

C246100K

FC Sc1

FC GR1

FC Sc2

FC GR2

FC Sc1

FC GR1

FC Sc2

FC GR2

NO

NO

NO

NO

��

4538

4538

RAD

T

M.1.1

112E

112E

112E

115A

040A

106A

112D

119C

112E118E

112BD

C

154E

R16

300E

300E



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

6 inch field of view switch

edward r rogala

Aluminum radio transluscent blades

edward r rogala

Lead opaque blades

edward r rogala

Collimator rotation switches

edward r rogala

slip ring collimator continuous turn + = cw - = ccw

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Lead blades +12 = close - 12 =open

edward r rogala

limit switches close when max opening reached

edward r rogala

Transluscent

edward r rogala

+12 = close - 12 = open

edward r rogala

lead aperature for 6 inch field of view.

edward r rogala

9 inch II normal fov or 6 inch II norml fov

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Causes blades to flash on console if blades need to be opened.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Low for 9 inch fov high for six inch fov zoom

A–32


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4093

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

A–33

119

�

��

��

��

��

%�

�

�

�

��

��

��

��

%�

�

�

+12V

��

��

��

��

��

&�

��

�

+12V

��

��

��

��

%

��

13 12

��1

23

��12

13

11

%�

&�

�

��

+12V

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

+12V

�

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��5

6

4

��1

23

��

��

��

��

��

��

+

��

��

��

�

��

2N2222��

��

��

+12V

�

�

%��

��

�

8

1

��

��

%�

&��

%��

��

��

!��

�

1

2

5

4

�

�

�

�

�

��

%�

�

��

1

2

5

4

��

��

+12V

+ 5v

��

��

��

��

1

2

5

4

��

��

�

��

��

��

&�

��

��

1

2

5

4

�

��

��

5 6

� ��

5 6

� ��

9 8

�

�

��

5 6

&

��

+12V

�

��

��

��

��

�

%��

�

��

+12V

��

��

��

��

��

�

%�

��

��

+12V

��

��

��

��

�

�

��13

1211

�

��

2N2222�

�

�

&�

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

2N2907��

��9

810

��13

12

11

��

14 12

��12

1311

&�

�

��

+12V

�

��

� �

��

�

�

&�

&�

2

7

%�

�

�

�

��

!��

��

��

+

%

%

%�&

%��

%�&�

%�&

��

��

��

��

��

��

+��

��

��

��

��

��

+��

��

� ��

+12V

–12V

��

��

+��

��

+5V

E188

+12V

–12V

+5V

0V(12V)

�

�

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

ON = POWER DERATING

��%�

SEXP

035B

��%�

SC

��&�

ER

065B

��%�

AUTO

��&

FC110

058D

��%�

PRX

��%

SYX Sc

SYX Sc

ER

SYX ScER

RAD

Z1112D

��

%�

%�

&

%�

%�

%�

!)

2A3 PUPITREMODULE D

&�

%�

%�

!) �

2A1 PUPITREMODULE G

%�

PL5 PL2

PL1

PL1

PL1

PL2

3A5

3A7

3A5

AD / kV

MINUT.

MINUT.&�

&�

OX

016D

��%�

PRESENCECI

��

��

1

2

13

�

#

!

�

%

0V (24V)

3PL2

+ 24V

�� &�

�

3PL5��

",%*-+%*'(

Auxiliary coil

J6

�

�

�

CLTV_

GO TO BLACK

X – RAY ON_

$

3PL2�� &�

��&�

OX HLC

3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2/CCD

MODULE 8IMAGER

ZOOM

BEAM MAX

832 502 G015

1.9

1.18

1.15

1.7

1.11

A

B

C

D

E

F

*

*

* G171 5V POWER SUPPLY

Cde RX

��

5 4

6 3

��"� ��

!��

!��

��

051D

051A

035A

030A

117F

081A

031A

117B

117C

112D

077C

041C

041D

004C

126C

126D

��

�

117F

301 440

MODE 1

to

423



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

CCD Interconnect board

–ABD

edward r rogala

Emergency off buttons on console

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Start Exp

edward r rogala

Fluoro selected

edward r rogala

Electronic Radiography (Single pulsed fluoro) "Snapshot"

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Max Kv

edward r rogala

Low during Fluoro

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Open to unblank tv without xray

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Open = down = off to set up camera standby beam (400nA) when fluoroing

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

120 Vac

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

close to turn on AGC for service mode

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Unblank tv when logic high

edward r rogala

Monicon only high = sets max beam to 1500nA low = standby beam = 400nA.

edward r rogala

Mag to 6 inch fov on 9 inch I.I.

A–34

1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU DC

832 359 G015

PL1

TB2

TB3

F5

F18

3232

3434

31

31

22 22

24 24

12

12

14 14

1111

21 21

a ab bK34 K44

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4093

W41 W42

A–35

��

��

C810K

R10

47K

R11

2K2R9100K

1 2

G16.A

3 4

G16.B

C1210K

R14

47K

R15

2K2R13100K

813 12

G16.F

11 10

G16.E

R24

1K

R29

1K

G17.B5

6

4

R26

10K

R31

10K

R271K5

� ��

��

� ��

R321K5

� ��

��

� ��

12

14

11

22

2421

32

3431

12

1411

32

3431

9

��

��

� � ��

3

54

2

1

7

b7

b11

b6

b4

b3

Sm23

Sm22

Sm5

Sm9

+12VPL5 PL2

PL1 PL1

PL1

b36

a32

b35

b32

a31

1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU DC

832 359 G015

PUPITRE MOD. D

PUPITRE MOD. G2A1

2A3 3A5MINUTERIE

AD kV3A7

3PL3E

F

+12V

0V

111B

+12V

006D

+12V

0V(12V)

C37100K

C3610MF

G17.A1

2

3

K44

b a

K34

b a 0V (24V)

0V (24V)0V (24V)

0V (24V)

+12V

+24V

+12V

2 4

1 5

2 4

1 5

22

24

21

R51

6E8–7W

R5046E4

R4946E4

C484MF7

6

PL1

3PL4 3PL2 J6

10

4

3

5

Y

Z

a

b Y

Z

a

7

8

9

b

c

d

b

c

d

4

5

6

4Tb1–

c

d

b

c

d

4a

3a

1M1

+24V

0V (24V)

3PL3.T

3A3.a33

3A9.b35

3A3.b32

3A9.b32

1–26

1–25

1–24

1–29

1–28

1–27

+24V

0V

F53A

F183A

Tb2–1

2

1

2

21

23

19

20

22

Tb3–5TR1005D

D22D23

D20D214 x MR752

W42

W41

K6

1 2

0V(12V)

0V (24V)

+24V

18VAC

27VAC

119C

080B

119A

C ARMUP / DOWN

MOTION MOTOR

MODULE 8 IMAGER

Q30H11A5100

Q25H11A5100

A

B

C

D

E

F

3–1

E2–3–2

X902 11

X902 12

006C ��

��

� ��

007B

006B

080B

5E20

+24V

301 440to

423



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

3 +24V0V

CCDINTERCONNECT

BOARD

2

Video

ELECTRONICDAP

MODULE

J4427E12

BNC/BNC PlugSGNL

H.T.

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

IONCHAMBER

MODULE 7 COLLIMATOR

mGycm 2

DR4/MD10 memories only

Test

Pulses

1

SG.DAP

2

White

Red

WhiteBlue

3PL6.c

3PL6.W

� � � ��

To BNC–BNC Connector(Module 3)

3PL2.D

3PL2.K141B

141A

141B

141B

MDA memory only

DR4/MD10 memories only

edward r rogala

This print is wrong. 24 volts comes from low voltage power supply to TB3-1. F18 is not on the supply side but is actually on the return gnd side. This supply is fused in the camera.

edward r rogala

A–36

PL2

PL1

B A


B A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4023

VccQ Q C R D S

Q Q C R D S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4013

Dual D Flip Flop1

0

Q

1

0X X 0 1 1

CL D R S Q Q

X X 1

00

0

0

1 : High level

1

X 0

0

0

0

0

1

Q

0


1X X 1 1 1

S32

A–37

��

� ��

G140.B

3

2N2222Q59

R256100K R255

4K7R2032K2

C20210K

+5V

4

G140.C

5

R257100K R258

4K7R2052K2

C20410K

+5V

6

R248150E

+5V

2N2907

Q195

G140.A

12

R247150E

2N2907

Q194

G140.F

1312

G140.D

9 8

R101470E

+5VR25100E

R24100E

C27470K

Q554N32

1

2

3

4

G140.E11 10

R105470E

+5VR29100E

R28100E

C31470K

Q574N32

1

2

3

4

G163.A

1

R167100K R156

2K2

C16510MF

+5V

2

+

D1641N6263

+5V

G163.B

3

R251100K R252

4K7R1992K2

C19810K

+5V

4

G163.C

5

R2622K2

C26110K

6

G163.D

9

R249100K R250

4K7R1972K2

C19610K

+5V

8

G163.E

11

R2092K2

C20810K

10

D2631N6263

D2641N6263

D2111N6263

R265100K

+5V

R2662K2

D2101N6263

+5V

R2132K2

R212100K

R332K2

R341K5

C581MF

+

R149470E

R15010K

2N2222Q151 D152

1N5359B

R14822E

R154470E

R15510K

2N2222Q156 D157

1N5359B

R15322E

R169470E

R17010K

2N2222Q171 D172

1N5359B

R16822E

R174470E

R17510K

2N2222Q176 D177

1N5359B

R17322E

a24

b25

b24

b26

3PL5 9PL1M 38

K 34

S 36

U 41

D46

D44

PL5

K36

K35

6

8

+ 12V

MONITOR Awhen used with

DR4 / MD10

+ 12V

47

43

45

50

3–5

3–1

3–3

3–8

a25

a26

a27

a28

a7

a11

b16

b17

a10

b14

b12

b8

a5

b23

a17

b11

b13

S32–2

S32–1

Sm10

Sm9

+5V

Sm8

Sm7

Sm6

Sm5

R193150Eb10

a2

a21

3A5 MINUTERIE :H/V Sweep Inversions – TV Monitors Coil Rotation

832 501 G015

H / V SWEEP INVERSIONS

TV MONITORS COIL ROTATION

PL2PL5051F 111B

2A3 MODULE D2

RAZ ROTATION

A

B

C

D

E

F

+5V

046B101C 111E

042C

R411K

R431K

5

D48

D40

PL6

K34

K33

6

8

+ 12V

R471K

R451K

5

PL114

5

6

7

27 1B

9A1 TRANSPANEL



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

G1064013

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

3A5 MINUTERIE

Not connected

007B

002C 102D

150 210

MONITOR Bwhen used with

DR4 / MD10

MODULE 9MONITOR CART INTERFACE

� ��

� ��

��

��

MDAMEMORY

AVIAS

PL20

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Rotate Monitor A

edward r rogala

Rotate Monitor B

edward r rogala

DSM uses monitor yoke rotation MDA does not

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A/B selection (split screens) forces both monitors to drive fully ccw when split screen selected on DSM 200 (DSM 600 did not rotate) MDA digital uses electronic rotation

edward r rogala

A–38

With MDA Memory

With DR4 & MD10 Memories

2 172 555

liv. A–38

2 172 563

A–39

MG +

A

B

C

D

��

� ��

3PL5

3PL6

3A1 – a24

B 27

2

14

17

1

10

7

8

30

31

K

E

F

J

L

M

N

3A1 – a25

3A1 – a26

3A1 – a30

3A1 – a20

3A1 – a27

3A1 – a35

N.U.N.U.

X PERM

MEMO +

MF +

9

3

10

1

15

2

123A1 – a14 16D 143A1 – a9

3A1 – a8C

H

9

11

7

8X PERM +

VISU +

Common

Videofrom Imager(module 8)

MODULE 9MONITOR CART INTERFACE

14

13

12

18

17

15

16

PL12

N.U.

2 172 555 : MDA PL112 172 563 : DR4 & MD10 PL12

��

��

IR RECEIVER

126D

1

VideoOUT

1

�

� �

8

9

BNC – BNC

134

210

�P

+12 V007B

MDAMEMORY

19

29

12

30

17

35

16

34

15

33

26

24

6

PL119PL1 PL20

29

12

30

13

31

14

32

26

246

AVIAS

25

7

8

27

9

25

7

8

27

9

002C 102D

140 210

PL10

543PL7

1110

2 5

Touch ScreenControl

COM1

37

19

37

PL17

18

36

18

36



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

PL21

7

3142

VCRIN

Y–IN

0V–Y

C–IN

0V–C

11 11

2828

10 10

PL22

713

VCROUT

0V–Y

y–OUT

PL16PL15PL14

Connection usedwhen DR4 / MD10

PL23

7

3142

AUX OUT

Y–OUT

0V–YC–OUT

0V–C

17

35

16

34

15

33

13

31

14

32

VCR SVHSFILMPRINTER

RemotePrinter

RemotePrinter

VideoPrinter

Video outVideo in

SW53

SW52

Monitor AMonitor B

523B

1 2J2

PL18

2J2

1Video board

523BVideo board

Solder junction

Power Supply

002B

9A1 TRANSPANEL :Solderjunction 39

38

Sony VCRSVBK–120 Interface

Multi RS232COM4

PAPERPRINTER

MG +

X PERM

MEMO +

MF +

VISU +

VIDEOfrom Imager

MDAMEMORY

MODEM

COM5

MODULE 3CARD RACK

SPARE

COM6

3PL2

125C

125D

+24V ( 3PL4-Z )

0V (24V) ( 3PL4-c )42c

W 37 20

21

47Z

b 57 23

22

D

KTEST

ElectronicDAP moduleFrom Imager(module 8)

126F

PULSES

5

4

2

PL13

3

PL1

5

5

11

10

4

3

Power Supply

002B

1 42

DAPInterface board

SK1

COM3

532

0V

COM2

� ��

Electro.Luminesc.

Display

DisplayDriver

Connection usedwhen MDA

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

+12 volts used to generate X PERM

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

CARM

A–40


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4012

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4023

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4093

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516Vcc

GND



4538

Dual MONOSTABLE

T =RX X CX

VccQ Q C R D S

Q Q C R D S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4013

Dual D Flip Flop

1

0

Q

1

0X X 0 1 1

CL D R S Q Q

X X 1

00

0

0

1 : High level

1

X 0

0

0

0

0

1

Q

0


1X X 1 1 1

A–41

202D

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

R362K2

R4100K C37

10K

9 8

G100.D

5 6

G105.C

SP

SPa6 R3

4K7

R712K2

R31100K

C7210K

13 12

G106.F

9 8

G106.D

ER

ER

a31

R14

100K

R502K2

C5110K

3 4

G78.B

9 8

G78.D

RAD

RADa22 R17

4K7

R422K2

R11100K

C4310K

13 12

G78.F

11 10

G78.E

OXa173A19–a6 R10

4K7

3A19–a8

3A7–b30

3A7–b31

+12V

R522K2

C53100K

13 12

G80.F

a23

R19

4K7

3A5–a13

+12V

R69100K

11 10

G80.E

R641470E

C6401K

1110

G116.E

C731K

a333A5–a13G81.A

1

2

3

a18

R18100K

R20100K

R32470E

C701K

T1

ACP

SP

R442K2

C4510K

R12

4K7

+12V

R13100Ka19 11 10

G79.E

D681N914

R620220K

C61910K

D621

R631220K

C63010K

D632

+12V +12V

+12V +12V

G622.A

G622.A

C61310K

R614100K

D6151N914

C61610K

R617100K

D6181n914

+12V +12V

C62410K

R625100K

D6261N914

C62710K

R628100K

D6291N914

+12V +12V

ON RESET3A19–b19

G600.C9

8

10 9 8

G105.D

G643.A

1

2

3+12V

R27100K

D261N914

R28

1K

C2910MF

3 4

G106.B

5 6

G80.C

R14868K

C1474MF7

R146187K0

C1444MF7

+12V

+12V +12V

G622.A

G622.AG82.A

3

24

115

T1

T4

SP

OX*R1 1 2

G105.A

C1124MF7

+12V +12V

C10810MF

C109100KR113

100E

R150200K

R111470E

R107100E

R132150K

R114100K

+12V

E121

Q110555

T4

5 6

G106.C9 8

G116.D

G81.B

6 5

4

E125

G82.B12

911

1310G119.A

+12V

X PERM

E126

+12V

R152100K

D149

D145

+12V

E127T4

T5

+12V

R142100K

C1414MF7

R140187K0

C1384MF7

+12V

+12V +12V

G117.B

G117.A

E123

+12V

R151200K

D143

D139

+12V

E124T1

T2

+12V

G104.A1

2

3

G104.D13

12

11

11 10

G105.E

3 4

G105.B

ON RESET + MCH

ON RESET + MCH

STOP DSM

STOP HYST

G104.A1

2

3

G104.D13

12

11

11 10

G105.E

3 4

G105.B

G601.A2

1

3

G500.B5

6

4

G81.C9

8

10

G500.D

12

13

11G500.A

2

1

3

G81.D12

13

11

STOP HYST

STOP DSM

OX*

9 8

G80.D

+12VR501100E

S502.A1

41 4

G643.C9

8

10

G600.A1

2

3

G601.C9

8

10

3 4

G116.B

G600.D

12

13

11

G601.D

12

13

11

G600.B

5

6

40

C60310K

S602.AON RESET + MCH

SN

OX*R1

R13661K9

C1351MF

D137

+12V +12V

G115.A

C63310K

R634100K

D6351N914

R637100K

D6381n914

+12V

+12VG119.B

5 6

G116.C

G601.B

5

6

40

9 8

G642.D

C6710K

R66100K

D651N914

C63610K

E122

T3

+12V

OX*

T2

T1

STOP DSM

OX OUT

9 8

G79.D

G77.B

5

6

40

OX OUT

G77.A1

2

3

G103.A

SP

C5710K

R54

2K2

R56

2K2

1 2

G78.A

3 4

G79.B

OX OUT

G101.A

3

52 11

4

G101.B

12

1110

139

OX

OX

RAD

ON RESET

ACP

X PERM

13 12

G116.F

G103.B

+12V

C7410K

R34

2K2

R35

2K2

13 12

G105.F

1 2

G106.A

D331N914

C9110K

R92

2K2

R84

2K2

5 6

G100.C

13 12

G100.F

D831N914

OX*

OX*R1

OX*R2

STOP HYST

R606100K

C60710MF

+12V

G115.B

E608

+12V

R604200K

D605

+12V

ACP

T1 + T2

ACP

G99.C9

8

10R611

47K

R610

2K2

C612100K

ER

S602.B3

2

R609100K

G116.A8

1

2

9 1 2

G118.ARAD

SP

ER

SN

SN

T5

T1

T2

T3

3A1 INTERFACE DSM

OX

RAD

SP

ER

HYST

ACP

HOLD kV

SN

SP

ER

RAD

204D

204B

203B

202D

202D

202E

203F

202C

114F

031A

203B

202E

208D

202C202B

201CON RESET

203D

201B208B

209D

206C

202E

202E

208D

204C

202D

209D

202D

202C

202D

204E

201C

201B

201A

203D

202F

202E 202F

207C

207C

203D

202F 208C

202C201F209B

201C 203E

209C

202B 203B

204E

204B

202D202D

202D

202E

207B209B

208C

201B209A204C

208C

202E

208C

201F

203D

205B

206C

204C

208D

204B

201A 204A208A

209C209B

203B 205C

203B

203F

207C

205C

209C208B208A

205C

201B

209A208C

201F

204D

208B

040A

066B

045C

041D

066B



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Normal Fluoro

edward r rogala

Pulsed Fluoro

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Electronic Rad ( single pulsed fluoro)

edward r rogala

Radiographic

edward r rogala

Pulsed Fluoro

edward r rogala

2 second delay for anode cooling between ER pulses

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

OX Manager

edward r rogala

Normally closed

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Order Xray from 3A19

A–42

ÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4012

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4023

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

40106

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314VCC

GND

4093

VccQ Q C R D S

Q Q C R D S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

891011121314

GND

4013

Dual D Flip Flop

1

0

Q

1

0X X 0 1 1

CL D R S Q Q

X X 1

00

0

0

1 : High level

1

X 0

0

0

0

0

1

Q

0


1X X 1 1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

910111213141516Vcc

GND



4538

Dual MONOSTABLE

T =RX X CX

A–43

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

C411K

a153A19.a5G76.A

2

1

3

R9470E

OX OUT

G102.D

13

12

11

11 10

G106.E

3A1 INTERFACE “DSM”828 988 G 035

G77.C

8

9

10

G76.D

13

12

11

56

G79.C

G75.B

9

1211

1310

G75.A3

4511

2

G99.B

6

5

4

G500.C

9

8

10

G99.A

2

1

3

G76.C

9

8

10

D641N914

C653100K

R651

2K2

R652

2K2

D650

1N914

G99.D

13

12

11

C972K2

R98

2K2

R90

2K2

D89

1N914

C9510K

R96

2K2

R88

2K2

D87

1N914

C9310K

R94

2K2

R86

2K2

D95

1N914

1 2

G100.A

R392K2

R84K7

C4010K

a14R7

4K7

R241K

C6010K

a26

G102.B

6

5

4

G118.C13

11

12

10

G102.C

8

9

10

G643.B

6

5

4

11 10

G642.E

R231K

C2210K

a25

G76.B

5

6

4

G77.D

13

12

11

12

G80.A

34

G80.B

R462K2

R154K7

C4310K

a20R14

4K7

1312

G79.F

R211K

C5510K

a24

R251K

C6110K

a27

G104.B

5

6

4

C481K

a213A5–b23

R16470E

R38220E

a9

C510MF

a8

R63100K

C6210K

1110

G116.E

112

G79.A

C6100K

+ 12 V

a3

a35C12810MF

C129100K

C130100K

+ 12 V + 12 V

E131

E49

E59

E58

OX OUT

OX OUT

RAD

OX

X PERM

T3

T4

T2

T1

SN

T2

T2

OX*R1

T1

SN

SN

T5

SNT5

X PERM

STOP DSM

ER

SP

OX*R2

ER

SP

OX*R2

SN

S502.B

R639100K

+ 12 V

F 17 10

E 14 3

K 2 9

M 7 2

H 11

L 10

C 9 7

D 16 14

a30 J 1 1

MEMO +

VISU +

MG +

MF +

COMMON

X PERM. +

A / B +

A / B

X PERM.


3PL6

9PL1

PL12

RAZ ROTATION

T1 + T2

031A

007C

205D202C

202D

0 V007C

Card rack

202D

202D

205C

209D

203F

204D

203E

203E

203B

207C203D202A

205B

204B

203B205F

202D

202E

203E

202E

203B

204D

202D

205B

204D

205B

203B

203F

204B

203E



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

9A1TRANSPANEL

12

13

14

15

8

15

18

PL11

16

17

Not used

002C

102D

140

150

204C

A–44

211 to 300441 to 500

: reserve.

A–45

IMAGER 16/22

SCHEMATICS :

A–46

IMAGER 16 STENO CCD 625lMIS CABLES

A–47

IMAGER 22 STENO CCD 625lMIS CABLES

A–48

INTERFACE CCD BOARD

edward r rogala

To video Board

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

CCD Gain

edward r rogala

Video out to video Board

A–49

INTERFACE CCD 50 or 60 Hz

A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

CCD Gain

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Raw video out to J2 on video Board

edward r rogala

+7 volts

edward r rogala

+5 volts

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

-9 volts

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

CCD chip

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Ribbon cable

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Composite sync

edward r rogala

Not used (for r&f LIH)

edward r rogala

V. Drive

edward r rogala

H Drive

A–50

CCD POWER SUPPLY BOARD

A–51

CCD POWER SUPPLY BOARD

A1 B1

A2 B2

A3 B3

A4 B4

A5 B5

B10A10

B9A9

B8A8

B7A7

B6A6

B13A13

B12A12

B11A11

B18A18

B17A17

B16A16

B15A15

B14A14

A19 B19

A20 B20

A21 B21

A22 B22

A23 B23

B25A25

B24A24

B31A31

B30A30

B29A29

B28A28

A26 B26

A27 B27

2 1

S E NS E _ 0 _ 5 V8

S E NS E _ + 5 V1 1

CA S E7

ON| OF F6

+ 5 V 1 0

0 _ 5 V 9

– 1 5 V 1 2

0 _ 1 5 V 1 3

+ 1 5 V 1 4– V i 12

– V i 23

+ V i 25+ V i 14

1

12

2

2

22

1

2

1

2

1

1

1

2

22

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

V +

8B

5

G

1

I +2

I –3

O7

V –

4

S

6

1

2

2

1

34

65

GN

D3

V o u t 2

+V

s1

2 1

1

1

E D G E 6 2

J 1

S t r a i g h tMa l e

E d g e

1 u H

L 1

T P 1

R 23 . 8 3 K

R 32 . 1 5 K

R 14 . 7 5 K

C 1

2 2 0 u F5 0 V

0 V

C 5

1 0 0 n F

5 0 V

D S 1$ 5 5 5 – 2 3 0 3GRE E N2 mm

2 4 T 5 . 1 5 K

P S 1

0 V

0 V

0 V

0 V 0 V

0 V

0 V

0 V

0 V

0 V0 V

T P 2

– 1 5 V

– 1 5 V

2 4 V

2 4 V

3 5 V4 7 u F

C 2

2 mmGRE E N$ 5 5 5 – 2 3 0 3

D S 2

0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V0 V

0 V

0 V

0 V

L 2

1 u H

1 u H

L 3

L 4

1 u H

C 3

4 7 u F3 5 V

D S 3$ 5 5 5 – 2 3 0 3GRE E N2 mm

0 VT P 3

C 4

4 7 u F3 5 V

2 mmGRE E N$ 5 5 5 – 2 3 0 3

D S 4

2 . 1 5 KR 4 T P 4

5 V

5 V

5 V

l m3 1 1U 2

L S 1T MB _ 0 5

6 8 1R 6

4 . 2 2 KR 5

U 3L M3 5 D

0 V 0 V

0 V

0 V

5 V

5 V

2 A T _ 2 5 0 V

F 1

S 1

+ 1 5 V

T P 5

P T 1

24VI N

O N / O F F

��

A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

80 degree C warning buzzer does not shut off camera

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

24 volt supply from stenoscop LVLE supply to 1A1 elevator board to CCD power supply.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Thermal sensor 10 mV/degree C

A–52

CCD INTERFACE BOARD

A–53

CCD INTERFACE BOARD( 1/3 )

J1 CCD Interface Board

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

��


��


��

331D

331B

331B

333D331B



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Sweep reversal not used

edward r rogala

R&F

edward r rogala

Mag

edward r rogala

Iris Control

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

+9 volts DC

edward r rogala

Auto = 5volts manual = 0volts

edward r rogala

R&F only

edward r rogala

AGC on/off

edward r rogala

Not used

edward r rogala

to video board

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

5 volts = fluoro on unblank camera

edward r rogala

to video board

edward r rogala

Auto (for AGC on/off)

A–54

CCD INTERFACE BOARD( 2/3 )A

B

C

D

E

F

��

326D

326D

327B

326C

��

348B

330B

��

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Iris feedback

edward r rogala

HLC high dose

edward r rogala

Center focus

edward r rogala

Edge focus

edward r rogala

I.I. size

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Edge focus

edward r rogala

Center focus

edward r rogala

Size

edward r rogala

Zeners limit voltage to Iris motor

edward r rogala

To Iris

edward r rogala

DS1 Getter gas detection. Flashes at power up then goes out.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A–55

CCD INTERFACE BOARD( 3/3 )

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

333D



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Roundness

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Size

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Agc/Abd window size = 40% image diameter

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Parabola generator

A–56

VIDEO CCD BOARD

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

TP35 is the solder dot

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

X1 video cal generator = B pos

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

R10 Cal Gen. level adjust

edward r rogala

Agc display switch R = normal S = display

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Preamp video

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

To monitor (MDA)

A–57

VIDEO CCD BOARD( 1/7 )A

B

C

D

E

F

��

5V L

3G N

4V +

7V –

6I

N

8S

21

D

2S

1

2

18

S 5

O 2

4

V –

3

I +

2 I –

6O

1

O 1

7V +

8

S 5O 2

4V –

3

I +

2 I –

6O

1

O 1

7

V +

2

3

1

3 2 1

2

3

1

2

3

1 1

3

2

1 2

V +

7

O 1

1

O6

I + 3

I –

2

V –4

O 28 G

5

1

S

3 G

2

D

7 G

6

D

5

S

1

2

13

3 G

2

1

21

2

D

2

3

2

21

12

12

21

1

3

2

D

1

S

2

D4

SU

1S

1

3

2

3G

1

S

2

1

2

31

2

1

1

3

2

4

5

2

1

2

3 G

1

1

1

U 1

DG4 1 9

+ 1 5 V

SST 1 1 2Q 3

Q 2 2

SST 3 0 9

SST 4 4 0

Q 1 8

4 . 7 u H

L 2

Q 2 0SO3 9 0 4

L T 1 2 2 3

A R 2

C 1 1 5

2 . 2 n F6 3 V

C 1

8 . 5 – 4 0 p F1 0 0 V

C R 1 9$ BAR4 3

0 V

R 2 5

2 2 0

R 3 01 . 8 K

R 2 0 41 0

R 2 81 0 0 K

R 2 93 3 K

R 72 0 0

1 KR 3 8

R 3 97 5 0

0 V

X 9

Q 2 1

SO3 9 0 6

0 V

R 3 5

2 K

R 3 6 1 5 0

R 3 4 2 2 0

C 2 1 4 . 7 u F 2 5 V

0 V

+ 1 5 V

4 . 7 u F

C 2 2

2 5 V

– 1 5 V R 3 7

1 5 00 V

– 1 5 V

+ 1 5 V

1 5 0

R 2 7

R 2 6 1 5 0

L T 1 2 2 3A R 1

R 3 1 2 K

4 . 7 u F

C 1 6

2 5 V

C 1 5 4 . 7 u F 2 5 V

0 V

0 V

R 2 2 72 . 7 K

R 2 2 61 0 0

R 2 2 52 2

– 1 5 V

R 8

2 K

R 2 2 91 0 0

– 1 5 V

R 2 2 3 4 . 7 K

R 2 2 4

2 . 7 K

C 1 1 1

1 0 0 n F 6 3 V

0 V

1 0 0 n FC 1 1 0

6 3 V

0 V

+ 1 5 V

– 1 5 V

R 3 2

2 2

R 2 3 5

4 7 K

R 2 3 2 1 M

R 1 4 6

4 . 7 K

R 2 3 61 K

R 1 4 3

3 . 3 K

R 2 0 31 KR 2 4 1

1 0 0

SST 4 4 0Q 1 8

R 2 2 21 0 0

+ 1 5 V

– 1 5 V

T P 1 2

T P 1 1

SST 2 1 1

Q 1 9

C 1 2

4 7 n F6 3 V

C 2 0

3 3 p F6 3 V

C 1 9

3 3 p F6 3 V

0 V0 V

R 2 4 62 . 7 K

R 2 4 4

3 3

1 0 0

R 2 4 3

Q 1SO3 9 0 4

– 1 5 V

1 0 0 n F

C 6

6 3 V

+ 1 5 V 0 V

– 1 5 V

Q 1 5SO3 9 0 4

+ 1 5 V

R 1 4 41 0 0

C 6 6

1 0 0 n F 6 3 V

0 V

C 6 7

1 0 u F 1 6 V

R 2 2 83 K

R 2 13 3

R 2 02 2 0

R 1

2 0 0

R 2 4 22 KR 2 4 8

1 0

R 2 4 5 5 1

C 1 1

1 . 5 u F2 5 V

C 9

4 . 7 u F1 0 V

J 2

R 2

2 0 0

0 V

0 V

1 . 5 u F

C 1 0

2 5 V

0 V

R 2 33 3

0 V

R 2 23 3

– 1 5 V+ 1 5 V

V C C

0 V

L 1

4 . 7 u H

C 7

2 7 p F6 3 V

0 V

+ 1 5 V

R 2 4 0

1 K

T P 2

A R 1 1l t 1 0 1 2

R 2 3 4

1 K

0 V

R 2 3 3

1 0 0

C 1 1 4

1 . 5 u F 2 5 V 0 V

C 1 1 21 . 5 u F

2 5 V

0 V

R 2 3 1

1 0 0

C 1 1 3

1 0 0 n F 6 3 V

+ 1 5 V

– 1 5 V

R 2 3 0

4 . 7 K

C 1 4

5 . 6 p F6 3 V

R 1 4 5

2 . 2 K

C 1 1 6

3 3 p F6 3 V

D E T V O L

P O S T A G C 1

P O S T A G C 2

V T E S T

C A L G A I N

P R E A G C

B P G 1 _

C L P 1 A

G A I N C O N T

C L P 2 A

S C O P I E G R A P H I E

V I D E OI N

U T

M A X G A I N

N O N C A B L



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

AGC gain control

edward r rogala

Cal Gen. video

edward r rogala

Preamp video (for abc)

edward r rogala

from CCD

edward r rogala

variable gain amp 0.5 to 5 times in AGC

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Bandwidth factory adjusted

edward r rogala

video to black level and threshold

edward r rogala

Main video to Gamma

edward r rogala

To AGC command

edward r rogala

V TEST = 1 volt pulses in manual varies in auto. Integrated ABC brightness pulses injected during blanking interval for AGC.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

R1 = fluoro gain preset. with 100mV at TP2 adjust R1 to give 250mV at TP3 TP1 = GND

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

clamp to 0 volts

edward r rogala

factory adjusted

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

TP1 = GND

A–58

VIDEO CCD BOARD( 2/7 )A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

V. Rate

edward r rogala

Fluoro on

edward r rogala

Gamma &AGC corrected video

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Post AGC video

edward r rogala

Gamma ADJ. job card 353. With 1000mv at tp2 (preamp) video, adjust R9 to get 640mV at TP3 (monitor). This presents "blooming" and saturation of digital A/D (saturates at 1v composite

A–59

VIDEO CCD BOARD( 3/7 )

A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Gamma and AGC corrected video

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

H clamp

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

50 mV black level setup

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

A–60


A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

5 pulses during vertical blanking interval

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Integrator

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

manual gain (fixed resistor in manual mode).

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

AGC gain (adjust for 250mV at TP3 flat field video in "AUTO")

edward r rogala

DC voltage to variable AGC gain Amp

A–61


A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Black level threshold compensated AGC window

edward r rogala

preamp video

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

TP2

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

To ABD to develop 2.1 volts dc at proper brightness (Used by steno for ABC)

edward r rogala

Integrated ABC dc video pulses added to V. blanking interval for AGC operation

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

5 pulses during V. blanking interval

edward r rogala

A–62


A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

H blank 12 micro seconds

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

X1 = test signal generator A = normal B = cal. mode Remove J2 coax before turning on test generator

A–63


A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

edward r rogala

Collimator black level threshold adj.

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

AGC window

edward r rogala

edward r rogala

Black level Treshold compensated AGC window

A–64

CCD STENOSCOP INTERCONNECT BOARD

A–65

CCD STENOSCOPINTERCONNECT BOARD

( 1/2 )

A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

A–66

CCD STENOSCOP INTERCONNECT BOARD( 2/2 )A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

A–67

SCHEMATICS : MONITOR

1 2 3 4 51 2 3 4

4 3 2 1

1234

654321

1

21234

1 2 3 4 5 6

874321

12

1 2 3 4 5 6

LIGHTSENSORBOARD

SELECTIONBOARD

H. YOKE

BRT 220K

NC

J4

J7

J2

J1 H. COIL

DEFLECTIONBOARD

VIDEOBOARD

YOKE

CRT

100 / 120 Hz

FRW3 W2

W4

W2W1

W6

W7

W8

120/100 Hz

GNDJ1

NC NCBR 0VCONT 12V

W4W3

W2W1

GNDV. INP

CONT.10K

C VID

OUT IN

VIDEO IN

GND

V. COIL

J1J5

J6

J3

BLKHS

G10V

0V

5V

W11W5

W6W7

W9

F1

K

FOCUSG2

G1

F2

TB1

TB2

GND

W8

FOCUS

W20V 27V 62V 12V 95VW8 W7 W6 W5 W3

2 3 4 5 6 7J2

H.V.POWERSUPPLY

L.V.POWERSUPPLY

ANODIC V

G2

W5W6

W8W7

W9

95V0V

6.3V+12V

NC

VAC

W2 W1 GP1

0VHPV27V

BLOCK DIAGRAM

J2

A–68

DEFLECTION BOARD

ÍÍÍÍ

ÍÍÍÍ

ÍÍÍÍ

��

��

��

1 : L.V. Power supply2 : Deflection board3 : H.V. Power supply4 : Video board5 : Selection board6 : Light sensor board

A–69

DEFLECTION BOARD( 1/2 )

A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

549A

From L.V. Power supply

545E

549B

549C

549B

Brightness control

508

509

A–70

DEFLECTION BOARD

ÍÍÍÍ

ÍÍÍÍ

ÍÍÍÍ

��

��

��


A–71

DEFLECTION BOARD( 2/2 )

A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

A–72

VIDEO BOARD

��

��

��


ÍÍÍÍÍ

A–73

VIDEO BOARD

A

B

C

D

E

F

��

122D

144C



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/97

2 20/06/97

or

A–74

H.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

��

��

��


A–75

H.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARDA

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

A–76

L. V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD��

��

��


A–77

L.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

A

B

C

D

E

F

��



A 15/07/96

0 10/10/961 09/01/972 20/06/97

9Tb1.

4or11

2or9

1or 8


220 VACfrom9TR1

002B

CON. 4 pin CON. 7 pin

A–78

Blank page

GE Medical Systems

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 Series

Technical Supplement

7-1

REV 1

SECTION 1 - THEORYTABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE

SECTION 7 - THEORY 7-1

7-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART) 7-3

7-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4 7-5

7-3 HV CIRCUITS 7-9

7-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA 7-11

7-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND 7-13

7-6 3A19 BOARD 7-15

7-7 ABC HYSTERESIS 7-17

7-8 TIMER DISPLAY 7-17

7-9 3A7AD-kV BOARD 7-19

7-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD 7-21

7-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD 7-237-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode 7-23

7-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode 7-23

7-11-3 Rad mAs Reference 7-23

7-12 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS 7-277-12-1 Fluoro Mode 7-27

7-12-2 Rad Mode 7-27

7-13 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS 7-29

7-14 FLUORO TIMER 7-31

7-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS 7-337-15-1 6” Single Field Image Tube 7-33

7-15-2 6”-9” Dual Field Image Tube 7-33

7-15-3 Circular Collimators 7-33

7-16 3A3 BOARD 7-35

7-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE 7-37

7-18 3A5 TIMER 7-397-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation 7-39

7-19 LAB EXERCISE 7-41

7-20 TV CAMERA 7-437-20-1 Power Supply (PL1) 7-43

7-20-2 Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2) 7-45

7-21 SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3) 7-47

7-22 SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5) 7-49

7-23 IRIS CONTROL 7-51

7-24 DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS 7-53

7-25 1010 FORMATTER 7-63

7-26 VIDEO AMPLIFIER 7-697-26-1 Smoothing Board 7-69

7-26-2 V Defl 7-69

7-26-3 H Defl 7-69

7-26-4 CRT Board 7-69

7-26-5 Output Board 7-69

GE Medical Systems



7-2

7-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE 7-71

7-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE 7-73

GE Medical Systems



7-3

REV 1

K5

K3

Module 3(Console stop buttons)

K1

SafetyInterlock (9PL1)

9 A4

Module 4Converter

Delay

K1M

9 PL1

R1 and R2

Power on

9Sm1

230/120 AC

275V

Line Transformer 9TR1

MSI XR 0348

Module 5

To LV PSPanel 1+ 12v, +5v

5TR1

X-ray TubeFilaments

C Arm Motor

ImageSystem

220V to Monitors & DSM

GE Medical Systems



7-4

Module 9, Power Circuits (Monitor Cart)

Illustration 7-1

GE Medical Systems



7-5

REV 1

1-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART)

Refer to Illustration 7-1.

Line Transformer 9TR1, input tapped for either 120 or 230v AC, 60Hz operation.

9TR1 supplies 275VAC to the converter on Module 4 and 5TRI on Module 5

5TR1 supplies power to the ± 12 v and + 5v DC supplies on Panel 1, the x-ray tube filament circuits, C-Arm drive motor and the image system.

9TR1 also provides power for the TV Monitors and the Memory System.

Power to 9TR1 is applied by depressing the 9Sm1 Power ON button (back side of Memory Display Cart).

9Sml is released by actuating the Console Stop buttons energizing relay K3 and the auxiliary coil of 9Sml.

On “power-up,” Line Transformer 9TR1 is energized through R1 and R2 (current limiting) and then through K1 after the delay M. (R2 used only

on 120 VAC operation)

If the interconnecting cable plug, 9PL1, to the Memory Display is removed, relay K5 will be energized and will open 9Sml by energizing its

auxiliary coil.

GE Medical Systems



7-6

REV 1

VA

C C1 2

C C3 4

HV

Rectifier&Filter

V1

V2

CR2

CR5Load

V L

4TR1

CR1L1

L3CR6

275V ACfrom9TR1

4TR1- TOROIDAL TRANSFORMER TR2- H.V. TRANSFORMER LOAD- HIGH VOLTAGE RECTIFIERS, VOLTAGE DOUBLER, FILTER AND X-RAY TUBE.

4CR7

1

2

16

15

7

10

11

6

SELECT. CAPAAUX.

CAPA PREPO

MAIN SCR

MAIN SCR

3A19COMMANDE SCR

PL1

+4C5

4DS1

4R2

1 2

MODULE 4CONVERTER

1R3

4

4C4

4CR4

4CR34C2

4C3

4CR5

R10

4A2

PL256

4A1

CR7

4A2

4A21

2

PL24R 34E 7

4A2

5

6

PL2

4CR6

6

7

E1

L3

4TR2

4A11

4TR1

MSI XR 0349

3A19 3PL3C

Ba17

a1636B

1 2 4Tbl

4C1

4CR2

4CR7

4Tb1-8

5 B

- +1

2- -

4C6

- 1

-2 -

+4E10 L1

H.V.Transfor.Pri.

4R4

Module 4

Illustration 7-2

GE Medical Systems



7-7

REV 1

1-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4

Refer to drawing top of Illustration 7-2.

At T=0 assume CR1 is turned on in the RAD mode. Capacitors C1 and C2 discharge through CR1, 4TR1 and HV.

At the same time C3 and C4 are charging up.

When C1 and C2 are discharged CR1 turns off.

Next CR6 is triggered ON. Now C3 and C4 discharge through HV, 4TR1 and CR6.

Current flow through HV primary produces the high voltage in its secondary to the transformer load consisting of voltage doublers and the X-ray

tube.

When C3 and C4 are discharged CR6 turns off and the process is repeated.

Power to the input of HV is proportional to the value of C, the voltage Va and the pulse frequency, or the rate at which CR1 and CR6 are

triggered. Refer to the actual Converter Schematic (lower drawing Illustration 2), minimum triggering between CR1 and CR6 is 30 µsec; and

established by the SCR command Board 3A19.

3A19 Board enables selecting capacitors C1 and C4 in the RAD mode by turning on CR4.

3A19 Board enables controlling CR7 to permit presetting capacitors C3 and C4.

4TR1 is used to sense CR1 and CR6 conduction current. The current flow data is used on board 3A19.

In fluoro, only capacitors C2 and C3 are used.

GE Medical Systems



7-8

REV 1

This page intentionally left blank.

GE Medical Systems



7-9

REV 1

6A1CI DIVISEUR8 24 428 G15

PCB Presence Safety

Illustration 7-3

GE Medical Systems



7-10

REV 1

Doubler

Doubler

H. V.Transformer

FromConverterModule 4

6A1MA / MASMEASURING CKT

Measured mA Sc(FL)

Measured mA Gr(Rad)

6A11000 / 1Divider KvMeasuringCkt

Measured Kvto 3A12LS SS

Rad (+)

FL (-)

Fil.Trans5A1

+12V

6 Sa1

6 SaTH2

Open at 70_C

Open at 50_C

3A19 Open 6 Sa1 stops converter

3A3

MSI XR 0 347

TH3A7

HV Circuits

Illustration 7-4

GE Medical Systems



7-11

REV 1

1-3 HV CIRCUITS


Board Interlock Circuit.


The HV Transformer derives its input power from the converter on Module 4

The secondary of the HV Transformer is fed to doubler circuits, the output of which is applied to the x-ray tube.

The 2000/1 divider furnishes the actual measured kV to 3A12.

The MA/MAS measuring circuit provides an indication of the actual MA/MAS during fluoro and rad operation.

If the x-ray Tube Head temperature reaches 70°C, 6Sa1 opens and stops the converter.

6SaTH2 opens at 50°C head temperature to develop the TH signal used on 3A7. It reduces the fluoro power to 154W, and actuates the

temperature indicator on the Console Display. A positive pulsed filament transformer output energizes the x-ray tube large focal spot for rad

operation

A negative pulsed filament transformer output energizes the x-ray tube small focal spot for fluoro operation.

GE Medical Systems



7-12

REV 1

Op 55, G32,G33

3A3PRX

3A19SEXP

Arc Det Op46Monostable G32,G30 ,Counter G31

OSC G79

Integrator Op 97

3A19PRI

3A19OX 3A19

(Shuts downConverter after 4arcs)

Indicatesshutdown

Compare

Op114Op102Op122

CompareAdder

3A19DemxOp132

C137Op1806A1

Measured Kv

3A9 Selected Kv/20

3A19Clock

MSI XR 0353

Op160Op168

3A26 KV85%3A19120KV

Op 152, 192, 203(Followers)

6A1Measured mA SC(FL)

6A1Measured mA Gr(Rad)

3A26

Measured mAScMeasured mAGr

R232

FL Timer

CR4

a5 3A19TROU CLQ

INT4 CLQ

KV* = ( KV -1 ) 1.120 20

KV Composite

Op114Select KV/20

KV Error

Board 3A12 kV/mA

Illustration 7-5

GE Medical Systems



7-13

REV 1

1-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA


SEXP from 3A19 generates x-ray ON. It is used to produce the PRX signal to 3A3. PRX increments the fluoro time counter and the total x-

ray exposure time counter on 3A3.

Op46 detects arcing in the HV system. A large voltage drop in the high voltage system is considered due to arcing. Counter G31 after

counting four arcs, interrupts x-ray. LED CR4 indicates the x-ray shutdown. The signal indicating any arcing on A5 is used by the hysteresis

safety circuit on 3A19.

kV measured and MA fluoro measured are combined to produce the kV composite signal. MA measured corrects for HV system bleeder

current.

The kV composite is stored on capacitor C137 and fed to the comparator Op102. Op102 compares this signal with the kV/20 selected value.

The clock input resets C137 to update the information to the comparator.

Op97 integrates the error output from Op102. G79 activates the integrator Op97 when it is triggered by the PR1 signal . When the exposure

starts, the converter is running at maximum frequency to rapidly increase the kV. During this time the DEMX is present to 3A19. When the

kV/20 composite reaches the kV/20* reference at the input to comparator OP122, the converter frequency is changed to now correct for any

OP97 integrator error output. Each error correction again requires developing the DEMX signal.

PRI monitors the main SCR’s current and is used to trigger the monostable osc G79.

Op160 compares the kV/20 Composite with its reference kV/20 selected input. It produces the kV 85 output when the kV/20 composite

reaches 85 of the selected kV/20 level.

Op 168 produces the 120kV output when the kV/20 composite exceeds its reference input.

GE Medical Systems



7-14

REV 1

G112, 116,118 Logic

G118, 113, 117, 115 Logic

G119, 120 Logic

3A12 DEMX

SEXP

PRI3A12 TROU CLQ

G216, G113,Q189, Q178

3A26 +12V & SX

To Q181, Q259, Q303, Q238

X-ray Button BPCL

FSRad

(3A12) 120 Kv(3A12) INT4 CLQ(3A26) Stop MAS

Sec Bellows

G121A

Q

Q_

Clock

G128555 Clock Timer

BistableFlip-FlopG114, G117G115, G155

SEXP 3A12, 3A5, 3A3PRE 3A26SYXSC 3A26

Closed ifmemoryinterfaceis not used.

S76A

Q238Q235

MSI XR 0354

Rad

Clock

Q303

Q256

Q300

Q259

G122D

G122AQ281Q278

TR313

TR269

TR291

To converter4CR7 (Preset C3 & C4)

TR248

To converter 4CR4 (Select all capacitors in (Rad)

To converter 4CR6 Main SCR

To converter 4CR1 Main SCR

OX Signal through memory Interface

3A19 SCR Command

Illustration 7-6

GE Medical Systems



7-15

REV 1

1-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND


The signal OX (command X-ray) is developed by any of the following to the logic circuits:

a) BPCL - Console X-ray button

b) FS - Foot Switch fluoro

c) FS - Foot Switch Rad

OX signal is passed through the Memory System and returned. If Memory is not used, S76A must be closed and board 3A1 must be removed.

OX flips the bi-stable Flip-Flop to momentarily turn on Q238 and Q235 and switch ON converter SCR CR7. This enables discharging converter

capacitors C3 in fluror, and C3 and C4 in RAD.

The action takes place provided:

Sec Bellows = 1 (x-ray head temperature less than 70°C)

Int 4 CLQ = 1 (no arcing)

Stop MAS = 1 (not end of Rad exposure)

120kV = 1 (not at 120kV)

The OX signal also enables developing the SEXP, PRE (Rad) and SYX SC (FL) signals.

When SEXP =1 to flip-flop G119Band 120B) , G121A latch Q and Q outputs alternately enable the drive circuits to TR269 and TR291.

Converter SCR’s CR6 and CR1 thus cannot be switched ON simultaneously. They will be driven alternately by the G128 clock output.

The clock G128 is triggered by PRI = 1 and the following input signals:

DEMX = 0

TROU CLQ =1 (no HV leakage )

SEXP = 1

In RAD operation TR313 will switch ON converter SCR CR4. This enables selecting additional converter capacitors.

All drivers Q181, Q259, Q303 and Q238 will be locked out if SX is not present or +12V supply drops below 6.2V.

GE Medical Systems



7-16

REV 1

ComparatorA135 +

G115

G115 Rad

RadGR3A7

4TR1E125

3A19 Current Detector

Illustration 7-7

GE Medical Systems



7-17

REV 1

1-6 3A19 BOARD


4TR1 senses the Converter current through the main SCR’s CR1 and CR6.

The secondary of 4TR1 is rectified and drives the comparator A135. A135 compares the level from 4TR1 with that on its positive input.

The output of the G115 inverts the A135 output during the SCR conduction interval and switches the input to A137. This produces the PRI

signal to 3A12 to trigger the G79 Timer on 3A12 and G128 on 3A19.

PRI indicates SCR current present.

R123 sets the threshold level for switching A137.

A137 acts as a low pass filter and prevents false triggering due to noise.

GR input develops the RAD and RAD signals.

GE Medical Systems



7-18

REV 1

Sample & HoldA71 , 82

RX(From TV camera) KV/20 Auto

(To 3A7)

Integrator A73

A74B

MSI XR 0350

A121 Comparators

R67Threshold

Ref. R65

Counters G143, 144158, 159, 160, 161

(3A12) PRX CP(50 Hz)

Decoders G184,185, 186, 187

Counts to 99.99

Module G

3A7

Timer

GainR66

+V

+ V

Console Reset

DisplaysDS 15 (.01)DS 16 (.1)DS 17 (1.0)DS 18 (10.0)

ABC Hysteresis

Illustration 7-8

GE Medical Systems



7-19

REV 1

1-7 ABC HYSTERESIS


The purpose of this circuit is to provide a kV/20 reference in the auto mode using the RX control signal from the TV Camera. This assures

correct kV’s for an optimum TV image.

The RX signal from the TV Camera is fed to the input sample and hold circuit involving amplifiers A71 and A82. A82 acts as a comparator with

a reference set by R65.

The output of A82 is fed through a system gain adjust R66 to integrator A73.

A74B will not pass the RX output of A82 unless it is greater than or less than the threshold determined by hysteresis adjustment R67.

When the RX signal is not present the output will provide a kV/20 of 2V, equal to 40 RV reference.

1-8 TIMER DISPLAY

PRX CP clock signal of 50Hz is fed to counters G143 and G144 and divided by 50.

G144 drives the 4 bit counter G158.

The output is decoded on G184 which drives the 7 segment DS15 1/100 sec display.

After 10 sec. the Q3 output of G158 drives counter and decoder G159 and G185 to display 1/10 second on DS16. G159 counts 6 and drives

G160 to display minutes on DS17.

Finally G161 receives a pulse from G160 to display tens of minutes on DS18 display.

SM19 on the Console enables resetting the counters and displays.

GE Medical Systems



7-20

REV 1

Logic Ckts& LatchG70

Up-downControlsG48, 31

Latch G69F L

1KHzOJC G148(3A19)

OX 4 bit comparatorsG108, 126

SC

Latch G97RadSC

Clock

Clock

Up-downCountersG138, 125

Auto= closedSm49

To 3A9

W R

G90A / D

300 KHzTo G150

AnalogKV/20

from 3A5& TV Camera

3Hz & 30 HzOSC &2Sec delay

(3A9) 40-110Kv Limits

SC(3A9)

MSI XR 0352

A>B A>B

(3A5)

Hold Kv

3A7 AD-kV

Illustration 7-9

GE Medical Systems



7-21

REV 1

1-9 3A7 AD-kV BOARD


The major function of this board is to generate the kV reference in both the auto & manual modes.

Operating mode is selected by console switch SM49. Console buttons SM31 & SM32 increment and decrement respectively the up-down

counters G48 & G31 and set the Latch G69 in fluoro manual.

Counters G138 & G125 and Latch G97 are incremented or decremented in the Rad mode.

The 8 bit Latch output data G69 (fluoro) or G97 (Rad) is transmitted on the kV Bus to 3A9 for kV reference.

If either 40 or 110 kV is reached FC40 or FC110 signals from 3A9 will stop the counters.

In either fluoro or Rad manual, the clock inputs to the counters are driven by the 3Hz & 30Hz oscillators which provide, first a 2 sec 3Hz slow

drive, followed by the 30 Hz fast drive.

Pressing SM49 to select the TV auto mode deactivates SM31 & SM32. kV reference is now generated using the TV camera RX signal.

In the auto mode the TV Camera analog signal is converted to digital by A/D G90. The G90 digital output is compared with the kV bus by the

digital comparators G108 & G126. The comparators output A>B or A<B activates the G48 & G31 counters at the frequency of 1 kHz until the

TV kV reference & kV bus data agree (A=B).

GE Medical Systems



7-22

REV 1

GE Medical Systems



7-23

PL1

45A

+5V

Sm52

Sm26

Sm33

Sm35

Sm48

FL

Pulsed FL

HLC

ER

Rad

D536 •S"

Sm50

mA(S) +

Sm51

mA(S) -

2A1 MODULE G

PL1 +5V

Gr SC

+5V

G150

Reset

ClockInhibit

300 kHz from G90

1613

10

2

4

7

3

8 15

14

+5V

+

+12V

+12V

G137 A to F

+12V

+12V

+12V

+12V

+5V

3A9

3A9

BP mA(s)Down

BP mA(s)Up

3A19 Gr

GR

3A3, 3A1

3A1

1.2 & 12HzOSCG47

3A9 Clock 1

3A9 Clock 2

G139 A to F

ER

GE Medical Systems



7-24

3A7 AD/kV Board

Illustration 7-10

GE Medical Systems



7-25

REV 1

1-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD


The circuit enables selection of the operating mode through activation of counter G150.

When power is switched ON, Fluoro mode is automatically selected G150 pins 1 to 9 = 0, except pin 3 = 1,

pin 13 = 1.

When another operating mode is selected, G150 pin 13 = 0 counter counts clock input pulses on pin 14 until the selected mode output of G150

equals a logic 1.

Counter now locks on selected mode, until another mode is selected.

Counter output turns on the selected mode LED through G139.

Counter indicates the operating mode signal through G137.

Output signals are as follows:

A. ER & SP to Memory Interface

B. + mAs to kV/mA board 3A9

C. Gr to SCR control 3A19

Two clock signals enable changing mA/mAs at two different speeds.

GE Medical Systems



7-26

REV 1

G21G20Lim.110

G18G19Lim.40

FC110

3A7Logic CktsFC40

Comparators

3A9 CONSIGNE kV / mA

G68DAC

EPROM

Dis.kV

G67

REFERENCE VOLT.kV/20

G138G172

G22

BCD to DECIMAL DECODER

U

D

C

BCD to 7 Segm. DECODER

REFERENCE VOLT.mA Rad

2A1MODULEG

888kV

3A12kV/mA

3A26

+5vSm35

Logic CktsG122, Q141

To Module 8TVCamera aperture

3A7 K/20 Bus

3A26 FILG94

DAC

kV/mAFL

G66EPROM COUNTER

G89G90

REFERENCE VOLT.mA FL

G65

ER HLC TH

EPROM

LogicCktmA.mAs

HLCERTHCLOCK

G87G88B A5R

500W

Mod.8TV LensAperture

mA (s)UpG118

SC

G119

G134G135

SC

mA-mAs COUNTER

ClockmA(s) Up

G132 G133DACCons.

mAs

EPROM

(3A7)

SCClk

ER HLC TH

(3A7) + MA, SC,

Mod.G Sm35

Ther mal Sw.3A7

G120

G121BINDEC

3A26FCOFC01FCGR

G136G137

EPROM

EPROM

2A1MODULEG

888mA- mAs

3A26 FIL

S140B

Comparators

Latch Latch

3A9 kV/mA

Illustration 7-11

GE Medical Systems



7-27

REV 1

1-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD


1-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode

The kV/20 bus addresses EPROM G66. G66 on its output bus sets an optimum mA value for each kV input. The mA level depends on the

operating mode selected and equipment safety.

Auto Mode

HLC (High Dose Fluoro)

ER (Electronic Radiography)

TH (X-ray tube head safety)

Digital counters G89 and G90 output data is converted to analog by G94. This sets the reference mA level for the X-ray tube filament control

circuits on 3A26.

1-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode

The counters G89 and G90 start from the EPROM memory data previously established before manual mode selection.

The counters are then incremented or decremented by the +/- mA input to the value manually selected. The clock 1 & 2 inputs from 3A7,

determines the mA change speed.

Counters G89 and G90 outputs are fed to D/A G94 and Latch G118 as in the auto mode.

G87 and G88 compare the EPROM G65 output data with the G89 and G90 counter outputs to set the counters for A=B. The counters input to

the Latch G118 to display the mA level on 2A1, through EPROM G120 and decoders G136 and G137. Latch G118 is set by the sc input.

G65 output data depends on the operating mode.

Fluoro - MA x 5R (154W)

ER & HLC - MA x 15R (500W)

TH - Reduce Power Operation

When the G65 output data equals the G89, and G90 counters the mA UP counting sequence stops. Counting down is automatic if A>B.

1-11-3 Rad mAs Reference

The mAs (up) data from 3A7 (up-down) 4 bit counters G134 and G135. The counters address EPROM G132 varying from .16 to 160 mAs in

31 steps.

The digital data drives the D/A converted G133 to provide the analog mAs reference to the x-ray tube filament circuits on 3A26 in the Rad mode.

GE Medical Systems



7-28

REV 1


GE Medical Systems



7-29

REV 1

The counter G134,G135 outputs also drive the EPROM G120 and G121 through the latch G119. The latch is set by the SC input in Rad.

G120 provides data for the 2A1 display through Decoders G136 and G137.

G121 outputs the following:

Information for the 2A1 Display

Logic signals to select the high or low integrators on 3A26

FC01 - Fluoro min mA value (.1 mA)

FC0 - Rad mAs min (.16 mAs)

FCGR - Rad mAs max ( 160 mAs)

kV/20 bus data is fed to the upper & lower kV limit comparators G20 and G21, and G18 and G19 respectively.

At limits the FC40 or FC110 comparator output is fed to the logic circuits on 3A7.

kV/20 bus data is converted to analog by G68 which provides the kV reference signal to 3A12.

Finally the kV/20 bus data addresses the EPROM G67, the output of which is decoded by G138 and G172 to drive the 2A1 kV Display. BCD to

Decimal Decoder G22 outputs additional information to the 2A1 Display and provides data to the Rad, mA circuits on 3A26 to taper the mA over

the kV range of 40 to 110 kV.

When HLC is selected by closing SM35, the logic circuits G122 & Q141 drive the TV camera aperture. The action closes down the TV camera

lens aperture to force increasing the radiation input to the Image Tube to the required HLC level. S140B must be closed to enable driving the

aperture.

GE Medical Systems



7-30

REV 1

KV/MA TapesQ108, 110

AdderA152

A284Amp

A138Integrator

MSI XR 0360

(Reduced Power)RP

Integ. GainQ83, Q217

3A12Measured MA(Rad)

3A9KV/MAfrom G22

S133B

0= .16 to 5mAs1= 5 to 160 mAs

3A9

3A9mAs Ret

A180Compare

G188,184,187

AmpA214

3A19Stop mAs

Fil.Ret

Q287A 85%KV& PRE

Pre heatQ216 (Rad)

Safety Delay (Rad)Q193, 194, 197,G184, 187

Pre

RP

R7 R8

Pre heatR3

Q26 (FL)

3A3 Powerreduction(Closed)

A220 CompareA222 Low PassFilter

Q287B (FL)R9

3A12MEASURED mA(FL)

3A19SYX (FL)

3A26 Filament Circuits

Illustration 7-12

GE Medical Systems



7-31

REV 1

1-12 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS


1-12-1 Fluoro Mode

A220 compares the measured (actual) mA from 3A12 and the reference mA from 3A9. Fluoro rate is set by R9.

The output of A220 is fed through low-pass filter A222 and drives amplifier A214 through FET Q287.

Q287 is ON in fluoro because of the SYX SC to its gate.

R3 also drives A214 through Q216B for pre-heating the x-ray tube filament. Q216B is on in fluoro.

1-12-2 Rad Mode

The Rad mA measured signal from 3A12 through A284 is added to the mA Gr reference at the input of A152. The reference is selected by the

FET’s Q108 and Q110. These are switched to taper the Rad mA in six steps over the range from 40 to 110 kV. The gate signals to the FET’S

come from G22 on 3A9.

S133B enables changing the reference mA values for reduced x-ray tube power consumption. S133B must be closed when the Stenoscop is

operated from 120V AC power source (reduced power).

A152 drives A214 to develop the filament reference signal in the Rad mode. Q287 is ON if the 85 kV and PRE signals are present on its gate.

R4 enables setting the x-ray tube pre-heat level for the Rad mode. It is switched by Q216A

Integrator A138 calculates the mAs. The integrator has two speeds because of the wide range of mAs (.16 to 160 mAs).

Integrator gain is set by Q83 and Q217 using the logic signals from 3A9. (0 = .16 to 5 mAs, 1 = 6 to 160 mAs).

A180 compares the integrator for A138 output with the mAs reference signal. When these are equal, the stop mAs output to 3A19 is

developed. On 3A19, the signal prevents sending trigger pulses to the main SCR’s on the converter, stopping the Rad exposure.

Maximum Rad exposures are limited to two different times, depending on whether reduced power operation is or is not selected by S133B.

If reduced power is selected ( S133B is closed), maximum Rad exposure time is limited to 11 seconds. RP is a logic 0. R8 enables setting the

Rad safety delay in this mode.

When reduced power is not selected ( S133B open), maximum Rad exposure time is limited to 7 seconds. RP is a logic 1 and R7 enables

adjusting the safety delay.

When the safety delay time elapses and the exposure is not complete the stop mAs is generated, terminating x-ray emission.

GE Medical Systems



7-32

REV 1

G155180 HzOSC

Q206SelectorLogicG182,183Q124

Pre amp & AmpQ176, 129,162, 122

Rad

FLIntegrator A234, Q265Q266

CompareA237 Fil Ref

(A214)

RMS

MSI XR 0364

Low PassFilter A282& MultiplierA278

n2 FL/RadSelectorQ213 A & B

LimitersQ125, 128Q123, 121

CurrentSense

DriversQ21, 20,15, 11

VoltageSource5TR1, 5CR3,C3 & C4

To X-rayheadFil. Trans.

5A1

n

C3

+V

VoltageSource5TR15CR3

+

-C4

Q20

Q11

.5 1.8

-V

RadRad

3A26 Filament Circuits

Illustration 7-13

GE Medical Systems



7-33

REV 1

1-13 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS


Oscillator G155 generates a positive going 180 Hz square wave pulse.

Q206 inverts the G155 output and drives the selector logic circuit. The pulse output of the selector logic is negative going in fluoro and positive

in Rad depending on the Rad or Rad input.

The selector logic output drives the push-pull complementary amplifier consisting of Q176, Q129, Q162 and Q122.

The amplifier output is finally applied to the x-ray tube filament transformer input drivers on 5A1 consisting of Q11, 15, 20 & 21.

The limiters (Q121, 123, 125, & 128) sense the 5A1 driver outputs. If an overdrive condition is measured, the limiters ground the push-pull

amplifier output at R133.

The RMS current in the 5A1 final driver outputs is measured by A282 through FET’S Q213A in the Rad mode and Q213B in fluoro. A282 acts

as a low-pass filter and drives the multiplier A278. The RMS2 output is now integrated by A234. The signal output of Q206 is used to reset

the integrator through Q266 and Q265.

Finally the integrator output is compared with the filament reference from A124. If the integrator RMS level exceeds the reference value, A124

inhibits the pulses at Q206.

Referring to the simplified 5A1 output driver circuit, operation is as follows:

C3 charges up to +175V approximate, furnished by the floating DC supply consisting of 5CR3 and 5TR1.

During Rad positive drive pulses to Q20 cause it to conduct and discharge C3 through Q20, and the filament transformer primary and

charging C4.

During fluoro operation positive drive pulses turn ON Q11, allowing C4 to discharge through the filament transformer and Q11.

Switching the polarity of the current pulses through the filament transformer primary enables selecting the small focal spot of the x-ray tube in

fluoro and the large focal spot in Rad. The energy input to the transformer is controlled by varying the pulse width.

GE Medical Systems



7-34

REV 1

G6950HzOSC

CountersG38, 37

LogicCktsG36

4' 57"(3A19)Stop ConvtSCR'S

2Hz OSCG35

MSI EX 0363

(3A5) PRX-CPTimer Display

R217

PRX

G35

Sm144' 26" LED FLASH

LogicCktsG74,75

DS175Buzzer

RAD

G39

PRX

Sm26

Sm 7

Module D2A3

BPCL(3A19)

TimerReset

Module G2A1

X-rayExposure

3A12

Fluoro Timer/X-ray On Lamp

Illustration 7-14

GE Medical Systems



7-35

REV 1

1-14 FLUORO TIMER


Depressing the exposure buttons, either SM7 or SM26, produces the BPCL signal to 3A19. This initiates the exposure by switching ON the

converter main SCR’s.

BPCL is further processed on 3A19 to produce the SEXP logic signal to 3A12. 3A12 then develops the PRX signal to trigger the oscillator

G69 and G39.

After the counters G37,38 count 4’57’’ the 4'57" signal goes to 3A19 board to stop the converter SCR’s.

At a count of 4’26’’ the 2Hz oscillator G35 begins to flash the SM14 Timer reset LED.

PRX also triggers the monostable G39 which enables energizing the DS175 buzzer for .25 seconds, after releasing the exposure button.

G74 energizes the x-ray exposure buttons LED.

Depressing SM14 resets the timer counters.

Stenoscop 6000/9000 monitor cart x-ray on lamp.

GE Medical Systems



7-36

REV 1

Q218Q211

Q249Q241

7M3

7M2

OpaqueCollimators

Semi-transparentCollimators

7M5Q189Q190

Circular Coll9" Tubeonly

7M4Q191Q192

Circular Coll6" or 9" Tubes

G165 LatchG155 MonostableLogic Ckts

Sm17

Zoom

Rad

S501A & BOpen for 6" tube

Z=0= Not zoom

Rad

G180, 163181, 179,164, 166, 158Logic Ckts

MSI XR 0362

G168, 157, 169,160, 159, 164, 156Logic Ckts

FC Sc1

Rad

FC GR1

(Close)Sm15

Sm16 (Open)

7M1Collimator Rotation

Sm11 (CCW)

Sm12 (CW)

-12V

+12V

(Close)Sm14

(Open)Sm13

FC GR2

3A3 Collimators

Illustration 7-15

GE Medical Systems



7-37

REV 1

1-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS

Refer to Ilustration 7-15.

Motor 7M1 rotates the collimator. Depressing Sm11 or 12 energizes the motor for desired direction of rotation.

Either a 6” or dual field 6”-9” image tube can be use on the Stenoscop.

1-15-1 6” Single Field Image Tube

7M3 moves the upper opaque collimator blades. These are controlled by Sm15 and Sm16. Q218 and Q211 enable reversing the voltage to7M3 to open or close the blades.

The collimator blades can be moved provided that:

Maximum opening limit switches are not actuated, FC SC1 (Fluoro) FCGR1 (Rad) console settings arecompatible with operating mode selected (Fluoro or Rad).

7M2 drives the lower semi-transparent collimator blades. These are controlled by SM13 and Sm14. Q249 and Q241 enable reversing power to7M2 to open and close the blades.

Collimator drive is enabled provided that the maximum opening switches are not activated FCSC2 (Fluoro) FCGR2 (Rad).

When the operating mode is switched from Rad to Fluoro all the collimator blades are automatically driven to limit x-ray emission to the input fieldsize of the image tube 6”, (16cm) FCSC1 and FCSC2 actuated.

When changing from Fluoro to Rad, the collimator blades must be manually positioned. LED’s for SM14 and SM16 will be flashing.Repositioning the blades for Rad mode stops the flashing.

7M5 is not used with the 6” Image Tube.

1-15-2 6”-9” Dual Field Image Tube

Sm17 Console button enables selecting the desired field size. S501 A&B must be closed.

Opening and closing of the collimator blades is the same as for the 6” Image Tube.

In the 9” mode, the Z signal =0. This changes the limit switch selection for the collimator blades. The maximum opening now depends onFCGR1 and FCGR2 instead of FCSC1 and FCSC2 in Fluoro.

In the 6” mode, the Z signal = 1. Collimator blades will now be automatically set to the FCSC1 and FCSC2 limit positions.

Flashing of the control switch LED’s is identical to that for the 6” Image Tube.

1-15-3 Circular Collimators

These are driven by 7M5 and 7M4. They function to confine the x-ray beam emission.

In the Rad mode both circular collimators are moved out of the x-ray beam.

In the Fluoro 6” mode 7M5 moves the 6” circular collimator in the x-ray field to limit x-ray emission to the 6” input field size of the image tube.

In the Fluoro 9” mode 7M4 moves the 9” circular collimator in the x-ray field to limit emission to the 9” Image Tube input view field.

With a single field 6” image tube, 7M4 is used to move the 6” circular collimator to limit input field size.

GE Medical Systems



7-38

REV 1

DelayLogic CktsG161, 162,170, 171

(3A7)Auto

(3A7)ER

(3A5)Sexp

(3A7)F110

R239C235

Syx Sc(3A19)

Q145

Q148

Q512G166

S133D

G166

S133C

Module 8 TV Camera

Auto Gain Control (CAG)

Video Blank

Beam (Max)

+24v

Q149Q146

Zoom (Mag mode)Zoom Z1

G163Q152

9SmlAux CoilSm21

Sm 4

2A3Module D

2A1Module G

TimeCounterK233

+5V

TimeCounterK510Q209

PRX(3A12)

Logic CktsG162, 176, 177

RAD

SYXSC

OX(3A19)

OX HLC(3A9)

Q132

S133A

3A3 Board

Illustration 7-16

GE Medical Systems



7-39

REV 1

1-16 3A3 BOARD


TV Camera Automatic Gain Control (CAG) operates during:

Auto Fluoro or Electronic Rad (ER)

During x-ray ON (SEXP)

KV at upper limit (F110 )

S133A permits activating the AGC without the above signals (closed).

The delay circuit inhibits CAG at the start to enable TV camera reaching stability.

S133D enables unblanking the TV camera without x-ray Syx Sc.

S133C enables setting TV vidicon beam current to low beam during x-ray emission Syx Sc.

Depressing either Sm21 or Sm4 energizes the auxiliary coil of 95ml switching the unit OFF.

In High Dose Fluoro (HLC), the OX logic signal generates the OX HLC to 3A9 to close down the TV aperture (iris) in the HLC mode. The

Syx Sc holds the HLC during pulsed Fluoro. OX HLC is defeated in the Rad mode.

With a dual field tube, in the 6” mode Z1 logic signal enables switching the image tube electron optics for the magnify mode.

PRX logic (x-ray on) activates Time Counter K233 to record x-ray on time. Time Counter K510 is active as soon as power is turned ON.

Therefore it records the total ON time of the Stenoscop.

GE Medical Systems



7-40

REV 1

Mod D (2A3) 3A5

Sm22Sm23

Sm5Sm9

3A7Mod G (2A1)

Logic CktsG16, Q17Q25, Q30

DriversQ28

Q33

K34

K44

1A1 Board

Trans5TR1

K6

PowerSupply

K34, K44PolarityReverse 1M1 Up/Down

Drive Motor

To Module 8+24V

MSI XR 0359

C-Arm Motor Drive

Illustration 7-17

GE Medical Systems



7-41

REV 1

1-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE


Up/down motion of the C-Arm is performed by the 1M1 motor.

Depressing either Sm23 or Sm5 produces UP drive.

Depressing either Sm22 or Sm9 produces Down motion.

Depressing any of the above console buttons energizes K6 to enable applying power to the 1M1 motor.

The power supply also furnishes +24v DC to Module 8 (Image Tube and TV Camera).

GE Medical Systems



7-42

REV 1

MSI XR 0368

Q

Q

G140DQ55

G140EQ57

G106

+24V

+24VQ194G140F

Q195G140A

Sm10

Sm9

H Sweep24

23V Sweep

To Module 8TV Camera

G163DQ171

Sm6

G163EQ176

Sm5

G163BQ151

G163CQ156

Sm8

Sm7

12V

12V

Monitor 1

9A1

12V

12V

Monitor 2

9A2

K7

K5

K5

K7

3A5 Timer

Illustration 7-18

GE Medical Systems



7-43

REV 1

1-18 3A5 TIMER


Added to the Timer Board functions already covered, the Board performs the following additional functions:

TV Camera Sweep reversal

Camera sweep reversal is controlled by Sm9 and Sm10 buttons on the control console. Sm9 enables horizontal image reversal while Sm10

permits vertical reversal of the TV Camera image.

Depressing the console buttons flips the G106 dual bistable. The bistable outputs drive opto couplers Q55 and 57 to switch +24V to the TV

Camera H and V sweep circuits. The Q outputs of G106 also drive transistors Q195 and Q194 to energize the selected button LED’S.

1-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation

Console buttons Sm7 and Sm8 switch ON transistors Q156 and Q151 respectively to drive the sweep rotation coil relays K5 and K7 for Monitor

1. The relays energize the motor drive circuit for image rotation on Monitor 1.

Console buttons Sm5 and Sm6 switch transistors Q176 and Q171 to energize Monitor 2 sweep rotation relays K5 and K7 for Monitor 2.

The 3A5 Board also contains circuitry for Monitor brightness control. The circuits, however, are not used.

GE Medical Systems



7-44

REV 1


GE Medical Systems



7-45

REV 1

1-19 LAB EXERCISE

Refer to Stenoscop 2 Manual Part 1, Section 5.

Have the students do the following Lab Exercises as outlined in the above:

Guide Wheel/Adjustment

Handle Position

C-Arm Rotation Brake

Travel Safety

Fluoro mA

Fluoro Pre Heating

Fluoro Timer

Rad Safety

Rad Pre Heating

FL/Rad Switch Verification

mAs Integrators

Auto Fluoro Systems

GE Medical Systems



7-46

REV 1

VRI +18V24V.

R1

AGC DelayMNI

R9

AGC (On/Off)To Camera Video Amp

MSI XR 0378

GI

VR2

+24V �15

+10V

DS3

MAG R6 G2

MX1

G3

G3

G2

NOR R2

MAG R3

NOR R5

MAGMode 1 DH2

MAI

MAI

MA2

G3

G2

CR3

CR4

CR2

G1

To image tubepower supply

R8

+15VIRIS DH1

To Iris Control+15V

-15V

TP2

TP7

TP9

TP8

TP3 TP4

TP5

TP6R*MAG R10

MX2NOR

*Only on 45560536

Power Supply (PL1)

Illustration 7-19

GE Medical Systems



7-47

REV 1

1-20 TV Camera

1-20-1 Power Supply (PL1)


24v input to voltage regulator VR1 provides a +18v output for the TV Camera circuits. R1 enables adj to 18 v ± .1v.

In fluoro, with CL/ON and x-ray/ON inputs both high, the AGC is active when the kV reaches 110 kV after a delay set by MN1. R9 enables

setting the AGC delay. The delay permits the TV Camera circuits to stabilize before AGC becomes active.

24v input to Regulator G1 produces the ±15v DC output.

The LED, DS3 is energized if the Image Tube current exceeds 1µA.

Regulator VR2 furnishes +10v to the image tube electrode adjustment pots R2, R3, R5, R6, R8 and R10. The pots enable adjusting the Image

Tube G1, G2 and G3 electrostatic lens voltages in the normal and magnify modes as indicated.

External control signals for image tube (normal and +mag) mode switching and iris HQ mode positioning is through the opto-couplers DH2, and

DH1, respectively.

CR3, CR4 and CR2 protect against overvoltage.

GE Medical Systems



7-48

REV 1

Q1,2,3 & 4Q5, 6, 7MA1-1,2MX1-1,2,3

TP1 ImV=InA

NewviconTargetSignal

R1Black LevelAdjust.

Q8

TP4

MSI XR 0376

S4BlackWindow

Hclamp

To Sync & Mask PL3RX(Auto Brightness)

R2 Max Gain

MA3, 4Q9, 10, 11, 12 Q17, 18, 19

TP11

CompBlanking

CompSync

F110

Q16

Q20

MA5-2MX2-1, 2, 3Q15

R5Man. Gain

R6AGC Gain

Gamma & Edgeenhance Q13,14, S2, S3

R4 Gamma - wht clip

CompositeVideoto Memory DSM& Monitors

250 mVB/W

R7Video BlkLevel (Set-up)

50 mV Set-up

Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2)

Illustration 7-20

GE Medical Systems



7-49

REV 1

1-20-2 Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2)


The Newvicon target video signal drives the series connected amplifiers Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4. At TP1, the level is

1mV = 1nA.

Next we feed the black level circuit consisting of Q5, Q6 and Q7, MA1 and MA2 and electronic switches MX1-1, MX1-2 & MX1-3. The output is

applied to Q8 to provide the (Rx) auto brightness signal.

R1 enables setting the video black level to the Newvicon dark current level.

The black level circuit utilizes the H clamp and black window signal inputs.

The signal at TP4 also drives the MA3 and MA4 attenuator and amplifier. R2 sets the maximum gain and is a factory adjustment.

The output of Q12 is applied to differential amplifier Q17 and Q18 and an emitter output Q19 for the composite video output at TP11.

Note that composite sync and blanking are added to form the composite output.

R7 enables establishing the video black level 50 mV above blanking.

The output of Q12 is also fed to the Gamma and white clip and Edge Enhancement circuits formed by Q13 & 14. Switching S2 enables

Gamma and white clip correction by means of R4. S2 permits injecting Edge Enhancement.

The output of MA5-1 drives the AGC circuits consisting of MA5-2 and 3 and electronic switches MX2-1, 2 and 3. R5 is used for manual gain

setting while R6 is for setting the AGC gain in the active mode. The circuit is active in the auto fluoro and electronic radiographic modes when

maximum kV = 110 is reached.

GE Medical Systems



7-50

REV 1

MSI XR 0377

5.04 MHz(525 linerate)

CrystalOSC &DividerMNI

MN2MUX H

V

D

D

Comp Sync & blanking

MN5MA32X Int

R1 H centMA5

MN6MA42xInt

R2Vcent

R4 Size

MA6-1

MA6-2

Video CircularBlanking

Blk Window

R6 Size

MA 7 ABC Window

R5 Size

Amp Q2, 3, 4, 5, & 6MX2- 1, 2, 3 Video ABC

(To 3A5)

Video Rx

(From Pre AmpPL2)

R3Roundness

TP6

TP7

TP11

TP12

TP13

Sync and Mask Board (PL3)

Illustration 7-21

GE Medical Systems



7-51

REV 1

1-21 SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3)


The master oscillator and divider (MN1) is crystal controlled at 5.04 mHz and provides RS170 sync and blanking for the 525 line rate.

The Mux (MN2) outputs produces the composite sync and blanking and horizontal and vertical drive outputs.

The horizontal and vertical drive square wave signals are each integrated twice to generate the parabola signals required for the video, black

window and ABC window circular patterns.

R1 enables horizontal circular mask centering and R2 centers the circular mask patterns vertically. R3 is adjusted for circular mask roundness.

Video blanking diameter is set by R4, and the Black Window and ABC window sizes are adjusted by R6 and R5, respectively.

The Rx signal from the Video Board is passed through the series connected amplifiers consisting of Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Q6 and electronic

switches MX2-1, MX2-2 and MX2-3 to produce the ABC window video to the hysteresis circuit on 3A5. Q6 enables averaging of the video data

in the sample window area.

GE Medical Systems



7-52

REV 1

MA1-1 MA2-1, 2MX2-1, 2, 3 Vsweep

(Defl)

VD

R2 Vcent Rev

R1

R5V size

Q6 ,Q7 Cathode(Newvicon)

V D

Q5 TRIHD

R6H size R7 H Lin

R9H centNOR

K1

R8 H centRev

H sweep(Defl)

R12 Target

R10Focus MA4, Q8 Focus

Q3 TR2MA3

Target 0 to +80V.

G2 300VG3 450VG4 630V

G1 Beam

R4 Stand-by

K2R11 Normal

R3

(G ,G , G2 3 4 )

HD

+18V VRI 6.3V Filament

To Newvicon

MSI XR 0375

,

HD

Vcent NOR

Scan Converter and Focus (PL5)

Illustration 7-22

GE Medical Systems



7-53

REV 1

1-22 SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5)


Vertical Drive to MA1 and MA2 amplifiers and electronic switching MX2 provides Vertical Sweep to the Camera tube Vertical Deflection Coil.

R5 permits sweep size adjustment while R1 and R2 enable vertical raster centering on the camera tube target for normal and reverse

presentations, respectively.

Vertical and Horizontal Drive to Q6 and Q7 produces Camera Tube Cathode blanking.

Horizontal Drive to Q5 and Transformer TR1 develops the horizontal sweep to the Camera tube H Deflection coil.

R6 and R7 are for H size and H linearity corrections, respectively. R8 and R9 enable centering the raster horizontally on the Camera tube target

in the normal and reverse modes.

R10 adjustment, fed to MA4 amplifier and driver output Q8 to the Camera Tube focus coil enables focusing the beam on the Newvicon target.

H Drive to the circuit consisting of Q3, MA3 and Transformer TR2 enables setting Newvicon operating potentials as follows:

R12 established the required target voltage.

A single adjustment, R3, sets the G2, G3 and G4 Camera tube electrode potentials.

R4 and R11 set the Newvicon G1 beam potentials for STAND-BY (no x-ray exposure) and NORMAL (x-ray) modes. K2 relay is driven

by the control circuits on Board 3A3.

Filament voltage (6.3v DC) for the Camera pick-up tube is obtained from regulator VR1.

GE Medical Systems



7-54

REV 1

IRIS SIGFrom3A9

Std FL

HLC

P1

P2

B3

X

B2B1

+24V

-

+

B1+

-

B2

M+

-IRIS

63 mm(Max open)

ServoPosition

+V

MSI XR 0374

Iris Control

Illustration 7-23

GE Medical Systems



7-55

REV 1

1-23 IRIS CONTROL


The iris, or aperture, has only two positions. One is for setting the standard fluoro light input to the TV Camera pick-up tube. The second is for

the HLC operating mode.

These iris openings are established by adjustment of P1 for standard fluoro and P2 for HLC. In the HLC mode, the iris is closed down from its

fluoro position.

The iris is physically located in front of the TV Camera lens. Its maximum physical opening is 63mm.

Let’s consider we are adjusting P1 to establish the iris opening for standard fluoro. Assume we develop a positive voltage output at X of B3.

This is fed through follower B2 applies a positive input to the inverter input of B1 and develops a negative output voltage across the top side of

motor M.

Note that the positive output of follower B2 is also applied to the positive input of the lower B1 on the drawing. Its output will, therefore, be

positive applied to the lower side of motor M. Simply, we have a voltage across the motor and the iris motor drives and changes the iris

opening.

Note that the servo position pot is physically tied to the motor. Thus, we now develop an increasing positive input position voltage to the

remaining inputs of both B1 output drivers. This is applied through the lower follower, B2, as the position of the servo pot is changed.

When the sum of the inputs to both B1 drivers is zero, their outputs will be zero and the motor stops.

Adjusting P2 will result in the same action, and we will close down the iris opening for HLC operation.

GE Medical Systems



7-56

REV 1

U4 U3U2 U1Q1 Q2

H

V

(Sync)

(Sync separator)

Q3,4,5

Q6

C17

VideoIn Q1 0Q7, 8

Diff. Amp Follower

Q11

XR0386

Q9

R45BIAS

Q1 Q2, 3, 4, 5

RemoteBrightnessQ6

Grid to CRTCathode

Follower Diff ampscascaded

R32BIAS

Blankingcircuit Q101to Q105

H-Vblanking control

Extblanking

R29 Gain

Blk LevelClamp

Remotecontrast

Video Preamp and Output Amplifier

Illustration 7-24

GE Medical Systems



7-57

REV 1

1-24 DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS


The camera video output is fed to series connected buffers Q3, 4 and 5. R29 sets the video level gain. Output buffer Q5 is capacity coupled to

a differential amplifier (Q7 and Q8).

At the output of the differential amplifier, R45 driving Q9 enables setting the video black level to zero as measured on the collector of Q8. Also,

the remote contrast permits establishing the desired contrast setting through Q11.

Q10 follower applies the video to Q1 which in turn drives the differential amplifier (Q2 and Q3). These now drive a pair of cascade output

amplifiers (Q4 and Q5). The collector of Q5 drives the CRT cathode while the Q4 output is applied to the grid of the CRT.

Remote brightness adjust fed to Q6 enables establishing the desired video brightness level on the grid of the CRT.

The composite signal applied to the sync separator circuits strips the video portion and produces the H and V sync outputs.

Q6 clamps the video black level.

The blanking circuit will permit blanking the video during H and V retrace periods or upon an external blanking commands.

GE Medical Systems



7-58

REV 1

OSC - PLLU101, U102

H Sync

R110

+V PhaseDelay

+V

R113H hold

Q101 Pre Amp T101Q104 Output Amp

T102 & RegU105, U104, U106

+Video-150V.+6V.+5V.-5V.

L 103 Width

L 102 Lin

H Defl

To Q301 dynamic focus

To Q303(Sweepprotect)

L 101H cent

B+Boost V.

Simplified H Sweep Circuit

Illustration 7-25

GE Medical Systems



7-59

REV 1


The PLL oscillator, U102, driving the preamp, Q101, and output amplifier, Q104, locks the deflection output pulse to the H sync input.

Q104 feeds the series connected horizontal deflection coil, H linearity L102, width coil L103 and the H centering L101.

Q104 also switches the current input to T102 primary at the horizontal sweep rate (15.75 kHz). The secondary of T102 driving the voltage

regulators U105, U104 and U103 produces the +6v and ±5v regulated outputs. In addition, T102 supplies the -150v and +video unregulated

outputs.

R110 sets the phase of oscillator U102 while R113 enables adjustment of the horizontal hold to within ±150 Hz of the H sync.

L102, L103 and L101 permit adjusting H linearity, width and centering, respectively.

Notice that the H drive current through the width coil L103 is also fed to Q303 for sweep failure protection and to Q301 for dynamic focus.

GE Medical Systems



7-60

REV 1

Q303Q304

XR0387

Q201 InverterU201-OSC,Ramp gen,

V Sync

power amp.

Q202Q203

R205AV freq.

V Defl

R212V size

R213V linearity

V shapeR207

To dynamic focusckt (V parabola)

V sweep

H sweep

L 103H. width

(Sweep failure protection)

To CRT(Control Grid)

R219V cent

+V

Simplified V Sweep Circuit

Illustration 7-26

GE Medical Systems



7-61

REV 1


U201 is an oscillator, a ramp generator and power amplifier. The oscillator is locked to the V inverted sync input while the output power

amplifier drives the vertical deflection yoke.

R219 enables vertical raster centering.

Q303 and Q304 protect the CRT against either an H or V sweep drive failure. Should a sweep failure occur, the control grid of the CRT will be

driven to cut-off.

Q202 and Q203 furnish a V parabola signal to the dynamic focus circuit.

R205A is the vertical hold adjustment.

R212 enables adjusting the vertical raster size.

R213 adds the parabola signal to the ramp generator section of U201 for setting the top and bottom V raster size to center size ratio.

R207 enables fine adjustment of V sweep linearity.

GE Medical Systems



7-62

REV 1

+V

Q302+300V

C309C304

CR304

To CRT (FOCUS GRID)

+V

+V

DC Focus

-150 V

To CRT (G2)

R321

R323Q301

Corner focus

V Parabola

C307CR308

R310

V Focus

C302 & C303

+VT301

G2Adj.

L103Width

R311H Focus

Simplifed Dynamic Focus Circuit

Illustration 7-27

GE Medical Systems



7-63

REV 1


Transformer T301 and capacitors C302 and C303 form a tuned resonant circuit at the H rate. The tank circuit is excited by the H sweep through

Q301.

Thus, the output at T301 is a sinusoid at the H frequency, coupled to the Monitor CRT focus electrode through C304.

The H oscillations are modulated by the V parabola applied to the base of Q301 and controlled by R309. This particularly effects the focus at

the corners of the raster scan.

R311 controls the peak amplitude of the H oscillations and therefore must be set for best focus at the edges of the H sweep.

R310 controls the amplitude of the V parabola driving Q302 and enables adjusting the V focus at the top and bottom edges of the vertical

sweep.

The DC focus potential is set by R323. It is set to provide best center focus.

The final resultant signal output to the CRT focus grid is a sinusoid at the H frequency, amplitude modulated by the V parabola and added to

the DC level set by R323.

R321 enables adjusting the CRT, G2 electrode potential.

GE Medical Systems



7-64

REV 1

L-CFilter

HV Supply(sealed)Nonserviceable

To CRTAccelAnode

T2

XR0390

CR9

220VAC

R33U3 & U4

U1Switcher Q1 &2R11 U2

CR1

CR8

R5&6

T1

C13

Simplified Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS)

Illustration 7-28

GE Medical Systems



7-65

REV 1


220v AC is fed to bridge rectifier CR9.

Current through R5 and R6 charges C13 to the threshold level (16v) and starts switcher U1. U1 drives Q1 and Q2 and energizes T1.

T1 output current through T2 feeds the RC filter network to produce the +24v regulated output.

T2 secondary continues to supply the switcher U1 through CR1.

If the T2 supply is too high, the crowbar circuit involving U2 and CR8 is activated for circuit protection.

The feedback voltage across R33 driving the Zener U4 and the opto-coupler U3 determines the duty cycle (ON-OFF) time of switcher U1. The

+24v DC output of the power supply is thus regulated to within +24v ±.5v.

R11 and R33 are factory set and should require no further adjustment.

GE Medical Systems



7-66

REV 1

Rear PanelSwitch Bd. Light Sensor

Board

Main Board

AlphaNumericDisplay

SwitchInterfaceBoard

Lens PlateBoard M Shutter

Film Cassette

Photo Cell

Monitor

CRT

Matrix 1010 (Model 1) Block Diagram

Illustration 7-29

GE Medical Systems



7-67

REV 1

1-25 1010 FORMATTER


The main board performs the following functions:

• It accepts operator-selected exposure parameters through the Rear Panel Switch Board and the Switch Interface Board.

• It drives the Alphanumeric Display

• The Main Board uses the photocell brightness control signal to control monitor CRT brightness for constant film exposure density

• The Main Board controls opening and closing of the shutter drive motor through the lens Plate Board.

• It houses the Z80 microprocessor and memories that control Matrix functions.

GE Medical Systems



7-68

REV 1

Shutter

Mirror

Film cassette

Lens

Mirror

Photo Cell

xr0395

Mirror

CRT

Matrix 1010 Optical Path

Illustration 7-30

GE Medical Systems



7-69

REV 1


The folded optical light path is as shown in the drawing.

Note the position of the photocell on the second mirror. The photocell is used to manage monitor CRT brightness.

The shutter remains closed before each film exposure to set-up the brightness loop in a calibration mode. It then opens for the film exposure.

Actual film exposure time is controlled by unblanking the monitor CRT.

GE Medical Systems



7-70

REV 1

XR0393

D / A

mp

CRT

Monitor

Contrast, blanking& brightness

CompareA/D

Mux

Integratorlight sensor board

Photo cell

OperatorSelect

Contrast Exposure time& brightness

Memory

Brightness Exposure Control Loop

Illustration 7-31

GE Medical Systems



7-71

REV 1


The operator programs the monitor brightness, contrast and exposure time for the desired film density and film to be used. The operator data is

stored in memory. Up to eight sets of values can be stored using four for positive images and four for negative images.

Using the set exposure parameters, the brightness feedback loop maintains monitor brightness for consistent film density. The photocell

operates in conjunction with the microprocessor and the video monitor. It reads monitor brightness and produces an output current proportional

to brightness.

Before each film exposure, the microprocessor commands the monitor to display a calibration pattern.

The photocell measures the monitor CRT light output with the “Cal” pattern and the microprocessor then compares this with a reference level

represented by the brightness number stored in memory. The microprocessor then adjusts the monitor brightness to match the reference value.

When this occurs, the calibration cycle is completed, the CRT displays the video image, the shutter opens and the exposure takes place.

The block diagram shows the photocell current output integrated on the Light Sensor Board, passed through a mux and then to a comparator

and A/D converter to the microprocessor. The microprocessor looks at the stored memory exposure data, compares this with the photocell

signal and then provides a correction through a D/A to the monitor brightness circuit to satisfy the loop. Stored memory data with respect to

contrast and exposure time is also fed to the monitor circuits. Exposure timing is controlled by unblanking the monitor.

GE Medical Systems



7-72

REV 1

SmoothingBoard

Video Amp.

Comp Video

Unblanking

Contrast

V. Defl

Comp Sync

V Sweep

H Defl. Coil

H Defl

V Defl. Coil

PLL Sync

H Sync

XSync

CRT Board

H Scan &Blanking

V Scan &Blanking

XR0394

Brightness

Scan Fail

H. V. PowerSupply

CRTFilament

+750V.

BrightnessScan & DYN Focus

Output Board

Comp Video & Blanking

CRT

-150 & +750v

Matrix Video Monitor Block Diagram

Illustration 7-32

GE Medical Systems



7-73

REV 1


1-26 VIDEO AMPLIFIER

Composite video from the Mother Board is applied to the Video Amplifier. The video signal is amplified and stripped of sync. Composite video

drives the Output Board and is then applied to the CRT cathode. Composite sync is fed to the V Defl and the Smoothing Board. Contrast signal

from the Mother Board sets the gain on the Video Amplifier while the unblanking input drives the cathode of the CRT to control exposure time.

1-26-1 Smoothing Board

Composite sync from the Video Amplifier is used to develop H Sync and V Sweep on the Smoothing Board. H Sync is applied to the H Defl

while V Sweep is used on the V Defl. PLL sync from the H Defl to the Smoothing board is used as a line clock. The X Sync output to the

external circuits (Mother Board) is for blanking control for photographic applications.

1-26-2 V Defl

The V Defl produces the V drive the the Vert deflection coil and applies V scan and blanking to the CRT Board. These are derived from the

ramp signal from the Smoothing Board and the composite sync from the Vertical Amplifier. Adjustable blanking from composite sync is used for

dynamic focus on the CRT Board.

1-26-3 H Defl

The H Defl furnishes H scan and blanking to the CRT Board. These are developed by processing the H sync input from the Smoothing Board.

The H sync also produces the H sweep to the Horizontal CRT deflection coil.

1-26-4 CRT Board

The board functions to detect H or V sweep failures. Should such occur, the scan fail signal is developed and fed to the external control circuits.

The brightness signal from the Mother Board controls a brightness amplifier which in turn drives the G1 electrode of the CRT (through the

Output Board). H and V blanking inputs together with the -150V to +750V potentials from the HV supply are used for static and dynamic focus

to the Output Board. The CRT Board also has a filament regulator for the CRT filament.

1-26-5 Output Board

Summing of the static and dynamic focus signal inputs from the CRT Board enables applying focus control potentials to the G4 electrode of the

CRT. The brightness signal and +750v inputs fed through low pass filters produce potentials for the G1 (brightness) and G2 electrodes of the

CRT.

A regulated filament voltage passes through the Output Board to the filament of the CRT. Finally, the composite video from the Video Amplifier

fed through a final cathode amplifier drives the CRT cathode. Blanking from the Video Amplifier enables controlling the Output Board cathode

amplifier to either blank or unblank the CRT.

GE Medical Systems



7-74

REV 1


GE Medical Systems



7-75

REV 1

1-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE

DESCRIPTION:

This lab will provide the student with experience doing the electronic adjustments for the X-ray portion of the Stenoscop.

REFERENCES:

XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement - Section 19

COMPETENCIES:

Upon completion student will be able to perform the following:

S kVp measurement

S Travel safety

S Fluoro mA adjustment

S Fluoro Preheating

S Fluoro Timer

S Rad Safety

S Rad mA Preheating

S Rad/Fluoro switch test

S mAs Integrators

PROCEDURE TIME: 2.5 to 3.0 hr

SAFETY:

Use proper radiation safety as stated in Section 2-1 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement Radiation Safety Policy.

PROCEDURE:

Follow the adjustments procedures given in Section 19 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement. Use the Service Manual that was

received with the equipment to insure that we are using the most current directions.

GE Medical Systems



7-76

REV 1


GE Medical Systems



7-77

REV 1

1-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE

DESCRIPTION:

This lab will provide necessary experience for the student for calibration of the Stenoscop Image System.

REFERENCES:

XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement - Section 13

COMPETENCIES:

Upon completion student will be able to perform the following:

S Calibration of the Monicon 3 Camera System

S Calibration of the Imageur Image System

S Calibration of the Stenoscop Auto Brightness Loop

S Use of the DSM Image Quality Tests

PROCEDURE TIME: 4.0 to 6.0 hr

SAFETY:

Use proper radiation safety as stated in Section 2-1 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement Radiation Safety Policy, Static Control -

ESD and Energy Control and Power Lock Out.

PROCEDURE:

Follow the calibration in XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement, Section 11 Monicon 3 TV Calibration.

GE Medical Systems



7-78

REV 1


stenos cop 2

Documents